Rudarski Radovi 3-4 2017

ISSN 2334-8836 (Štampano izdanje)
UDC 622
ISSN 2406-1395 (Online)
Mining and Metallurgy

Engineering Bor
3-4/2017
Published by: Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor

Mining and Metallurgy
Engineering Bor
3-4/2017
MINING AND METALLURGY INSTITUTE BOR
MINING AND METALLURGY ENGINEERING Editorial Board

BOR is a journal based on the rich tradition of Prof.Ph.D. Tajduš Antoni
expert and scientific work from the field of mining, The Stanislaw University of Mining and
underground and open-pit mining, mineral proce-
Metallurgy, Krakow, Poland
ssing, geology, mineralogy, petrology, geomecha-
nics, metallurgy, materials, technology, as well as Prof.Ph.D. Mevludin Avdić
related fields of science. Since 2001, published MGCF-University of Tuzla, B&H
twice a year, and since 2011 four times a year. Prof.Ph.D. Vladimir Bodarenko
National Mining University, Department of
Editor-in-chief Deposit Mining, Ukraine
Academic Ph.D. Milenko Ljubojev, Principal Ph.D. Mile Bugarin, Principal Research Fellow
Reasearch Fellow Mining and Metallurgy Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor
Institute Bor Prof.Ph.D. Ruža Čeliković
Full member of ESC MGCF-University of Tuzla, B&H
E-mail: milenko.ljubojev@irmbor.co.rs Ph.D. Miroslav R.Ignjatović, Senior Research Associate
Phone: +38130/454-109, 435-164 Chamber of Commerce and Industry Serbia
Editor Prof.Ph.D. Vencislav Ivanov
Mining Faculty, University of Mining and Geology
Vesna Marjanović, B.Eng. "St. Ivan Rilski" Sofia Bulgaria
English Translation Academic Prof.Ph.D. Jerzy Kicki
Nevenka Vukašinović, prof. Gospodarkl Surowcami Mineralnymi i Energia,
Krakow, Poland
Technical Editor
Ph. D., PEng. Dragan Komljenović
Suzana Cvetković Hydro-Quebec Research Institute Canada
Preprinting Ph. D. Ana Kostov, Principal Research Fellow
Vesna Simić Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor
Printed in: Grafomedtrade Bor Prof. Ph. D. Nikola Lilić
Faculty of Mining and Geology Belgrade
Circulation: 200 copies Ph.D. Dragan Milanović, Senior Research Associate
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor
Web site
Prof.Ph.D. Vitomir Milić
www.irmbor.co.rs Technical Faculty Bor
Journal is financially supported by Ph.D. Aleksandra Milosavljević, Senior Research Associate
The Ministry of Education, Science and Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor
Technological Development of the Republic Serbia Ph.D. Eldar Pirić
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor Mining Institute Tuzla
ISSN 2334-8836 (Printed edition) Ph.D. Dragoslav Rakić
Faculty of Mining and Geology Belgrade
ISSN 2406-1395 (Online) Prof.Ph.D. Rodoljub Stanojlović
Journal indexing in SCIndex and ISI. Technical Faculty Bor
All rights reserved. Academic Prof.Ph.D. Mladen Stjepanović
Engineering Academy of Serbia
Published by
Ph.D. Biserka Trumić, Principal Research Fellow
19210 Bor, Zeleni bulevar 35
Prof.Ph.D. Milivoj Vulić
E-mail: milenko.ljubojev@irmbor.co.rs
University of Ljubljana, Slovenia
Phone: +38130/454-110
Prof.Ph.D. Nenad Vušović
Technical Faculty Bor
Scientific – Technical Cooperation with
the Engineering Academy of Serbia
JOURNAL OF INTERNATIONAL IMPORTANCE, VERIFIED BY A SPECIAL DECISION

OF THE MINISTRY OF EDUCATION, SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT
OF THE REPUBLIC SERBIA - M24
CONTENS
SADRŽAJ
Zoran M. Milićević, Dragan D. Marinović, Nebojša Z. Djokić, Ljiljana J. Arsić

IMPACT THE CONCENTRATION OF SUSPENDED PARTICLES PM10 ON
THE AIR POLLUTION IN THE CITY OF KRALJEVO (SERBIA) ............................................................... 1
Aleksandar Doderović, Nikola Stanić, Miljan Gomilanović, Saša Stepanović

REDISTRIBUTION OF EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT FOR THE PURPOSE OF
ACHIEVING THE DESIRED CAPACITY AND IMPROVEMENT THE UTILIZATION
TIME OF EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................................. 11
Dejan Todorović, Zoran Bartulović, Vladimir Jovanović, Branislav Ivošević

THE BOND WORK INDEX OF LIMESTONE AND ANDESITE MIXTURES ........................................... 21
Dušan Polomčić, Dragoljub Bajić, Jelena Ratković, Bojan Hajdin

ESTIMATING HYDRAULIC PARAMETERS FOR THE COMPLEX
HYDRODYNAMIC MODELS ...................................................................................................................... 29
Vladimir M. Petrović, Mirko Borisov, Dragan Zlatanović, Lidija Djurdjevac Ignjatović

VERTICAL ACCURACY OF DATA ON THE TOPOGRAPHIC MAPS AND
THEIR APPLICATION IN MINING ............................................................................................................. 39
Daniel Kržanović, Milenko Ljubojev, Ivana Jovanović, Nenad Vušović

AN ANALYSIS THE EFFECTS OF CHANGES IN PRICE OF
METAL AND OPERATING COSTS TO THE PROFIT IN EXPLOITATION
THE COPPER ORE DEPOSITS, A CASE STUDY: COPPER MINE MAJDANPEK, SERBIA ................... 51
Nenad Magdalinović, Bojan Drobnjaković, Ivana Jovanović, Sanja Petrović

OPTIMAL NUMBER OF REVOLUTION THE ECCENTRIC SHAFT OF A
JAW CRUSHER WITH A SIMPLE MOTION OF THE MOVING JAW ...................................................... 59
Gordana Rendulić, Marija Mirić

THE ROLE OF LEADERS IN MOTIVATION OF EMPLOYEES IN
THE MINING COMPANIES ......................................................................................................................... 65
Nikola Stanić, Saša Stepanović, Dejan Govedarica, Aleksandar Doderović

APPLICATION THE SOFTWARE SOLUTION FOR CALCULATION THE CAPACITY
OF BUCKET WHEEL EXCAVATORS IN THE COMPLEX CONDITIONS FROM
THE ASPECT OF RESISTANCE TO EXCAVATION ................................................................................. 75
Ivana Jovanović, Srđana Magdalinović, Miomir Mikić, Igor Miljanović

POSSIBILITIES OF INTRODUCING AN INTELLIGENT CONTROL SYSTEM IN
THE FLOTATION PLANT VELIKI KRIVELJ ............................................................................................. 85
Dragana Spasić-Djurić, Radiša Đurić, Dejan Crnčević
METALLURGY IN THE MEDIEVAL BRANICEVO .................................................................................. 91
Dragiša Stanujkić, Dragan Milanović, Srdjana Magdalinović, Ivana Jovanović

AN APPROACH TO THE EVALUATION OF FROTH FLOTATION REAGENTS
BASED ON THE USE OF THE SWARA AND WS-PLP METHODS ........................................................ 103
Vladimir Radovanović, Ljiljana Savic

WITH THE KNOWLEDGE TO THE WORLD OF ECOLOGICAL
DEVELOPMENT - CASE OF THE “TREPCA” COMPANY, KOSOVSKA MITROVICA ....................... 111
Milesa Ž. Srećković, Zoran M. Karastojković, Milovan M. Janićijević, Zoran Stević

LASER BEAM DRILLING AND CUTTING OF PMMA ........................................................................... 123
Mlađan Maksimović, Miodrag Brzaković, Miloš Grahovac, Ivana Jovanović

AN APPROACH FOR EVALUATION THE SAFETY AND QUALITY OF
TRANSPORT AT THE OPEN PIT MINES, BASED ON THE EDAS METHOD ...................................... 139
Dušan Tašić, Dragan Ignjatović, Lidija Đurđevac Ignjatović, Slađana Krstić

POSSIBILITY OF STONE USE FROM THE QUARRY "BRESJE" IN JAGODINA
AS A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION STONE ......................................................................................... 145
Dragan Ignjatović, Lidija Đurđevac Ignjatović, Dušan Tašić, Milenko Ljubojev

LANDFILL STABILITY ANALYSIS AT THE OPEN PIT “GACKO“,
BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA - REPUBLIC OF SRPSKA ..................................................................... 149
Saša Stepanović, Nikola Stanić, Dejan Bugarin, Miljan Gomilanović

SELECTION THE OPTIMAL DEVELOPMENT OPTIONS OF
MINING OPERATIONS IN THE GACKO COAL BASIN ......................................................................... 155
Miomir Mikić, Radmilo Rajković, Milenko Jovanović, Miroslava Maksimović

THE IMPACT OF BLASTING ON THE ENVIRONMENT IN THE OPEN PIT MINING ........................ 165
Marko Savić, Milan Milojević, Nikola Pavlović, Miloš Milanović

SOURCES OF POLLUTION IN LEAD - ZINC CONCENTRATE PRODUCTION IN
THE FLOTATION PLANT “KOPAONIK“ – LEPOSAVIĆ ........................................................................ 171
Saša Stepanović, Radmilo Rajković, Nikola Stanić, Dejan Bugarin

SELECTION THE MOST FAVORABLE PUMP TYPE AND CONFIGURATION
OF PUMP SYSTEMS AT THE OPEN PIT GRAČANICA – GACKO ........................................................ 179
Branislav Rajković, Dragoljub Cvetković, Radmilo Rajković

SELECTION OF INDUSTRIAL PROCESS FAN WITH
APPLICATION OF SOFTWARE ................................................................................................................ 195
MINING AND METALLURGY INSTITUTE BOR ISSN: 2334-8836 (Štampano izdanje)
UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 628.539:504.06(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704001M
Zoran M. Milićević*, Dragan D. Marinović**,

Nebojša Z. Djokić*, Ljiljana J. Arsić*
IMPACT THE CONCENTRATION OF SUSPENDED PARTICLES

PM10 ON THE AIR POLLUTION IN THE CITY OF
KRALJEVO (SERBIA)
Abstract
This paper analyzes the concentration of PM10 suspended particles in the air sampled from one
measuring spot in the downtown area of the City of Kraljevo. The analysis includes 1358 samples (one
sample per 24 hours) in the period 2012-2015. Sampling of the ambient air and analysis of samples
were carried out by the standard methods. Gravimetric method of analyzed samples has shown that the
suspended particle concentration was in the interval of 2.17-405.43 g/m3. Apart from that, 420 sam-
ples, or 30.9% of the analyzed samples, exceeded the limit and tolerance values. As 95% of these cases
took place during the heating season, it can be concluded that the manner of heating of the City of
Kraljevo plays a dominant role in increased air pollution by the suspended particles PM10. The in-
creased level of air pollution by these particle has a negative impact on human health and eco-system of
this City.
Keywords: air pollution, suspended particles PM10, gravimetric method
1 INTRODUCTION
Air pollution by suspended particles in- The coarse dispersed particles PM10
cludes tiny particles that may be in a solid or usually represent a mixture of smoke, dust,
liquid aggregate state. Among them, the soot, acids, salts and other substances. They
ones reaching the deepest parts of lungs are may be of urban or rural origin, and they
of a particular importance, and the diameter originate from: industrial plants, motor vehi-
of those particles is smaller than 10 μm. cles, boiler room and furnaces for burning of
These particles are classified into three cate- solid fuels, dust from construction sites,
gories: landfills and agricultural regions, fire, etc.
1) particles smaller than 10 μm marked The World Health Organization and
as PM10, called the coarse suspen- World Meteorological Organization esta-
ded particles, blished the system of monitoring the quality
2) particles smaller than 2.5 μm marked of human environment in order to protect the
as PM2.5, called the fine suspended environment. The Environmental Protection
particles, and Agency (EPA) labeled the solid particles,
3) particles smaller than 0.1 μm mar- sulphur dioxide, carbon monoxide, nitrogen
ked as PM0.1, called the ultra-fine oxides, ozone and heavy metals as the main
suspended particles [1]. air pollutants and defined standards for them
*
University of Pristina, Faculty of Economics, Kolasinska 156, 38220 Kosovska Mitrovica, Serbia,
e-mail: zoran.milicevic@pr.ac.rs
**
Public Health Institute, Slobodana Penezica 16, 36000 Kraljevo, Serbia
No. 3-4, 2017 1 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

to the aim of of protection the human health measures for protection the human health
and ecosystems. These substances are the and ecosystems. The analyses of air pollu-
primary polluting substances with the vation impact on human health have been per-
rying concentrations in accordance to the formed in certain cities in our country
weather conditions (concentrations are the [10,11,12], but there was no detailed re-
highest during autumn and winter), and search on the national level.
much more dangerous the secondary pollut- The aim of this paper is to analyze the
ing substances are created by their interac- level of air pollution by suspended particles
tion [2]. PM10 in the City of Kraljevo. This City is
Floating particles of dust, ash, liquid located at the central part of the Republic of
drops of smoke and other condensed gase- Serbia, at 43043´ north latitude and 20041´
ous compounds suspended in the air (aero- east longitude, at the altitude of about 206
sols) are considered to be the most hazard- m. It is located in a valley between the
ous air pollutants [3]. Results of the study Vlach, Sumadija and Kopaonik mountain
were conducted in three European countries ranges, and lies on three rivers – Ibar, Za-
(Austria, Switzerland and Germany) in padna Morava and Ribnica. According to
which about 75 million people live, indicate the Census of 2011, there are 68,749 inhabi-
that the exposure to respiratory particles tants in the City itself, and 125,488 inhabi-
tants on the whole municipal territory [13].
accounts for about 40,000 deaths per year
Concentrations of PM10 suspended par-
[4]. Still, some researcher believe that the
ticles in 1358 samples sampled almost every
increase of suspended particles in the air by
day in the period 2012-2015 were deter-
10 g/m3 increases mortality by 0.4-1% mined applying the standard methods. A
[5,6]. particular attention was paid to an analysis
Concentration of PM10 suspended parti- of samples from a six-month period of hea-
cles is monitored in the EU countries as a ting season in which the concentration of
part of regular monitoring. According to the these particles was several times higher than
applicable legislation, the daily mean for the limit and tolerable values.
concentration of PM10 suspended particles
is 50 g/m3 , and it may not be exceeded for
2 EXPERIMENTAL PART
more than 35 days a year, and the permitted
annual mean for PM10 is 40 g/m3 [7,8].
Within this paper, the concentrations of
Limit and tolerable values for the PM10
PM10 suspended particles at one measuring
suspended particle fraction in the Republic
spot were determined almost every day
of Serbia are regulated by the Regulation on
Conditions for Monitoring and Require- within four years. The selected measuring
ments for the Air Quality [9]. According to spot is in the downtown area of the City of
this Regulation, the limit value for PM10 Kraljevo at 43043′21.76″ north latitude and
suspended particle fraction in Serbia is 50 20041′33.03″ east longitude. As there are no
g/m3, whereas the tolerable value for the industrial plants near the measuring spot, the
same parameter is 75 g/m3. At the annual main source of air pollution is the boiler
level, the value for PM10 suspended particle room of the City Heating Plant, heating both
fraction is 40 g/m3, whereas the tolerable residential and commercial facilities, and it
value is 48 g/m3. is 300 m distant from the measuring spot.
As the suspended particles are the main The significant sources of air pollution are
air pollutants, there is a need to monitor also numerous private furnaces and road
them in order to undertake the preventive traffic. The average frequency of vehicles is

about 2000 vehicles per hour in both direc- where:
tions. There are two crossroads at a distance C - concentration of the fraction of
of about 150-250 m from the measuring PM10 suspended particles (µg/m3);
spot. All the streets near the measuring spot m1 - empty filter paper mass (µg);
are asphalted, they are 5-10 m wide, and m2 - filter paper mass after sampling
their maintenance is at a satisfactory level. (µg);
Sampling of the ambient air and labora- F - flow volume in the ambient condi-
tory testing were performed by the standard tions (m3/h), and
methods [14]. Measuring quality check, t - sampling period (h).
manner of processing and presentation of
Temperature and humidity are mea-
results and evaluation of their reliability and
sured by a thermohygrometer and recor-
credibility were done in accordance with the
ded in a computer.
stipulated methods of measurement and
This paper presents the concentrations
standard requirements [15].
SEQ47/50 sampler made by Sven of PM10 suspended particles in the period
Leckel Company from Germany was used 2012-2015, per year and month, their min-
for sampling of ambient air, equipped with imum and maximum values, mean values,
corresponding air intake pipes and corres- the number of days above the limit value,
ponding inputs for sampling of the PM10 and the number of days above the tolera-
suspended particles, directly connected to ble value.
the Glass fiber filter dia 47/50 mm Whatman
and the flow control device. 3 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
A filter paper of the corresponding size,
previously measured on the analytical bal- This paper analyzes the results of deter-
ance measuring at five decimals, is placed in mining the concentration of PM10 suspen-
the sampler. The filter paper should be pre-
ded particles that included 1,358 samples
viously conditioned in a special room in
(one sample every 24 hours), sampled at the
which the constant temperature (20 ± 1)°C
and corresponding humidity (45-50)%RH location of the City of Kraljevo in the period
are maintained [14]. After 48 and 72 hours, 2012-2015.
the filter paper is measured and then trans- Results of concentration of these parti-
ported in a special container and placed into cles in the tested samples were obtained by
a sampling machine of ambient air. the gravimetric analysis, and minimum and
After passing of air with certain flow maximum values, average annual values,
through the filter paper during 24 hours, the and the number of days above limit and
filter is taken off and transported back in the tolerable values are presented in Table 1.
same container to the lab to be conditioned According to this Table, the minimum con-
in the room for measuring of PM10 sus- centration of these particles was 2.17 g/m3
pended particles, where it is measured after in 2015, and the maximum value was
48 and 72 hours. Concentration of fraction 405.43 g/m3 in 2012. Their average an-
of PM10 suspended particles is calculated nual values were slightly lower in 2014 -
according to the following formula: 48.13 g/m3, and approximately the same
(53.74-53.90 g/m3) in 2012, 2013, and
C (µg/m3) = (m2 – m1) / F · t 2015.

Table 1 Annual review the concentrations of suspended particles PM10 in
the period 2012-2015
PM10 suspended particles
Year 2012 2013 2014 2015
Number of days in the year
when measuring was per- 315 335 352 356
formed
X –annual (g/m3) 53.90 53.74 48.13 53.82
3
Min (g/m ) 7.97 2.42 7.06 2.17
3
Max (g/m ) 405.43 361.95 319.92 327.17
Number of days 52 45 40 45
Above limit value-daily
% 16.5 13.4 11.4 12.6
Above tolerable value-
Number of days 48 62 52 76
daily
Considering the permitted values of concentration (3042.51 g/m3), the highest

PM10 suspended particles in the air, it may maximum daily concentrations (258.69
be stated that 30.9% of analyzed samples g/m3), the highest mean monthly concen-
are above the permitted level, on average. trations (101.42 g/m3) as well as the lowest
Out of 1,358 analyzed samples, exceeding minimum concentrations (16.30 g/m3)
the permitted value was identified in 420 were recorded in 2015, compared to 2012,
samples, whereby values were higher than 2013 and 2014. In the same month of 2013,
the permitted limit values in 182 samples, 2014, and 2015, a large number of days (20-
and higher than the permitted tolerable 21) with concentrations of these particles
values in 238. above limit and tolerable values were rec-
In order to establish the influence of sea- orded.
son on concentration of PM10 suspended In April of the analyzed period of 2012-
particles in the air, it is believed that it would 2015, the lower concentrations of suspen-
be of interest to analyze the results of mea- ded particles PM10 were recorded than in
suring of these particles per month in the January. The total monthly concentration of
period 2012-2015 (Tables 2 and 3). There is these particles was in the interval of 887.39
an apparent difference in the content of these - 1008.46 g/m3, and the average concen-
particles depending on month and year of tration in the interval of 30.25-36.02 g/m3.
their measuring. Regarding the similarity of In the same month of 2012, both minimum
results per season, the discussion of results is (7.97 g/m3) and maximum (69.92 g/m3)
simplified and includes one month from concentrations of these particles were rec-
every season: January, April, July and Octo- orded. The number of days above the limit
ber. value was recorded in the interval of 2-3
Analysis of the results for January indi- days, and there were no days above the
cates that the highest values for the total daily tolerable value.

Table 2 Monthly review the concentrations of suspended particles PM10 in the period
January – June from 2012-2015
Month 2012 2013 2014 2015
3
Total (g/m ) 1403.54 2570.19 2633.02 3042.51
Max (g/m3) 168.47 232.06 210.14 258.69
3
Min (g/m ) 31.15 18.11 27.35 16.30
January
X-monthly (g/m3) 77.97 91.79 87.77 101.42
Number of days above limit value 4 5 7 4
Number of days above tolerable value 7 16 14 16
Total (g/m3) 2820.76 1427.26 1996.41 2014.75
3
Max (g/m ) 267.21 117.21 185.59 169.93
Min (g/m3) 41.30 17.39 27.13 31.34
February 3
X-monthly (g/m ) 128.22 52.86 71.30 71.95
Total (g/m3) 1888.8 1090.10 1332.32 1520.69
3
Max (g/m ) 131.15 84.78 91.66 107.24
Min (g/m3) 36.41 17.39 19.02 16.66
March 3
X-monthly (g/m ) 60.93 38.93 45.94 49.05
Total (g/m3) 1008.46 965.98 887.39 907.37
Max (g/m3) 69.92 54.16 59.05 47.83
3
Min (g/m ) 7.97 20.10 18.11 12.13
April
X-monthly (g/m3) 36.02 34.50 32.87 30.25
Total (g/m3) 766.71 813.40 642.22 792.12
3
Max (g/m ) 49.81 61.17 39.97 38.58
3
Min (g/m ) 14.31 12.86 7.06 14.13
May 3
X-monthly (g/m ) 28.40 30.13 22.15 25.55
Total (g/m3) 679.65 733.91 812.38 687.04
3
Max (g/m ) 34.96 46.92 58.51 39.49
Min (g/m3) 14.67 15.94 18.29 13.40
June 3
X-monthly (g/m ) 23.44 28.23 28.01 22.90

Table 3 Monthly review the concentrations of suspended particles PM10 in
the period July – December from 2012-2015
Month 2012 2013 2014 2015
Total (g/m3) 813.66 817.59 760.19 956.57
Max (g/m3) 38.58 45.10 40.21 79.52
Min (g/m3) 17.21 2.42 16.12 18.11
July 3
X-monthly (g/m ) 29.06 29.20 26.21 31.88
Total (g/m3) 844.89 906.40 839.85 887.63
3
Max (g/m ) 61.23 43.84 40.39 50.18
3
Min (g/m ) 12.86 19.38 9.96 11.77
August 3
X-monthly (g/m ) 30.17 31.26 27.09 28.63
3
Total (g/m ) 853.30 782.71 955.29 855.86
Max (g/m3) 41.12 51.99 55.07 53.62
3
Min (g/m ) 18.29 11.05 17.93 2.17
September
X-monthly (g/m3) 30.48 27.95 31.84 28.53
Total (g/m3) 1196.06 1700.58 1291.78 1280.88
3
Max (g/m ) 101.63 115.03 92.02 99.82
Min (g/m3) 14.85 8.69 14.85 10.14
October 3
X-monthly (g/m ) 42.72 58.64 44.54 41.32
Total (g/m3) 1596.24 1556.85 1566.34 3394.80
3
Max (g/m ) 176.08 191.12 109.05 243.11
3
Min (g/m ) 15.57 16.66 17.57 20.83
November 3
X-monthly (g/m ) 59.12 57.66 52.21 113.16
Total (g/m3) 3007.28 4974.19 3334.55 3138.47
Max (g/m3) 405.43 361.95 319.92 327.17
3
Min (g/m ) 25.54 29.34 12.13 45.65
December
X-monthly (g/m3) 100.24 160.46 107.57 101.24

July of the analyzed period 2012 - 2015 ximum (115.03 g/m3) concentrations of the
is characterized by significantly lower con- analyzed particles were recorded.
centrations of the PM10 suspended particles. Analysis of the contents of PM10 sus-
Total monthly concentrations of these parti- pended particles in the period 2012-2015
cles were in the interval of 760.19 - 956.57 resulted in observation that their total maxi-
g/m3, and their average concentration was mum concentration (4974.18 g/m3) and
between 26.21 and 31.88 g/m3, whereas their maximum average concentration
only one day above the tolerable value was (160.46 g/m3) were recorded in December
recorded. In this month, the minimum con- 2013, and that their total minimum concen-
centration of 2.49 g/m3 was recorded in tration (642.22 g/m3), and their minimum
2013, and the maximum value of 79.52 average concentration (22.15 g/m3) were
g/m3 in 2015. recorded in May 2014. Apart from that, the
Results for October of the analyzed peri- largest number of days (18-30) in which the
od 2012-2015 indicate the increase in con- concentration of these particles was above
centration of PM10 suspended particle con- limit and tolerable values, was recorded in
centration compared to July. It is shown by December of the analyzed period, whereby
the following parameters: the total concen- the permitted values were not exceeded in
June. These results clearly indicate the dif-
tration of these particles was in the interval
ference between concentrations of these
of 1196.06-1700.58 g/m3; the average con-
particles in the heating season months (Oc-
centration was in the interval of 41.32 -
tober, November, December, January, Feb-
58.64 g/m3; the number of days above the ruary and March) and off the heating season
limit values was recorded in the interval of (April, May, June, July, August and Sep-
4-9 days; and the number of days above the tember). This conclusion is supported by a
daily tolerable value was recorded in the chart presented in Figure 1 showing the
interval of 1-10 days. In the same month of mean concentrations of PM10 suspended
2013, both minimum (8.69 g/m3) and ma- particles per month in the period 2012-2015.
Figure 1 Average monthly concentrations of suspended particles PM10

in the period 2012-2015

The presence of the additional source of ficantly impact the air pollution in the City
emission (boiler rooms and individual fur- of Kraljevo. It is verified by their maximum
naces) during the heating season significant- concentration of 405.43 g/m3 (recorded on
ly influenced the increased concentrations of 26 December 2012), which is as much as
PM10 suspended particles, and the identified eight times higher than the limit value, and
average and maximum values are signifi- more than five times higher than the tolera-
cantly higher than the values off the heating ble value. As much as 30.9% of the analyzed
season. Daily concentrations of the analyzed samples exceed the limit and tolerable val-
particles exceeded the limit value in more ues. Out of 420 samples exceeding the limit
than 50% measuring during the heating sea- and tolerable values, as much as 95% are
son, and the percentage of measuring with samples from the heating season, and 5% are
concentrations of this fraction of PM10 sus- samples from the period outside of the heat-
pended particles above the tolerable value is ing season. These data clearly indicate that
also considerable. Exceeding of limit and the technology of fuel combustion in boiler
tolerable values was recorded during 420 rooms and individual furnaces influences
days, out of which 400 days in the period of multiple increase in the content of PM10
heating season, and 20 days off the heating suspended particles, thereby influencing the
season, as presented on a chart in Figure 2. increase at the level of air pollution in the
Therefore, PM10 suspended particles signi- City of Kraljevo.
Figure 2 Monthly review the number of days with PM10 concentrations above
the limit value and tolerable value in the period 2012-2015
Apart from that, frequency of vehicles These results indicate that the issue of air
passing through the center of the City, as pollution of the City of Kraljevo needs to be
well as a large number of heavy vehicles considered as a serious one, as a long-term
more than 10 years old significantly contrib- exposure to the action of PM10 suspended
utes to the increase of air pollution in this particles has a hazardous impact on human
City, all of which complies with the previous health and ecosystem.
studies in this field [16,17].

CONCLUSION REFERENCES
Analysis of impact of concentration of [1] Grzetic, I., (2016) Suspended and

PM10 suspended particles on air pollution Respiratory Particles in the Urban
of the City of Kraljevo resulted in the fol- Areas, Faculty of Chemistry, Belgrade,
lowing conclusions: 4-10 (in Serbian)
1) 1,358 samples were analyzed between [2] Sukalo, D., Arsenovic, B. (2010)
2012 and 2015, and the number of samples Investigation the Effect of Particulate
was from 315 in 2012 to 356 in 2015, Matter, PM10 Air Quality in the City
2) Mean annual concentration of of Banja Luka, Svarog, No. 1, 213-214
PM10 suspended particles was in the in- (in Serbian)
terval of 48.13-53.90 g/m3, [3] Dukovic, J., Bojanic, V. (2000) Air
3) Minimum concentration of these par- Pollution, Institute of Protection and
ticles, recorded in September 2015 was 2.17 Ecology, Banja Luka(in Serbian)
g/m3, and maximum of 405.43 g/m3 was [4] Kunzli, N., Kaiser, R., Medina, S.,
recorded in December 2012, Studnicka, M., Chanel, O., Filliger, P.
(2000) Public Health Impact of
4) The number of samples that was Outdoor and Traffic Related Air Pollu-
above the limit value was in the interval of
tion: A European Assessment, Lancet
40-52, and the number of samples above
356:795-801.
the tolerable value was in the interval of
[5] Pope, A., Burnett, T., Thun, J., Calle,
48-76,
E., Krewski, D., Ito, K., and Thurston,
5) Observed per month, the lowest con- D. (2002) Lung Cancer, Cardiopul-
centrations of these particles were recorded monary Mortality and Long-Term
in June, and the highest in December, Exposure to Fine Particulate Air
6) Average concentration of these parti- Pollution, J.Am.Med. Assoc., 287,
cles in the period of heating season was 1132–1141.
75.71 g/m3 and it was significantly higher [6] Mokdad, H., Marks, S., Stroup, F., and
than the in period off heating season - 28.95 Gerberding, L. (2004) Actual Causes
g/m3, of Death in the United States, 2000, J.
7) The total number of samples above Am. Med. Assoc., 291, 1238–1245.
limit and tolerable values was 420, out of [7] Council Directive 1999/30/EC Rela-
which 400 samples in heating and 20 ting to Limit Values for Sulphur
samples off the heating season, Dioxide, Nitrogen Dioxide and Oxides
8) PM10 suspended particles coming of Nitrogen, Particulate Matter and
from boiler rooms and individual furnaces Lead in Ambient Air, Official Journal
play a leading role in the air pollution of of the European Union L 163, 29 June
the City of Kraljevo, 1999, pp. 41-60.
9) Exceeding of limit and tolerable value [8] Directive 2008/50/EC of the European
of the suspended particles PM10 in 30.9% of Parliament and of the Council on
the samples analyzed points to their hazard- ambient air quality and cleaner air for
ous impact on the human health and ecosys- Europe, Official Journal of the
tem of the City of Kraljevo. European Union L 152, 11 June 2008,

pp. 1-44. Journal of the European [14] Ambient air - Standard Gravimetric
Union L 152, 11 June 2008, pp. 1-44. Measurement Method for Determi-
[9] Directive on Conditions and Require- nation of PM10 or PM2.5 Mass
ments for Monitoring the Air Quality, Concentration of Suspended Particles,
Official Gazette of the Republic of SRPS EN 12341: 2015, Official
Serbia, Nos. 11/2010, 75/2010 and Gazette of the Republic of Serbia, No.
63/2013 (in Serbian) 48/15 (in Serbian)
[10] Stankovic, A., Nikic, D., Bogdanovic, [15] General Requirements for the Compe-
D. (2007) Monitoring and Assessment tence of Testing and Calibration Labo-
of Air Pollution on the Population ratories, EN ISO/IEC 17025:2006,
Health in the City of Nis, Ecologica, Official Gazette of the Republic of
14: 53-56 (in Serbian) Serbia, No. 16/06 (in Serbian)
[11] Nikic D., Bogdanovic D., Nikolic M., [16] Nel, A., Xia, T., Mädler, L. and Li, N.
Stankovic A., Zivkovic N., Djordjevic (2006) Toxic Potential of Materials at
A. (2009) Air Quality Monitoring in the Nanolevel. Science 311: 622–627.
NIS (SERBIA) and Health Impact [17] Souza, D., Vasconcellos, P., Lee, H.,
Assessment, Environ. Mon. Assess., Aurela, M., Saarnio, K., Teinilä, K.,
158: 499-506. Hillamo, R. (2014) Composition of
[12] Milicevic, Z., and Arsic, Lj. (2011) PM2.5 and PM10 Collected at Urban
The Impact of Coal Processing Tech- Sites in Brazil, Aerosol and Air
nology on the Environment, Facta Quality Research, 14: 168–176.
Universitatis, Series: Economics and [18] Milićević, Z., Marinović, D., Gajica,
Organization Vol. 8, No 3, 321–330. G., Kašanin-Grubin, M., Jovanović,
[13] Profile of the City of Kraljevo, (2010) V., Jovančićević, B., (2017) Organic
Department of Project Management Geochemical Approach in the Identifi-
and Local Economic Development, cation of Oil-Type Pollutants in Water
Kraljevo, www.kraljevo.org (in and Sediments of the River Ibar, J.
Serbian) Serb. Chem. Soc., 82(5) 593-605.

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 622.271(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704011D
Aleksandar Doderović*, Nikola Stanić*, Miljan Gomilanović*, Saša Stepanović*
REDISTRIBUTION OF EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT FOR

THE PURPOSE OF ACHIEVING THE DESIRED CAPACITY AND
IMPROVEMENT THE UTILIZATION TIME OF EQUIPMENT**
Abstract
Minor or greater deviations from the designed technological solutions are mainly due to two rea-
sons: deviation from the design solutions in the previous period as a consequence of organizational
factors, and as a consequence of changed parameters of the working environment in relation to those
used in the planning and design phase. Ajusting to the newly created situation at the open pit, and in
order to ensure a continuous supply of the customer/consumer with the mineral raw materials or fuel, as
well as processing (discovery) the new quantities of mineral raw materials that still need to be exploited,
it is sometimes convenient to redistribute the equipment at the open pit and adjust the technological
parameters of operation to the concrete conditions. In order to improve the effects of equipment opera-
tion, reduce the costs and utilize the favorable weather conditions for work at the open pit Gacko - Cen-
tral Field, a change of designed technology for operation rotor excavator II BTO system and relocation
of excavation discontinuous equipment, organized as part of the combined system, has been carried out.
This paper presents the technological - organizational measures implemented with the aim of more
efficient use the existing excavation and transport capacities.
Keywords: equipment redistribution, operation technology change, utilization time, OP Gacko
INTRODUCTION
The Coal Basin Gacko is divided into Following the break of water into the Field
four exploration exploitation fields: West- B in 2013, the exploitation continued only
ern, Central, Eastern Exploitation Field and from the Field C (Central Field).
Roof Coal series. The first mass coal exploi- The next stage in development the coal
tation within this basin began in 1978 with mining in the area of the Coal Basic Gacko
the opening of the open pit Gracanica in the is the beginning of exploitation in the zone
western part of Gatacko polje. Exploitation of Roof Coal Series. Considering the exist-
at the open pit Gracanica took place in the ing problems in coal exploitation in a part of
Field A, Field B and a part of Field C. Field C, the coal exploitation of the roof
*
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor, Department Coal Engineering Belgrade,
e-mail: aleksandar.doderovic@irmbor.co.rs
**
This work is derived from the project TR37001 “The Impact of Mining Waste from RTB Bor on the
Pollution of Surrounding Water Systems with the Proposal of Measures and Procedures for Reduc-
tion Harmful Effect on the Environment”, funded by the Ministry of Education, Science and Techno-
logical Development of the Republic of Serbia.

series has ensured a stable fuel supply of the According to the design (The Main Mi-
Thermal Power Plant. ning Design of the Open Pit Gacko - Central
Today, at the open pit Gacko - Central Field for the Capacity of 2.3*106 t/year of
Field, the exploitation is carried out in the the Run-of-Mine Coal - the Mining and
central exploitation zone, in which the Metallurgy Institute Bor) for 2017, it is fore-
coal of the main coal seam and the roof seen at the open pit Gacko that the existing
exploitation zone are exploited, in which front works expand in the south - southeast.
the coal of the roof series is excavated. Changes of the existing contours of the open
There is a significant difference in the pit and their expansion are aimed at achiev-
qualitative coal characteristics within the ing the final contour of the open pit in this
central and roof exploitation zone. In or- zone; creating the conditions for coal exploi-
der to supply coal of the appropriate and tation in the currently deepest part of the
uniform quality for the needs of the Ther- central exploitation zone characterized by
mal Power Plant, the coal amounts exca- high quality and preparition for transfer of
vated in both zones are dynamically coor- rotary excavators of continuous systems to
dinated, and their mixing is done on a coal the designed excavation front of the north –
depot of the Thermal Power Plant. south.
Figure 1 Designed condition of works from the end of 2017 - View of the Gems program package form
DESCRIPTION OF THE CONDITION

AT THE OPEN PIT AND PROBLEMS
Vertical arrangement of equipment on  I BTO system

the southern slope of the open pit is as fo-  II BTO system
llows:
 Comined system
 Diskontinuous equipment for exca-
vation the surface quaternary sedi-  Coal exploitation system
ments and humus

Figure 2 Schedule of exploitation system at the end of April 2017
Due to a lack of adequate excavation conveyor P1600 and floor conveyor KLM
equipment of surface layers, an external 500) in the excavation zone is placed at level
contractor was engaged. Excavation of qua- 909. The rotary excavator excavates a floor
ternary sediments is difficult due to the pres- height of 15-16, but the height of massif that
ence of water in them, but also on the terrain is provided to be excavated by this system is
surface in the front of works, as they are not the same in all parts of the floor so, in
performed in the area of the old river basin the west part, the floor height exceeds 20 m
of the Mušnica River, the most important (Figure 3).
recipient of the Gacko field. The dynamics In the zone of the southern slope of the
of quaternary sediment excavation directly open pit, or in the zone where the excavation
affect the work of I BTO system. Humus works are currently the most intensive, there
must be removed separately, primarily be- are also the routes of the BTO coupling con-
cause it is intended for remediation. Excava- veyors and Combined system. In order for
tion of these sediments is not performed by a smooth works on extension the southern
rotary excavator and due to the adverse slope, it is designed that the new conveyor
characteristics in terms of stickiness. routes are formed by the operation of con-
Equipment of the I BTO system (rotor tinuous excavation equipment with mini-
excavator ER 1250 17/1.5, a self-propelled mum participation of discountinuos auxilia-
conveyor BRs 1200 and floor conveyor ry equipment. This implies the operation of
KLM 450) in the excavation zone, is placed rotary excavators in tandem with self-
at level 926-925. A rotary excavator exca- propelled conveyors to form the cross-
vates a floor height of 8-10 m, and the exca- linking cuts in the slope, with loading on
vated material is deposited by a stacker Ars conveyors below the level of standing and
1200 depositor on the Large External Land- with the radial advance of the front. Due to
fill. Transport of the excavated material is the small dimensions of the site and compli-
carried out by the belt conveyors, belt width cated technological scheme, the time and
of 1200 mm. capacity utilization of the rotor excavators is
Equipment of the II BTO system (rotor low. Due to the aforementioned and since
excavator ER 1250 16/1.5, a self-propelled the rotor excavator is not able to excavate at

places where the floor height exceeds ma- The excavated material within the II BTO
ximum excavation height, the excavation system is transported by a belt conveyor,
equipment of the combined system, a hy- 1200 mm wide, and deposited in the exca-
draulic bucket excavator, type PC 2000, is vated area of the Field B by a stacker, type
engaged on excavation of these floor parts. P 1600.
WEST SIDE
Figure 3 Longitudinal profile of the II BTO system with maximum heights per
individual sections in the western part
Discontinuous excavation equipment Exterior Landfill. This excavator primarily

within the Combined system is distributed excavates masses on the parts of floor that
at many locations - sites. The excavated are higher than the excavation height of
material from the eastern slope is trans- the rotor excavator of the II BTO system,
ported by the trucks to the crusher for participates in excavation of the waste
waste and after crushing is transported by masses in formation the connecting cuts
the 1400 mm wide conveyors to a landfill for the BTO conveyors and combined
in the excavated area of the Field B. The system and parts of floors which the rotary
hydraulic bucket excavator, type PC 2000, excavator, due to its constructive and
located on the southern slope of the open technical characteristics, cannot excavate.
pit, excavates the material that is trans- The work of this hydraulic excavator also
ported to a truck and bulldozer landfill, forms the level for movement of trucks
located on the northern slope of the Large from the site to the Extenal Landfill.

Figure 4 Situational map of the southern slope of the beginning of April (04/05/2017)
PROBLEMATICS
At the end of April 2017, the overhaul excavation equipment of the Com-
of the II BTO system was completed. It bined system.
was anticipated that this excavator would 4. In order to stabilize the general slope
continue its work from the position of its of the landfill, it is necessary to form
overhauling and continue its progress to- a floor in a foot of the Large External
wards the design solution. This develop- Landfill.
ment of works did not come due to the 5. Engagement of a combine Wirtgen
following reasons: SM 2500, due to the specific requi-
1. Engagement of continuous excava- rements for corresponding dimen-
tion equipment must be predicted in sions of the site, is advantageous to
the conditions in which their capacity form in the southern slope zone,
will be high. since there are no necessary condi-
2. Capacity of a continuous part of the tions on the working floores of the
Combined system is not fully utilized east slope (the previous front of
due to the characteristics of stacker works).
and a lack of another crusher for Within the limits of expansion the ex-
waste. ploitation central zone, the connecting con-
3. Existing sites of a discontinuous ex- veyors of BTO and Combined system are
cavation equipment are characterized located in the southern slope of the open pit.
by the cramped working conditions The design envisaged that the new routes of
and small lengths of front, and there belt conveyor would be made by the opera-
is a need for a more favorable site of tion of rotary excavators with minimum

participation of the discontinuous excavation characteristics of waste that is excavated
and auxiliary equipment. The operation of by the combine Wirtgen SM 2500. The
rotary excavator, in tandem with the self- excavated material by the combine has
propelled conveyor, in a slope, with the nar- fine granulation and significant adhesion,
rowed front of works and at the level above causing numerous delays ion the wasten
the level of conveyor belt, is characterized the crusher crusher. During the time that is
by the low time and capacitive utilization. required to clean the crusher, a disconti-
Incorporating of a discontinuous equipment nuous part of the system is operative and,
in the zones of irrational engagement of the in case of finding a suitable storage space,
rotor excavator would enable a greater en- the time utilization of the system would be
gagement of continuous excavation equip- significantly improved.
ment at locations with more favorable condi- The Combined system at the open pit
tions for its operation. has a limit on capacity of continuous part
Discontinuous excavation equipment of of the system, primarily in terms of the
the Combined system is currently is de- stacker capacity. Due to the short transport
ployed in many sites. Excavation at the exi- lengths from the site to the wastew crusher
sting sites on the eastern slopeis limited due and availability of discontinuous excava-
to the position of higher floores of continu- tion capacities, a discountinuous part of
ous systems, and on which the current works the system currently capaciously exceeds
are not in progress. Therefore, the space for the possibilities of continuous part. It is
engagement of discontinuous equipment is advantageous to use the available capacity
narrowed, which affects reduction of capaci- of discontinuous excavation and transport
ty utilization degree. This is especially sig- equipment, especially in the period of fa-
nificant for the bulk of discontinuos excava- vorable meteorological conditions.
tion equipment with a bucket capacity of 10- A continuous disposal of waste is car-
12 m3. ried out on the Large External Landfill,
Overburden that is excavated by the and the engineering-geological processes
equipment of Combined system is trans- are present on the existing slopes of the
ported to the crusher, and after crushing, it landfill resulting in instability. Due to this
is transported by the belt conveyors to the reason, it is necessary to carry out the ac-
landfill in the Field B. In case of planned tivities to stabilize the existing slopes by
or unplanned downtime of the continuous the mass deposition in the landfill foot.
part of the Combined system, it is conve- This disposal of excavated waste would be
nient to have a storage space for waste done by the masses excavated and trans-
deposition, or maintain as operative a dis- ported within a discontinuous part of the
continuos part. In the previous period, an Combined system.
internal landfill in the Field C had this In order to avoid longer delays of the
role. Further disposal on the internal land- Combined system equipment, especially
fill is not possible, so it would be conve- in the period of the year when the largest
nient to find a new landfill for overburden production is expected and to avoid the
that will be deposite by the truck and bull- costs arising from equipment delay, it is
dozer, and with the operation costs being necessary to establish the new worksites
not significantly higher than the combined for this equipment as soon as possible.
system costs. One of the causes of fre- One solution that is imposed is to redis-
quent delays on the waste crusher are the tribute the existing equipment at the open

pit in relation to the design positions with- a way that would allow a greater time and
in the technological exploitation system in capacity utilization (Figure 3).
Figure 5 Proposal of equipment redistribution
PROBLEM SOLUTION
Upon completion the overhaul of the II system. During the mass excavation by a
BTO system, the rotor excavator and self- discountinuous equipment and combine,
propelled transporter should move to the from this level, the overburden wouls be
side of conveyor KLM 500 towards the bot- transported discontinuosly to the external
tom edge of the floor, i.e. in the mining vo- landfill. The most favorable location for this
cabulary "to cross over the belt." This chan- is the space on the northern slope of the
geover is performed such as the rotory exca- Large External Landfill, on the south side of
vator is bypassing the floor conveyor KLM the old old riverbed of the Musnica River.
500 around the return station and comes in a At the same time, the following is carried
parallel position to the original one. During out:
movement from the initial position to the  Development a floor in a foot of the
return station, the rotary excavator excavates Large External Landfill in order to sta-
a block of 20 m width. After bypassing the bilize the slope,
return conveyor station, it starts with excava-  Capacitively relieves a continuous part
tion of a depth floor. of the Combined system,
After the rotary excavator of the II BTO  Increase the degree of capacity utiliza-
system leaves its level, the whole plateau at tion of discontinuous equipment of the
the level 925-926 m is released, where a part combined system at the expense of
of excavation Combined system equipment shortening the transport length,
can be accommodated. In contrast to the  Formation the landfill for disconti-
designed equipment layout in this case, a nuos equipment of the Combined sys-
part of discountinuous equipment will work tem in case of delay pn a continuous
above the rotary excavator of the II BTO part of the system.

Plateau on the north side of the KLM installed in parallel to the floor edge, the
450 conveyor at the level 925-926 has a block is expanded. As the works continue
sufficient width so that it is possible to en- and the rotary excavator goes deeper into the
gage the Wirtgen SM 2500 combine. The massif, the distance between the rotary ex-
excavated overburden with combine will be cavator, or more precisely the self-propelled
transported by a truck to the external landfill. conveyor and floor conveyor increases. Af-
This ensures better worksite for a combine ter a certain time, the arrow of the self-
and eliminates jams of rakes on the waste propelled conveyor is not able to hand
crusher due to the material bonding that is overthe material on a belt. This situation
excavated by a combine. requires the rotary excavator to be returned
and to open a semi-block, to allow unhin-
TECHNOLOGY OF WORK dered loading of excavated material onto the
floor conveyor.
After bypassing around the KLM 500 Due to the constructive characteristics
conveyor and installing the equipment to of equipment, the rotary excavator will
the starting position, it is envisaged that work until it reaches the excavation height
the rotary excavator starts with excavation of 12m. After that, the standard altitude
of deep floor. This implies that the rotry work will be done in a a block and a semi-
excavator builds a transit ramp, or more block with material unloading above the
precisely, a cut to descend to the level of level of standing.
895 m. When operating, a longitudinal For the Wirtgen SM 2500 combine,
slope of the ramp must not be greater than the standard work technology is provided,
3%, and the floor height will excavated in making the parallel cuts of 2.5 m width on
direct dependance on the equipment capa- a prepared plateau of 30-40 m wide. After
bility. completing the overhaul of the I BTO sys-
Since the distance between the KLM tem and moving the conveyor KLM 450,
500 floor conveyor and edges of the floor the plate for combine operation will be
varies, the block width also varies. Initially, expanded. This combine will be provided
a rotary excavator excavates a block. Over with a safe worksite for a longer period of
time, because the conveyor KLM 500 is not time.
Figure 6 Work of the Combined system equipment at the plateau 925-926

In addition to the excavator combine conditions of the equipment and increased
on this floor, there is a hydraulic bucket degree of capacitive utilization of equipment
excavator PC 2000. The task is to exca- were provided in the period of favorable
vate material from a part of floor that the weather conditions. A necessary prerequisite
excavator combine cannot excavate. For for these operations is a good knowledge of
this equipment, the technology of work in equipment and working conditions at the
a deep block with material loading below open pit.
the standing level in the trucks, type Belaz In the case of unplanned delays and in-
75135, is predicted. As the plateau will be terruptions in the operation of certain parts
expanded, the conditions will be created to of the equipment in system (especially dis-
open the site for a number of excavators continuous), it is necessary to define the
of the Combined system. priorities of work and to redistribute the
The material excavated by the Com- remaining available equipment based on
bined system equipment is deposited on a them. Redistribution should be as efficient
truck landfill positioned in a foot of the and cost-effective as possible. It should also
Large External Landfill. be taken into account that the equipment is
not exposed to high loads (large excavation
CONCLUSION resistances, high slopes of the transport
route, overload of transport equipment)
Redistribution of equipment and change achieved by its engagement in parts of the
in the technology of work can be succe- working environment with favorable physi-
ssfully applied in order to improve the work- cal-mechanical characteristics and techno-
ing conditions and increase the utilization logical parameters adapted to the construc-
degree of equipment capacity, all in order to tive kinematics characteristics of the equip-
increase the production of useful mineral ment.
raw materials and overburden at the open If it is not possible to perform a location
pit. This method of organization is indispen- redistribution of equipment (this is the case
sable in cases when a variety of equipment is for large continuous systems), the next solu-
included in the production process. Due to tion is to change the technology of work of
the maneuverability of discontinuous the excavation and disposal equipment.
equipment, it is possible to change the posi-
tions of excavation equipment and thus with REFERENCES
minimum delays to provide better working
conditions such as shorter transport lengths, 1 Stanić N., Doderović A., Stepanović
relieving of transport systems, positioning S., Gomilanović M., Dynamics of
equipment of higher power at worksites Work Development the Roof Coal
where the working environment is character- Series of the Open Pit Gacko Using
ized by the increased excavation resistance. the Program Package Gemcom GEMS
- Module Cut Evaluation, Mining and
In the case, described as a result of
Metallurgy Engineering Bor, Mining
equipment redistribution and change the
and Metallurgy Institute Bor, Bor,
technology of work, more favorable working 2016, p. 41.

2 Doderović A., Stanić N., Gomilanović Production with Introduction the
M., System of Water Protection from Enrichment Method of Dry Separation
the Open Pit Gacko with a Cumulative Coal at the Open Pit Gacko, MMI Bor,
Water Collector as a Capital Structure, Bor, 2015 (in Serbian)
Mining and Metallurgy Engineering [4] Main Mining Design of the Open Pit
Bor, Mining and Metallurgy Institute Gacko – Central Field for the Capacity
Bor, Bor, 2016, p. 19. of 2.3*106 t/year of the Run-of-Mine,
[3] Strategy of Mining – Technological Project of the Open Pit Defense on
Opening, Development, Optimization Water, MMI Bor, 2016 (in Serbian)
and Maintenance a Continuity of Coal

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 622.7/.355(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704021T
Dejan Todorović*, Zoran Bartulović*, Vladimir Jovanović*, Branislav Ivošević*
THE BOND WORK INDEX OF LIMESTONE AND

ANDESITE MIXTURES**
Abstract
This paper investigates grinding of mineral mixtures with different grindabilities in the Bond ball
mill. Understanding the ore mixture grinding is of great importance in mineral processing. The energy
required for crushing and grinding is presented by the Bond work index and is determined by means of
Bond grindability test. This paper presents the experimental results of the Bond work index values ob-
tained by the standard method on limestone and andesite samples, as well as composite samples made
up from these ore in different weight ratios. Comparatively are shown the Bond work index values that
are obtained by the mass fraction of components that make up the composite samples calculation and
their differences from the real value. During the Bond work index value determining, changes in the
composition of the grinding products and circulating mill charge were monitored.
Keywords: Bond work index, grinding, circulating charge, composite samples
INTRODUCTION
Grinding is one of the main industrial components in the mill will affect to each
processes which burden with the large ex- other in order to optimize the grinding pro-
penses in the heavy equipment, energy, op- cess. Further, it is important to understand
eration and maintenance. It is necessary to how ore different mineral components with
spend the most of energy for ore grinding to different grindabilities would react to grind-
the designed size, significantly more than for ing after their liberation, since different re-
all the other processes of preparation and sponses of mill load components in the grin-
concentration. In the mineral processing in ding process can lead to formation of ad-
terms of energy savings is crucial to under- verse granularity for further concentration
stand how the ore mixture with different process.
grindabilities from different deposit parts Ore grindability is represented by the
would grind. Natural minerals and rocks are Bond work index value for the purposes of
generally very heterogeneous in their physi- the processes in mineral processing. This
cal characteristics. It is important in the hete- value is found in a laboratory Bond ball mill
rogeneous materials comminution to under- by simulating dry grinding in a closed circuit
stand how the individual components act until the 250% circulating load has been
separately and, on the other hand, how these achieved (Magdalinovic, 2003).
*
Institute for Technology of Nuclear and other Mineral Raw Materials, 11000 Belgrade, Serbia,
d.todorovic@itnms.ac.rs
**
This investigation was conducted under the Project TR 33007 "Implementation of the Modern Tech-
nical, Technological and Ecological Design Solutions in the Existing Production Systems of the Co-
pper Mine Bor and Copper Mine Majdanpek", funded by the Ministry of Education, Science and
Technological Development of the Republic of Serbia

A large number of researchers in their mixtures is greater than the Bond work in-
papers deal with various aspects of the mi- dex of harder components, clinker.
neral mixtures grinding in a ball mill. Oner (2000) have conducted a research
Feurstenau and Venkataraman (1988) of clinker and blast furnace slag mixture
have performed the grinding experiments in Bond Work Index in different mass propor-
a closed circuit on a quartz and limestone tions. He found out that these values are
mixture samples. They have shown that it always lower than the Bond Index obtained
takes 25 two-minute grinding cycles in order as the mean calculated Bond work index
to achieve a constant circulating charge, value of mixture components by their mass
whereby it was constantly changing its, i.e. portion.
there is a harder-grinding material concen- Ipek et al. (2005) have carried out the
Bond work index measurements by the
tration in the circulating charge.
standard method on samples of quartz, feld-
Kapur and Feurstenau (1989) have ca-
spar and kaolin and their binary and ternary
rried out the locked-cycle grinding experi-
mixtures. They have demonstrated that the
ments with a constant grinding time on energy required for comminution is smaller
quartz and limestone samples and their mix- when the mixture components are grinded
tures in different mass portions. They have separately than when they are grinded to-
demonstrated that to achieve the grinding gether as a mixture.
steady state, actually a constant circulating Tavares and Kallemback (2013) on sam-
load of single component mill feed needs 3 ples of limestone, basalt and copper ore and
to 6 grinding cycles, and for mixture of these their mixtures in different mass portions
ingredients up to 35 cycles. were determined the Bond work index value
Yan and Eaton (1994) studied the Bond by the standard Bond’s procedure. They
work index changes of ore mixtures as a found that the energy required for grinding
function of the mixture composition, and is most often lower when the components
found that this value is not the simply weig- mixture grinded separately regarding to the
required energy for grinding components
hted - average value for individual compo-
together as a mixture.
nent.
Hostels and Avsar (1998) have carried METHOD AND MATERIAL
out the experiments by the standard Bond
grindability test on samples of clinker and Specification of the Bond's mill, toget-
volcanic tuff and their mixtures in various her with the experimental execution condi-
weight ratios. They have shown that the tions of the standard Bond's test are given
Bond work index value of these components in Table 1.
Table 1 Bond's mill specification and grinding conditions

Mill diameter, Dm, cm 30.48
Mill length, Lm, cm 30.48
Number of mill rotations in minutes, n, min-1 70
Mill balls weight, Mb, kg 21.125
Geometry of mill liner smooth
Grinding type dry
Vore, cm3 700

Andesite and limestone samples were P80 – opening of the sieve size passing
prepared by crushing in a laboratory jaw 80% of the last cycle test sieve undersize
crusher and roll crusher in a closed cycle product (µm).
with screening to size 100% -3,327mm. The After each grinding cycle, solubility in
samples of pure andesite and pure limestone HCl was determined on comparative sieve
are separated from the ground material for undersize and thus defined contents of
experiments. The composite samples of an-
limestone and andesite in the same.
desite and limestone are made from the rest,
in the following ratios:
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
limestone : andesite = 25 : 75,
limestone : andesite = 50 : 50, In order to better understand the mech-
limestone : andesite = 75 : 25.
anisms that occur in the Bond ball mill
The Bond work index determination during the standard Bond grindability test
according to the standard Bond's test is performance on the two-component min-
done on all these samples with compara- eral mixtures, the composition changes of
tive sieve size of 74, 105 and 150 microns. the batch cycles milling products and mill
The Bond Work Index is calculated using circulating charges were monitored on
the formula (Bond, 1961):
two-component mineral mixtures
(1)
( ) Composition changes of milling product
√ √
where: Figures 1, 2 and 3 show the grinding

Wi – Bond work index (kWh/t); product composition changes during the
Pc – test sieve mesh size (µm);
Bond’s grinding tests performance using
G – weight of the test sieve fresh un-
the test sieves 74, 105 and 150 microns on
dersize per mill revolution (g/ob);
limestone and andesite composite samples
F80 – sieve mesh size passing 80% of
the feed before grinding (µm); with mass ratios 25:75, 50:50, 75:25.
Figure 1 The limestone content in grinding product during the standard Bond test
on samples with the composition limestone : andesite = 25: 75

It can be seen in Figures 1, 2 and 3 that by the composition of feed to the grinding
during all Bond tests on samples with vary- process.
ing mass portion of mixtures components
with different test sieves, the grinding prod- Composition changes of circulating
ucts of initial grinding cycles have the in- charge
creased content of soft component (lime-
stone). With increase of grinding cycles, the Figures 4, 5 and 6 shows the circulating
soft component content (limestone) in the charge composition changes during the
grinding product gradually decreases. At the Bond grinding tests using the test sieves 74,
moment of reaching the steady state (250% 105 and 150 microns on limestone and an-
circulating charge), the content of soft com- desite composite samples with mass ratios
ponent in the grinding product is equalized 25:75, 50:50, 75:25.

Figure 4 The limestone content in circulating load during the standard Bond test
performance on samples with the composition limestone : andesite = 75: 25

It can be seen in Figures 4,5 and 6 that harder component content with smaller
during the execution of all Bond tests on mean diameter.
samples with varying mass portion of mix-
ture components and with different test The Bond work index of ore mixtures
sieves, with an increase in grinding cycle,
Review of the results obtained by per-
the mill circulating charge has softer com-
forming the Bond grindability tests on sam-
ponents content (limestone) gradual in- ples of limestone and andesite and their
crease, and harder component content (ande- composite samples in various weight ratios
site) gradually decline. are shown in Table 1. The Bond work index
In the initial grinding cycles, the softer computational values were obtained using
component (limestone), which it is easier to the formula:
grind, quickly reaches the desired size and
passes into a grinding product in a larger
mass proportion than the harder component (2)
(andesite) in relation to their starting mass where:
portions. With the grinding cycles increase, Wi soft – softer component Bond work
harder component (andesite) accumulate in index (kWh/t);
a mill circulating charge because it more rsoft – mass fraction of softer compo-
slowly decreases a size. At the moment of nent (fractions of unit);
reaching the steady state, it forms such a Wi hard – harder component Bond work
mill circulating charge in which there are index (kWh/t);
the reduced softer component content with rhard – mass fraction of softer compo-
a larger mean diameter and an increased nent (fractions of unit).
Table 1 The Bond work index values obtained by standard the Bond procedure and
values calculated according to the mass fraction of the sample components
Test sieve, Wi, Wi calcul., Difference,

Sample
µm kWh/t kWh/t %
74 13.90 / /
Limestone : andesite
105 12.77 / /
100 : 0
150 12.63 / /
74 14.51 14.95 3.02
105 13.91 13.81 -0.72
75 : 25
150 13.59 13.48 -0.85
74 15.50 16.00 3.19
105 14.60 14.85 1.71
50 : 50
150 14.26 14.32 0.42
74 17.03 17.04 0.07
105 16.41 15.89 -3.17
25 : 75
150 15.13 15.17 0.23
74 18.09 / /
105 16.93 / /
0 : 100
150 16.01 / /
Mean difference 1.49

CONCLUSION
It can be seen from Table 1 that the cal- On the basis of the obtained data by
culated values of the Bond work index are performing the Bond grindability tests on
slightly different from the experimen-tally limestone and andesite composite samples
obtained values. Maximum difference be- in different mass proportions, it can be
tween these values is 3%. Mean diffe-rence concluded:
is 1.49%, which is within the ope-rational - In the initial grinding cycles, the soft
error limits for the Bond grindability test. component content is increased in the
According to the previous scientific regrinding product. With each subse-
search, it can be seen that the Bond Index of quent grinding cycle, this increased
ore mixtures can not be predicted simply soft component content in relation to
calculating the Bond work index compo- the initial sample is reduced. Grinding
nents and their mass portions: product is equalized by the compo-
- Yan and Eaton (1994) performed the sition with the starting sample at the
experiments on two different samples moment of reaching the steady state.
of gold ore, and their mixtures with a - In a circular mill load gradually comes
large difference in grindability Wi = 14 to accumulation of the mixture harder
and Wi = 6, and they found that it is component.
not possible to predict the compu- - The Bond work index of experi-
tational mixtures of the Bond Index mentally obtained values, and calcu-
based on components Wi; lated values according to the mixture
- Hosten and Avsar (1998) found that components mass portions, has the
the Wi of clinker and volcanic tuff in max difference of 3%.
different mass ratios mixtures is even
greater than harder component Wi; REFERENCES
- Oner (2000) on clinker and blast fur-
nace slag samples, and Tavares and [1] Bond F.C., Crushing and Grinding
Kallemback (2013) on limestone, ba- Calculation Parts I and II. British
salt and copper ore samples were de- Chemical Engineering 6 (6 and 8),
termined that the mixture Wi is less 1961, 378-385 & 543-548.
than the mean calculated value of [2] Fuerstenau D.W., Venkataraman
components Wi according to the mass D.W., The Comminution of Multicom-
fractions. ponent Feeds under Batch and Locked-
- Ipek et al. (2005) on quartz, kaolin and Cycle Condition: Kinetics, Simulation
feldspar samples were determined that and Energy Distribution, International
mixture Wi is greater than the mean Journal of Mineral Processing 22,
calculated value of components Wi ac- 1988, 105-118.
cording to the mass fractions. [3] Hosten C., Avsar C., Grindability of
In the case of a limestone and andesite Mixtures of Cement Clinker and Trass,
mixture samples in different mass ratios, Cement and Concrete Reasearch,
which were examination subject of this vol.28, no.11, 1998, 1519-1524.
study, it can be said that the mean values of [4] Ipek H., Ucbas Y., Hosten C., The
component mixture of the Bond work index. Bond Work Index of Mixtures of
according to the mass fraction, corresponds Ceramic Raw Materials, Minerals
to the real Bond work index values. Engineering 18, 2005, 981-983.

[5] Kapur P.C., Fuerstenau D.W., Simula- Slag Cement, Cement and Concrete
tion of Locked-Cycle Grinding Tests Reasearch 30, 2000, 473-480.
Using Multicomponent Feeds, Powder [8] Tavares L.M., Kallemback R.D.C.,
Technology 58, 1989, 39-48. Grindability of Binary Ore Blends in
[6] Magdalinovic N., Abbreviated Test for Ball Mills, Minerals Engineering 41,
Quick Determination of Bond’s Work 2013, 115-120.
Index, J. Min. And Metall. 39, 2003, [9] Yan D., Eaton R., Breakage Properties
1-4. of Ore Blends, Minerals Engineering
[7] Oner M., A study of Intergrinding and Vol.7, Nos. 2/3, 1994, 185-199.
Separate Grinding of Blast Furnace

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 621.221(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704029P
Dušan Polomčić*, Dragoljub Bajić*, Jelena Ratković*, Bojan Hajdin*
ESTIMATING HYDRAULIC PARAMETERS FOR THE COMPLEX

HYDRODYNAMIC MODELS**
Abstract
Hydrodynamic models have usually been calibrated manually, by trial-and-error, with different va-
lues of hydraulic parameters and hydraulic characteristics of boundary conditions. This method of cali-
bration and estimation of hydraulic parameters requires an extensive knowledge and experience of
experts, but whether the resulting solution includes an optimal set of parameters still remains an open
question. An optimization method founded upon the Gauss-Marquardt-Levenberg algorithm, along with
PEST software based on that algorithm, introduces automation of model calibration with regularization,
which substantially reduces the effect of expert judgment on the result. The method also introduces the
so-called “pilot points”, which transcend the concept of homogeneous zones with the values of hydrau-
lic parameters of a hydrogeological system or zones with the specified boundary conditions. Mineral ore
deposits are the most complex in geological and hydrogeological terms, so the lignite coal mine “Tam-
nava - West Field” was selected as a good area to test the approach. Applying the proposed method, the
spatial distributions of the horizontal (Kx=Ky) and vertical (Kz) components of hydraulic conductivity
are determined in the study area.
Keywords: calibration, optimization, PEST, hydraulic conductivity
INTRODUCTION
Hydrodynamic modeling is the most deposits, the groundwater modeling is main-

complex and most appealing method for ly used for alternative prognostic calcula-
simulating the aquifer regimes. It is based on tions made in connection with design of the
numerical solving the partial differential groundwater control systems-lowering
equations that describe the groundwater flow groundwater levels to below the elevation of
and processes taking place in the porous mining operations [1, 2, 3]. Hydrodynamic
medium. Hydrogeologists mainly follow this models are also used to assess the effective-
approach to assess the groundwater regime, ness of groundwater control systems and
quantify the groundwater balance, analyze select the optimal solution [4].
the flow pattern, make the alternative prog- Calibration of the hydrodynamic model
nostic calculations for a technical concept, is the most delicate process in modeling,
and predict the movement of groundwater, a which includes fitting the groundwater flow
pollutant or heat. In the case of mineral ore simulation results to data recorded in nature
*
University of Belgrade, Faculty of Mining and Geology, Department of Hydrogeology, Groundwater
Modeling Center, e-mail: dusan.polomcic@rgf.bg.ac.rs, dragoljub.bajic@rgf.bg.ac.rs, jelena.mocevic@
rgf.bg.ac.rs, bojan.hajdin@ rgf.bg.ac.rs
**
Our gratitude goes to the Ministry of Education, Science and Technological Development of the
Republic of Serbia for funding the Projects OI176022, TR33039 and III43004.

STUDY AREA
(piezometric levels and components of the The Tamnava - West Field coal mine be-
groundwater balance). longs to the Kolubara Coal Basin. To the
Until recently, manual calibration has west and south the mine borders on the
been widespread; it involves a trial-and-error Radljevo open - cast mine, and to the east on
with different combinations of model pa- the Tamnava - East Field open-cast mine.
rameter values, to fit the estimated model On the northern side, there is a natural boun-
parameter values to those observed in na- dary where the coal bed lenses out. The geo-
ture. Such approach to a hydrodynamic logic framework in the paleo relief is com-
model calibration requires a vast experience prised of the Paleozoic and Mesozoic sedi-
and extensive knowledge, while the ultimate ments, while the coal basin itself is built up
solution has a distinct expert judgment com- of the Neogene deposits: alluvial and terrace
ponent [5]. However, the automated calibra- sediments of the Kolubara, Kladnica, Turija
tion, using a special-purpose software, has and Peštan rivers (Fig. 1). There are also
been gaining ground over the past several other sediments, such as diluvial-proluvial
years. This approach optimizes the values of and oxbow deposits. Quaternary sediments
select parameters of the hydrogeologic sys- discordantly overlie the Pontian strata (Pl1).
tem: hydraulic conductivity, specific yield The Tamnava - West Field is the largest
and specific storage. It also optimizes the open-cast mine in Serbia, where lignite coal
values of boundary conditions, such as the is mined. A total of 11,600,000 tons of coal
rates of infiltration and evapotranspiration, was extracted in 2015, which was 15.5%
discharges, piezometric levels and the like. more than the annual budget.
The optimization method is based on the
Gauss-Marquardt-Levenberg algorithm [6], METHODOLOGY
which looks for the minimum residual sum
of squares - the difference between meas- The methods used in this research were
ured data and model simulation results. the hydrodynamic modeling and the Gauss-
PEST (Model-Independent Parameter Marquardt-Levenberg algorithm [6] for op-
Estimation and Uncertainty Analysis) soft- timization. PEST software, based on the said
ware is commonly used worldwide for the algorithm, was used for estimation. The
automated model calibration with regulari- concept required the introduction of pilot
zation [7, 8]. This is the most advanced soft- points [7, 8, 9, 10], which did not necessarily
ware for optimizing the parameters of any signify fictitious points, although the points
simulation model and analysis of uncertainty at which some of the parameters were
in prognostic calculations [9, 10]. PEST is known were relatively few. Each pilot point
widely used in geoscience [11, 12, 13]. represented a parameter whose value was to
Mineral ore deposits are the most com- be determined. The concept of pilot points is
plex case of hydrodynamic modeling of not restricted to hydraulic conductivity; it
aquifer regimes. The complexity of such applies to all parameters determined during
areas is attributable to the dynamics - con- the course of model calibration.
tinuous changes in the model’s flow field There are several ways in which the pilot
corroborated by a constant expansion of points can be specified in the model, such as
deposits. In the present research, the optimi- by means of a regular grid or triangulation
zation approach to the estimation of hydrau- [7]. The use of pilot points in PEST is re-
lic parameters in hydrodynamic modeling
ferred to as regularization, whereby the dis-
was applied to the largest open-cast mine in
tribution of certain parameters and/or va-
Serbia - the lignite coal mine of Tamnava -
West Field. Hydraulic conductivity (K) was lues of boundary conditions are regula-
estimated by this complex analysis. rized. The outcome of this approach in

PEST calibration is a result that includes the determined parameters of the medium
the heterogeneity of the medium (flow (hydraulic conductivity in the present
field) with regard to the distribution of case).
Figure 1 Geological map of the open-cast mine Tamnava - West Field (according to the national
geological map of Serbia, scale 1:100,000, Obrenovac section and [14])
Legend: a - riverbed sediments; dpr - diluvial/proluvial sediments; am - oxbow sediments;
t1 - lower river terrace; Q, Pl - riverine-lacustrine terrace; Pl1 - sand and clay (marly and coaly).
RESULTS
A three-dimensional hydrodynamic Both manual and automated (PEST with

model of the Tamnava - West Field, based regularization option) calibration of the
on the method of finite differences, was de- model was undertaken. Pilot points were
veloped using the MODFLOW code [15] specified for automated calibration, given
with the Groundwater Vistas Advanced that they help to obtain much more realistic
graphic user interface, version 64-Bit 6.74 heterogeneous zones with hydraulic condu-
b.24 [16]. It was designed as a multi-layer ctivities. Figure 2 shows the model layers in
model, with a total of eight layers (Table 1), which pilot points were specified. They were
as described in [17]. Each of these layers used to determine the spatial distribution of
corresponded to a real layer, modeled on the the horizontal (Kx=Ky) and vertical (Kz)
basis of the results of analyses of in situ in- components of hydraulic conductivity. No
vestigations. The initial values of hydraulic pilot points were specified in the 6th model
conductivity for all the lithologic units were layer represented solely by the second coal
entered based on the outcomes of in situ bed. A total of 729 pilot points were speci-
hydrogeological investigations and are fied with the horizontal component and 286
shown in Table 1. with the vertical component of hydraulic

conductivity. The way the pilot points were determining a distribution of vertical com-
specified depended on the hydro-geological ponent of hydraulic conductivity were
significance of the various sediments and the moved 50 m relative to the horizontal com-
number and distribution of piezometers in ponent, to display the points more easily.
the water-bearing layers (Table 1 and Fig. Determined representative values of hy-
2). In the case of semi-permeable sediments, draulic conductivity were the outcome. A
a homogeneous grid of pilot points was spe- total of 49,964 zones with values of hydrau-
cified for each distinct lithologic unit. On the lic conductivity were identified in the model
other hand, the pilot points for water-bearing of Tamnava - West Field. Figure 3 shows
sediments with piezometers were specified the hydraulic conductivities of the model
by triangulation between three neighboring layers. The results are presented as the maps
piezometers, with an additional pilot point in of hydraulic conductivity distribution, with
the center of each triangle. Then the density different color fields according to a color
was increased in the parts where the pilot scale. The data generated by the software
points were located. In the 8th model layer, a
can also be exported to xls and presented in
so-called regular grid of pilot points, spaced
tabular form.
500 m apart, was specified. The pilot points
Table 1 Schematic view of the flow field - representation of the lithologic units in the
model layers with initial values of hydraulic conductivity (Kx, Ky, Kz)
Model layer Lithologic units Kx = Ky (m/s) Kz (m/s)

Quaternary clay and heterogeneous
First confining
mine waste in the northern part of the 5x10-6 5x10-7
layer (stratum)
area
Second com-
bined water- Upper aquifer sand and gravel 5x10-4 5x10-5
bearing -
and heterogeneous mine waste in the
confining layer 1x10-6 1x10-7
northern part of the area
Third confining Aleurites and mine waste in the
5x10-6 5x10-7
layer northern part of the area
Fourth confining
First coal bed 5x10-9 5x10-10
layer
Intermediate aquifer sands in the
Fifth combined
western and central parts in front of 1x10-5 5x10-6
water-bearing -
the mine contour
Heterogeneous mine waste in the north-
ern part of the area, clay sediments in
Confining layer 1x10-6 1x10-7
the north-eastern part and coals in the
eastern and southern parts of the area
Sixth confining
Second coal bed 5x10-9 5x10-10
layer
Seventh water- Lower aquifer sands of high
3x10-5 5x10-6
bearing layer hydraulic conductivity
Eighth water- Lower aquifer sands of low
1x10-5 5x10-6
bearing layer hydraulic conductivity

Figure 2 Distribution of pilot points in the model layers of the Tamnava - West Field open-cast mine

Figure 3 Zones of hydraulic conductivity in the model layers of
the Tamnava - West Field open-cast mine

CONCLUSION
The paper described the application of an putation time (Parallel PEST, BeoPEST,
optimization method based on the Gauss- Cloud Computing and Singular Value De-
Marquardt - Levenberg algorithm in hydro- composition) is expanding.
dynamic modeling, undertaken to assess a
hydraulic conductivity during the course of REFERENCES
automated calibration with regularization.
[1] Polomčić D., Bajić D., Papić P., Stoj-
The method considerably reduces the influ-
ković J. (2013). Hydrodynamic Model
ence of expert judgment on the result. PEST
software was used to optimize the parame- of the Open-Pit Mine “Buvač”
ters during the automated calibration pro- (Republic of Srpska). Journal of Susta-
cess. This software has a broad range of inable Development of Energy, Water
applications, which transcend groundwater and Environment Systems, 1(3): 260-
modeling. A development of PEST intro- 271. DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.13044/
duced the concept of pilot points, which j.sdewes.2013.01.0019
surpasses that of homogeneous zones with [2] Polomčić D. & Bajić D. (2015).
values of parameters of the medium or zones Application of Groundwater Modeling
with specified boundary conditions. Even for Designing a Dewatering System:
though the concept is a big step forward in Case Study of the Buvač Open Cast
the estimation of hydraulic parameters in Mine, Bosnia and Herzegovina.
hydrodynamic modeling, there are some Geologia Croatica, 68(2):123-137.
issues. One of the biggest problems in con- DOI: 10.4154/gc.2015.07
nection with the use of pilot points in PEST [3] Rapantova N., Grmela A., Vojtek A.,
is the needed computation time. Every in-
Halir J. & Michalek B. (2007). Ground
crease in the number of pilot points in the
Water Flow Modelling Applications in
model considerably lengthens the calibration
Mining Hydrogeology. Mine Water
time. Namely, PEST considers each pilot
point as a parameter whose optimum value and the Environment, 26 (4): 264-270.
is to be determined. It should be noted that [4] Bajić D., Polomčić D. & Ratković J.
in PEST, each parameter requires one or two (2017). Multi-Criteria Decision Ana-
simulations per iteration. The described lysis for the Purposes of Groundwater
model of the Tamnava - West Field coal Control System Design. Water
mine had a total of 1015 pilot points, which Resources Management, DOI: 10.1007
meant 1015 simulations (or 2030 if central /s11269-017-1777-4
differentiation was used) per iteration. A [5] Polomčić D., Bajić D., Ristić-Vakanjac
larger number of iterations per run were V. & Čokorilo Ilić M. (2014). Auto-
often needed during model calibration. If matic Calibration of Hydrodynamic
each run takes several minutes, then a long Models Using PEST Program. Zapis-
of time is needed to complete the process. nici Srpskog Geološkog Društva,
The calibration time is measured in hours, pp. 13-27.
and sometimes in days. However, there is [6] Nocedal J. & Wright J.S. (2006).
certainly a solution for this problem and Numerical Optimization, 2nd Edition.
the use of modules that shorten the com- Springer: Berlin

[7] Doherty J. (2010). PEST - Model- Soil Loss by the WATEM/SEDEM
Independent Parameter Estimation, Model Using an Automatic Parameter
User Manual: 5th Edition, Watermark Estimation Procedure. Environmental
Numerical Computing, pp. 1-336 Earth Sciences, 74(16): 5245-5261.
[8] Doherty J. (2013). Addendum to the [14] Hayley K., Schumacher J., MacMillan
PEST Manual, Watermark Numerical G.J. & Boutin L.C. (2014). Highly
Computing, pp. 1-294. Parameterized Model Calibration with
[9] Doherty E. J., Hunt J. R. (2010). Cloud Computing: An Example of
Approaches to Highly Parameterized Regional Flow Model Calibration in
Inversion: A Guide to Using PEST for Northeast Alberta, Canada. Hydro-
Groundwater-Model Calibration, geology Journal, 22(3): 729-737
Scientific Investigations Report 2010– [15] Ratković J., Polomčić D., Bajić D. &
5169, U.S. Geological Survey, Reston, Hajdin B. (2016). A Hydrogeological
Virginia. Model of the Open-Cast Mine Tam-
nava - West Field (Kolubara Coal
[10] Doherty E.J., Hunt J.R. & Tonkin M.J.
Basin, Serbia). Underground Mining
(2011). Approaches to Highly Parame-
Engineering, 29: 43-54.
terized Inversion: A Guide to Using
[16] Harbaugh A. W., Banta E. R., Hill M.
PEST for Model-Parameter and Predi-
C.&McDonald M.G. (2000) MOD-
ctive-Uncertainty Analysis. Scientific
FLOW - 2000: The U.S. Geological
Investigations Report 2010–5211. U.S. Survey Modular Ground-Water Model
Geological Survey, Reston, Virginia. - User Guide to Modularization Con-
[11] Tonkin M.J., & Doherty E.J. (2005). A cepts and the Ground-Water Flow Pro-
Hybrid Regularized Inversion Metho- cess, U.S. Geological Survey Open-
dology for Highly Parameterized Envi- File Report 00-92, Reston, VA, USA
ronmental Models. Water Resources [17] Rumbaugh J.O. & Rumbaugh D.B.
Research, DOI: 10.1029/ 2005WR (2011). Guide to Using Groundwater
003995. Vistas: Version 6. New York: Environ-
[12] Bahremand A. & De Smedt F. (2010). mental Simulations
Predictive Analysis and Simulation [18] Polomčić D., Bajić D., Ratković J.,
Uncertainty of a Distributed Hydrolo- Šubaranović T. & Ristić Vakanjac V.
gical Model. Water Resources Mana- (2017). Hydrodynamic Model of the
gement, 24(12): 2869-2880. Open-Cast Mine “Tamnava - West
[13] Bezak N., Rusjan S., Petan S., Sodnik Field” (Kolubara Coal Basin, Serbia).
J. & Mikoš M. (2015). Estimation of

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 528.4:681.325(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704039P
Vladimir M. Petrović*, Mirko Borisov**, Dragan Zlatanović***,

Lidija Djurdjevac Ignjatović****
VERTICAL ACCURACY OF DATA ON THE TOPOGRAPHIC MAPS

AND THEIR APPLICATION IN MINING*****
Abstract
The paper describes some experiences and the methodology used for evaluation the vertical accu-
racy of data on the official (state) topographic maps. The vertical accuracy is an important element of
quality 3D representation on the topographic maps in digital, as well as in analoguos forms. A com-
parative way of testing is usually applied for determining the vertical accuracy, namely the compari-
son of the measured values of topographic maps with "true" or "conditionally true" values (numeric
data of the geodetic and height points). This method gives a direct accuracy assessment of the printed
maps and 3D terrain models, especially when used in industries such as mining. To a large extent, the
vertical accuracy of data and geomorphology (geographic) fidelity relief on the topographic maps is
not always sufficient quality. The type of survey and how the matter affects the quality, or the geodetic
control points are drawn precisely, where the accuracy of the contour lines is lower. However, the
application of a new technology is changes the 3D visualization of terrain, thus increasing the vertical
accuracy of data.
Keywords: topographic map, 3D data model, vertical accuracy, application, mining
INTRODUCTION
Using geospatial information within the is also increasing; if decisions are based on
decision making process in the mining, a digital based technology. According to the
armed forces, hydrology, especially after ISO 19157:2013, the quality of geogra-
the appearance of floods and wide applica- phical information is described in a quanti-
tion in the state administration. At the same tative way with five elements: complete-
time, the importance of knowing its quality ness, logical consistency, positional accura-
*
University of Belgrade, Institute of Chemistry, Technology and Metallurgy, Department for
Ecology and Technoeconomics, Njegoševa 12, 11000 Belgrade, Republic of Serbia;
e-mail: vladimirpetrovic.gis@gmail.com
**
University of Novi Sad, Faculty of Technical Sciences, Trg Dositej Obradović 6, 21000 Novi Sad,
Republic of Serbia; e-mail: mirkoborisov@gmail.com
***
Innovation Center, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering University of Belgrade, Kraljice Marije 16,
11000 Belgrade, Republic of Serbia, e-mail: dr.dragan.zlatanovic@gmail.com
****
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor, 19210 Bor, Zeleni bulevar 35,
e-mail: lidijadj.ignjatovic@irmbor.co.rs
*****
This work was supported by the Ministry of Education, Science and Technological Development,
Government of the Republic of Serbia (Project No. OI 176018), and the result of the Project No.
TR 33021 “Research and Monitoring the Changes of the Stress Strain State in the Rock Mass "In-
Situ" around the Underground Rooms with Development of Models with Special Reference to the
Tunnel of the Krivelj River and Pit Bor", funded by the Ministry of Education, Science and Techno-
logical Development of the Republic of Serbia

cy, temporal accuracy and thematic accura- 1947., and the National Standard for Spatial
cy. The term positional accuracy means the Data Accuracy (NSSDA) from 1998. The
compliance of a point position that belongs first one is related to assessments of mainly
to some topographic model belongs to its analogous maps (sometimes of digital maps
true position in space. The positional accu- too) and is not quite appropriate for using in
racy may be a horizontal and a vertical ac- conditions nowadays, while the second one
curacy, (Perdue, 2013). is modern and usable nowadays; it is related
This article focuses on the official topo- to all digital spatial data (in a raster as well
graphic maps at a scale of 1:25 000 (TM25), as in a vector form). To those standards one
topographic maps at a scale of 1:50 000 has to attach the very detailed and overall
(TM50) and topographic maps at a scale of excellent elaborated standard STANAG
1:100 000 (TM100), in the classic (older) 2215 - Evaluation of Land Maps, Aeronau-
and digital (newer) forms. One of the main tical Charts and Digital Topographic Data
goals in this article is to determine the verti- and maps, (Radojčić, et al., 2011).
cal accuracy of geodata and for that a com- The positional accuracy of data sets with
parative method of testing is usually applied, 3D coordinates is determined by combining
with the comparison of measured values of the results of horizontal accuracy assess-
height displaying a field with the "real" or ments (accuracy related to the horizontal
"conditional exact" values. This article also geodetic datum, i.e. 2D coordinates) and
focuses on digital terrain modeling and 3D vertical accuracy assessments (accuracy
data models. These models were created related to the vertical geodetic datum, i.e. 1D
with the conversion from an analog form of coordinates), (Aguilar, et al., 2010). The
topographic maps to a digital, while consid- NSSDA uses the root-mean-square error
ering various aspects of digitization the car- (RMSE) to estimate the positional accuracy.
tographic sources. The RMSE is the square root of the average
of the set of squared differences between the
INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS dataset coordinate values and the reference
FOR VERTICAL ACCURACY coordinate values for identical points. The
EVALUATION positional accuracy values are reported in
ground distances (metric units or feet). This
The international standards define the allows users to directly compare datasets of
basic principles and procedures for vertical differing scales or resolutions. The accuracy
accuracy assessments and evaluations. There is reported with a 95% certainty level. For
are no particular measures of accuracy, or example, the vertical accuracy lets:
statistics of calculations and quality reports
1 n
 dh2
such as the standard deviation or mean-
RMSEh  (1)
square error. It is a matter of the ISO stand- n 1
ards user that defines those things as they
wish according to their objectives and posi- where dh are the differences between the
tional accuracy reports. The same goes for measured and reference vertical coordinates
the "industrial" or "de facto" standards at the of points (control heights).
international level. Just at a national level, Furthermore, the standard (ISO, 2013)
there are standards, which, in detail, deal defines the absolute and relative (point-to-
with this matter, although there are only few point) accuracy. Under the absolute accura-
such countries, (Iliffe, et al., 2013). cy standard it can assume the uncertainty in
Two of America's national standards the 3D position of a point with respect to the
have a strong influence on the standardiza- WGS84 reference system, combined with
tion in this area: the United States National EGM96 geoid model (Radojčić, et al.,
Map Accuracy Standards (NMAS) from 2011). The absolute vertical accuracy is

 H 2
uncertain in terms of the height of a point
i  H
with respect to the vertical datum. It is ex- L  (2)
pressed as a linear error with a 90% certainty n 1
level. The relative vertical accuracy is uncer- Next, the tests for blunders and system-
tain in terms of the height difference be- atic errors are performed. Finally, one has to
tween two points; it is expressed as a circle evaluate the linear error with a 90% certainty
of error, i.e. a linear error with a 90% cer- level, in the English language it is tradition-
tainty level. ally noted as LMAS (Linear Map Accuracy
In the vertical accuracy evaluation pro- Standard). If is not significantly differing
cedure, the first step is to calculate the height from the zero value, LMAS is calculated as:
differences between the measured and refe-
rence height Hi , the next step is to calculate LMAS = 1,645  m, (3)
the differences from the mean value of all All topographic-cartographic products
differences H and to calculate the linear are divided in five classes (Table 1) by the
standard deviation, (Radojčić, et al., 2011): value of the LMAS, (Radojčić, et al., 2011).
Table 1 The topographic-cartographic products classification by vertical accuracy

Resolution or the map scale
Class
1:25 000 1:50 000 1:100 000 1:200 000 1:250 000
0 2.5 m 5m 10 m 20 m 25 m
1 5m 10 m 20 m 40 m 50 m
2 10 m 20 m 40 m 80 m 100 m
3 Poorer than class 2
4 Not determined
For the vertical accuracy evaluation, the obtained geographical maps at the different
STANAG 2215 demands at least 167 check scales and contents. They were created using
points per data set, just like for the horizontal the system of derived maps and were repre-
accuracy evaluation. However, in this case, sented in the conformal (Gauss-Kruger)
the samples have to be representative not map projection, with the Greenwich meri-
only in a planar sense, but in a vertical sense dian as the default. The same or similar car-
too. This means that, within the data set, the- tographic-editorial decisions are applied. In
re have to be check points with different hei- other words, all maps are created in a single
ghts, especially points with extreme heights. geodetic and cartographic system, which
considerably facilitates their application.
SERBIAN EXPERIENCES IN In this article, the data quality of the re-
ANALYSIS FOR VERTICAL lief on the topographic maps includes both
ACCURACY OF DATA the vertical accuracy and the geographic
fidelity (data quality). For the analysis of the
The Military Geographical Institute quality of the data, topographic maps at the
(MGI) created a system of topographic scales TM25, TM50 and TM100 have been
maps whose main content is based on pho- considered. Using 3D geospatial information
togrammetric land survey and the periodic within the decision making process in the
cycles of revision and amendments after mining (Figure 1) and wide application in
that time period. On this basis, the MGI the state administration.

Figure 1 Mining Basin Bor - Veliki Krivelj (URL 1)
(http://rtb.rs/rtb-bor-doo/rudnik-bakra-bor/rudnik-bakra-veliki-krivelj/)
THE TRADITIONAL TOPOGRAPHIC

MAPS
The vertical accuracy of topographic errors of positions the contour lines, which
maps depends on the precision of repre- determine the vertical accuracy, are com-
sentation the relief and scale, (Frančula, monly used as an elevation indicator of
2003), i.e. the accuracy of contour lines as the accuracy of topographic maps, as well
the main way of the relief representation as the mean square errors of the heights of
and the accuracy of numerically marked points in relation to the nearest geodetic
elevation points (levels). The mean square control points (Table 2).

Table 2 The comparison of vertical accuracy of TM25, TM50 and TM100
The vertical accuracy The mean square error (m)

Criterion TM25 TM50 TM100
The vertical accuracy
h =  2.1 h =  2.7 h =  3.3
of detailed points
The vertical accuracy
of detailed points by h =  (1.4 +4.1 tg ) h =  (1.3 +14 tg ) h =  (1.1 +31 tg )
Koppe
Formulas and many expressions used as termined, such as names or signs in a single
indicators of the relief quality represented by sheet of a topographic map. Obsolete, out-
contour lines do not give a precisely and dated, and thus, defective or incorrect con-
easily understandable picture of deviation tent decreases the quality and usefulness of a
thecontour lines and their actual position. topographic map, since they do not show
The accuracy of the elevation points of the exact reality as it is, but the condition as it
contour lines is determined by many com- was. The geomorphological fidelity relief on
plex procedures. One of the commonly used the topographic maps depends on the scale
equations is defined by Koppe: of mapping and the time covered by the data
height on the map; it also depends on the
h =  (A + B tg) (4) overall quality of the map. From the point of
where  is the slope of terrain, and A and B visualization and data density on a topo-
are coefficients which are determined de- graphic map, an important factor is the fac-
pending on the scale and type of the carto- tor of loaded content that is directly related
graphic material (paper map or reproduction to the other two factors: the geographic fi-
original). delity and the accuracy of vertical display.
The geomorphology (geographic) fideli- Criteria displayed and the density of data on
ty of maps includes the relief content and topographic maps is:
time determinations, namely data fidelity of - Evaluating and comparing the structure
topographic content. It is impossible to find of content: geodetic points, peaks, contour
a mathematical expression for geographic lines, course lines, ridge lines (Figure 2); and
fidelity. Only the number of errors in rela- - The analysis of the density and degree
tion to the total number of data can be de of generalization elements of map.
Figure 2 Display the relief on maps by lines and check points (Li, Z., Zhu, Q., Gold, C., 2005.)

Geodetic control points have particular A comparative review of the structure of
relevance to the topographic maps at lar- the geodetic control points at these maps and
ger scale. That is the reason that the struc- the scope of mapped content of geodetic
ture of geodetic control points selected base analyzed a sample of 16 sheets TM25
had to be identical to TM25, TM50 and covering geographical territory of Serbia
TM100. (Table 3).
Table 3 Data on geodetic points

The map scale
 Geodetic points
TM25 TM50 TM100
1 Trigonometric point ● ● ●
2 Spot elevation with values in (m) ● ● ○
Religious building as geodetic point (church, mosque,
3 ● ● ●
synagogue, monastery)
Infrastructure facility such geodetic point (factory
4 ● ● ●
chimney, telecommunication tower, weather station)
5 Border post as a trigonometric point ● ● ○
6 Monument as a trigonometric point ● ● ●
7 Saddle as spot elevation ● ● ●
● displayed on TM
○ not shown on TM
Comparing the number of mapped points points) on the sheets TM25, TM50 and TM
of geodetic base (trigonometry and elevation 100, produced the data shown in Table 4.
Table 4 Comparison of the number of mapped points of geodetic basis on the TM

Ratio of trigonometric Ratio of spots
The map scale Area in %
points in % elevation in %
TK25 100 100 100
TK50 25 49 30
TK100 6 26 15
Here, the average values are given, but it A higher degree of generalization of the
is important to note that different approach elevation was caused by generalization of
were applied to the generalization of trigo- the others, especially line elements of map.
nometry and elevation points from sheet to But even so, it should be noted that the
sheet of the maps. The range values of the number of mapped trigonometry and ele-
vations decreases much slower than the sur-
generalization of trigonometry is from 100%
face on the topographic map showing the
to 26%, while the range of the generaliza- designated area.
tion of the elevation spots is from 100% to The main difference in the relief repre-
15%; that means that there were a lot of sub- sentation on the TM50, compared to the
jective approaches to the cartographic gene- TM25 and TM100, is in the primary equi-
ralization. distance. On the TM50 it is twice higher,

being it is 20m. Keeping this in mind, it can The amount of details in the relief that
be concluded that the TM25 can display can be displayed on the TM50 and TM100
details of the relief that are higher or lower is increased. As the TM50 equidistance is
than 2.5m, while on the TM50, details can 20 m, in the most favorable case (flat terrain)
display the relief higher or lower than 5m, on the basis of experience, the height can be
using the intermediate contour lines. Even read with an accuracy of up to 1/10 of equi-
so, they show characteristic landforms, distance. Data on the relief and land forms
which are not present in the intermediate of the TM25, TM50 and TM100 are given
contours at 1/4 of equidistance (curl, vale, in Table 5.
sinkholes).
Table 5 Data of relief and relief forms on TM

Map scale
Relief
TK25 TK50 TK100
1 Basic contour line - index 10, 20 and 20 (40) m ● (10) ● (20) ● (20)
2 Main contour line - index 50, 100 and 200 m ● (50) ● (100) ● (200)
3 Intermediate line at 1/2 equidistance ● ● ●
4 Intermediate line at 1/4 equidistance ● ● ●
In the field, visible landforms (curl, vale that can
5 ● ● ●
display contour lines) - contour line third category
6 Sinkholes in scale or as a conditional sign ● ● ●
Lonely rock that cannot be provided in the ratio
7 ● ● ○
of map
Ravines and gorges of natural distance from the
8 ● ● ●
river bank
9 Dents and terraces of banks flows in flat terrain ● ● ●
10 Gully – gullies ● ● ●
11 Karst sinkholes ● ● ○
12 Dry moat ● ● ○
13 Abyss ● ● ●
14 Heaps of stone - a mound ● ● ○
15 Cave with water or without water ● ● ●
● displayed on TM
○ not shown on TM
When it comes to show the land forms, surveys, base height, generalization of field
the nature of that element of content the types, etc.). Also, the construction of open
topographic maps should be the least pits and tailings, power plants, and accumu-
changeable, (Petrović, at al., 2016). Howe- lation of lakes and a network of channels
ver, in the relief area there is a variety of cause modifications of confluences and river
changes due to the human activities (recla- flows.
mation, mining, etc.) and there are also the
influence of natural forces (landslides, ero- DIGITAL TOPOGRAPHIC MAPS
sion, etc.). In addition, substantial changes
are visible in a view of relief applying the The vertical accuracy of digital topo-
specific methods of surveying and cartog- graphic maps depends on the process of
raphy (topographic and photogrammetric analogous to digital conversion (Figure 3),

and the methods of data georeferencing and quality depends on the positional and height
processing (system of technical possibilities accuracy of the topographic content, and
and human factor). Nevertheless, the general data updating.
Figure 3 The paper map is scanned and then the contour lines are extracted to some layers
After vectorizing TM25, TM50 and 4). That control was used to check the refe-
TM100 (paper maps and reproduction origi- rence data (geodetic points) and implemen-
nals) in a vector form, an additional activity tation the modifications and updates, accor-
was the control and modeling of data (Figure ding to the available reference data sources.
Figure 4 The process of vectorization from raster to vector data
The limiting factors are certainly the with the positional mean square error in me-
original data collection errors. The limits of ters. The types of the terrain and slope are
the contour line errors are given in Table 6 also given in the same Table.

Deformations can be up to 1.5 times lines is adjusted to the height difference
higher in the covered field. In the mounta- between the top and foot of the moun-
inous regions, the number of contour tain.
Table 6 Limits of contour lines errors, types of terrain and the slope
Flat terrain Hilly terrain Mountainous terrain
00 - 20 20 - 60 > 60
>5m
 3.9 m  5.1 m
(depends on the slope)
When discussing the quality of data ob- digitalization of the existing maps, contain
tained by digitization the existing topograph- both errors of the original data collection and
ic maps, it should be kept in mind that all the processing (both surveying and mapping
data has already been processed. Specifi- errors) and also transformation errors (scan-
cally, this data was already reviewed, which ning, georeferencing, vectorization, mode-
includes the removal of irregular details on ling and processing of data).
the digitalized content as a result of surface For digital models generated from the
deformation and random errors. classic cartographic material, it is usually
On the other hand, the processing that assumed that the elevation accuracy is from
has been already made using this data carries 1/4 to 1/5 of the equidistance of the repre-
certain risks. Since this data has been alre- sented contour lines (Frančula, 2003). Based
ady processed, it is practically impossible to on the experience and empirical values,
remove all the errors, which were made du- achieved for the value of the graphical scri-
ring that modeling, from the data, because bing, the accuracy is usually set to 0.2 mm.
there is usually no information that could be In Table 7, the empirical accuracies of the
used for reconstructing the original data. 3D data model created by digitization of
Errors, contained in the data obtained by the cartographic material are presented.
Table 7 The quality of 3D data model obtained by digitization the TM25, TM50 and TM100
Vertical accuracy Graphic scribing
Scale Equidistance (m)
(m) accuracy (m)
1: 25 000 10 2,1 5
1: 50 000 20 3,9 10
1:100 000 20 5,1 14
DIGITAL TERRAIN MODEL

Despite that, the vertical system in digi- Specifically, the process of the DTM
tal cartography is usually represented in a production consists of the analog - digital
grid form. In that case, it could be said that conversion (scanning and vectorization) of
accuracy of the digital elevation representa- contour lines, adding heights to contour
tion depends directly on the sources and lines, transforming vector lines into clouds
technologies used for measuring the geodata of points and generating the 3D data mo-
on the density of elevation points (i.e. grid del.
size) and their geometric positions on the From an interpretation and topological
terrain slope (Li, et al., 2005). aspect, there are two basic forms which

can represent the DTM - regular grid and vidual points that are directly measured.
TIN (Figure 5). The quality of the DTM is Their quantity, with respect to the quality
defined by the positional accuracy of indi of sample, represents the terrain surface.
Figure 5 Interpretation of 3D data model in Grid and TIN format
The vertical accuracy of the digital ter-

rain model (DTM), obtained by digiti-zation H 
 (z *
i  zi ) 2
; (5)
n
the contour lines and other features from
topographic maps, includes all the sources of where:
errors, both in the process of its conversion z i - checkpoint height obtained by in-
into a digital form, and in gene-rating the 3D terpolation;
data model by interpolation (Li, et al., 2005). z i - provided control points height; and
To control the quality of the obtained n - number of control points.
models (the previously explained method for
The vertical accuracy of the DTM
both procedures), coordinates of the points
obtained is based on the digitalized contour
from the catalog of state points of a trigono-
lines from the topographic maps (reproduc-
metric network, which are located in that tion originals) and is shown in Table 8.
area, were used. Thus, there were visual and In this case, beside the grid and triangular
exact methods for assessing the data quality irregular network (TIN), the grid model is
of the 3D data model (Gorokhovich, Vous- created by two methods of interpolation and
tianiouk, 2006). For evaluating the accuracy, visualization of the elevation surface. One
the equation for standard errors is used: of them is the inverse distance weighed

(IDW), and the other method is a spline (ESRI, 2010). They are also presented in
using software ArcGIS - 3D Analyst, different resolutions.
Table 8 The quality of DTM obtained on a basis of digitized contour lines of originals TM
TM25 TM50 TM100
GRID GRID GRID
IDW Spline IDW Spline IDW Spline
TIN TIN TIN
Resolution – step (m) Resolution – step (m) Resolution – step (m)
25 10 25 10 50 20 50 20 100 40 100 40
The mean square error (m)
2.3 2.9 2.7 1.9 1.7 4.6 5.2 5.0 3.6 3.4 7.9 8.2 7.9 6.3 6.1
The precision of a grid model is deter- surface geometric continuity and possibility
mined by the cell dimensions. A high den- of differentiability and smoothness surface
sity grid with points of high accuracy pro- at any point. In practice, however, good
duces an accurately approximated surface, DTM considers the model that illustrates the
(URL 2). But the TIN model is in the form terrain topography confidentially and well.
of triangulated irregularly scattered points The data quality on topographic maps
and depends on the degree of the surface primarily depends on the chosen scale and
slope and curvature. For an increased accu- method of visualizing the elevation surface.
racy of surface approximation, the TIN Moreover, the vertical accuracy of content
model requires dense points and inclusion depends on the application methods of inter-
thecharacteristic break lines, (URL 2). polation. The analysis of the three different
scales (TM25, TM50, TM100) and interpo-
CONCLUSION lation methods, i.e. the method of inverse
distance weighting and spline, over the same
This paper presents some ways to obtain set of spatial data of the selected areas carry
the vertical accuracy of data on the digital out important conclusions. In the interpreta-
topographic maps and using a 3D data mod- tion of spatial data continuity and terrain
el obtained on the basis of digitized contour topography, the best results were obtained
lines of originals topographic maps. Namely, by spline method and scale TM25. Similar
height information is more and more im- representations are obtained in all scales by
portant in the decision making process, mon- the spline method and method of inverse
itoring and planning processes in state ad- distance weight.
ministration, engineering, mining and other
areas of public life. Using digital technolo- REFERENCES
gies has significantly increased the geospa-
tial information marketplace, and is still [1] Radojčić, S., Borisov, M., Božić, B.,
increasing it, both user and producer wise 2011. Positional Accuracy of Geograp-
(URL 2). hical Information and Recent Stan-
The vertical accuracy of digital data is in dards for its Evaluation, Bulletin of
accordance with the data derived from the The Serbian Geographical Society,
classic topographic maps, having to meet Volume XCI - No. 2, pp. 107-112.,
requirements generally formulated by the Belgrade, Serbia.
national standards, (Gorokhovich, Voustia- [2] Aguilar, F. J., Mills, J. P., Delgado, J.,
niouk, 2006). From the mathematical point Aguilar, M. A., Negreiros, J. G. and
of view, the reliable DTM must have the Pérez, J. L., 2010. Modelling Vertical

Error in Lidar-Derived Digital Eleva- of Vertical Datum Surfaces in Coastal
tion Models, ISPRS Journal of Photo- and Offshore Zones, Survey Review,
grammetry and Remote Sensing 65(1), Vol. 45, No. 331. Bristol, United
103-110. Kingdom.
[3] Environmental Systems Research [8] ISO, 2013. The International Organi-
Institute /ESRI, 2010. Using Arc GIS zation for Standardization, ISO19157:
3D Analyst, User Guide, Redlands, Geographic Information - Quality
USA. Principles, Geneva, Switzerland.
[4] Frančula, N., 2003. Digital Carto- [9] Perdue N., 2013. The Vertical Space
graphy, Faculty of Geodesy, Zagreb, Problem, Article, Cartographic Perspe-
Croatia. ctives, Journal of the North American
[5] Gorokhovich, Y., Voustianiouk, A., Cartographic Information Society, No.
2006. Accuracy Assessment of the 74, pp. 9-28, USA.
processed SRTM-Based Elevation [10] Petrović M. V., Zlatanović D., Borisov
Data by CGIAR Using Field Data M., Djurdjevac Ignjatović L., 2016.
from USA and Thailand and its Rela- Concepts of 3D Terrain Modelling and
tion to the Terrain Characteristics, Geomorphometric Analysis in Mining,
Remote Sensing of Environment, No. Mining & Metallurgy Engineering
104, pp. 409–415. Bor, No. 3, pp. 1–12.
[6] Hasegawa, H., Ishiyama, N., 2013. [11] URL 1: Mining BasinBor - Krivelj
Publication of the Digital Maps (Basic http://rtb.rs/rtb-bor-doo/rudnik-bakra-
Geospatial Information), Bulletin of bor/rudnik-bakra-veliki-krivelj/
The GeoSpatial Information Authority [12] URL 2: Vertical Accuracy -
of Japan, Tokio, Japan, pp. 19-24. Centremaps Live.
[7] Iliffe, J. C; Ziebart, M. K; Turner, J. F; http:///www.centremapslive.co.uk/page
Talbot, A. J; Lessnoff, 2013. Accuracy /height_information.asp

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 622.012:.003.8(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704051K
Daniel Kržanović*, Milenko Ljubojev*, Ivana Jovanović*, Nenad Vušović**
AN ANALYSIS THE EFFECTS OF CHANGES IN PRICE OF

METAL AND OPERATING COSTS TO THE PROFIT IN
EXPLOITATION THE COPPER ORE DEPOSITS, A CASE STUDY:
COPPER MINE MAJDANPEK, SERBIA***
Abstract
Mining is the process of extracting a naturally occurring material from the earth to derive a profit.
Whether the company make a profit or not depends on many economic parameters, among which the
most important are the metal prices on the world market and realized operating costs in the process of
exploitation. This work presents the influence of copper price change and value of operating costs on the
generated cash flows, i.e. profit, in the case of the open pit South Mining District, which operates within
the Copper Mine Majdanpek, Serbia.
Keywords: metal price, operating costs, profit, Copper Mine Majdanpek
1 INTRODUCTION
The design and scheduling of the open conditions. The next step is defining the
pit mines is a significant and complex prob- final limit of the open pit and mining
lem in mine planning. The principal aim of dynamics of the mineable ore reserves.
a mining operation is to ensure that an ore Finally, a DCF analysis is performed. The
body is mined in a way such that the value
aim of these efforts is to determine the most
realized from the mine is maximized.
profitable excavation plan and the highest
Profitable exploitation of the mineral
rate of return of invested funds. These
deposits requires a certain economic asse-
activities are carried out in the field of long-
ssment and planning of exploitation. First, it
must be determined which part of the term planning or strategic planning. Pla-
deposit is economical for the mine nning an open pit can be explained in a
(mineable reserve) and what methods of series of steps, each preceding the next, as
excavation can be applied under the given shown in Figure 1.
*
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor, e-mail: daniel.krzanovic@irmbor.co.rs
**
University of Belgrade, Technical Faculty in Bor
***
The work is the result of the Project TR 33038 “Improvement the Technology of Copper Ore Mining
and Processing with Monitoring of Living and Working Environment in RTB Bor Group“, funded by
the Ministry of Education, Science and Technological Development of the Republic of Serbia

Figure 1 Steps in planning an open pit
Market scenarios are often explored, Therefore it is important that the price pro-
usually in terms of an upside and downside jections or price forecasts be made covering
case for metal prices. Metal prices arguably at least the depreciation period (that period
have the largest impact on project valuation, in which the investment is being recovered).
and an impact on what the optimal opera- The operating cost can be reported by the
tional plan will be. different unit operations: drilling, blasting,
Also, the operating costs have a signi- loading, hauling and other. The “other cate-
ficant role in achieving the maximum cash gory” could be broken down to include doz-
flows during the life of ore exploitation at ing, grading, road maintenance, dump
the open pit. maintenance, pumping, etc. Some mines
include maintenance costs together with the
2 PRICE-COST RELATIONSHIPS operating costs. For analysis it is also neces-
sary to define the direct and indirect costs
The revenue to the mine every year de- incurred in concentrating, smelting, and re-
pends upon the tons of concentrate produced fining metal.
and the price. The costs to the mine on the There are certain costs which are re-
other hand depend upon the amount of mate- garded as the ‘fixed’, or independent of the
rial mined and processed [1]. production level. The other costs are ‘varia-
If one assumes that K tons of concentrate ble’, depending directly on production level.
are produced every year, then the yearly Still other costs are somewhere in between.
revenue depends directly on the price re-
ceived for the product. 3 MARKET METAL PRICES
A large capital investment is required at
the start of the mining. As will be discussed In order to reduce uncertainty about the
later this must be recovered from the yearly correct assessment of the metal price on the
profits. If the yearly profits are not as ex- market, three deterministic approaches are
pected, then the payments cannot be made. often applied:

 technical approach, shown that the best results are a combina-
 fundamental approach, and tion of technical and fundamental ap-
 combination of technical and funda- proach.
mental approach. Figure 2 gives a historical overview
From the listed deterministic approac- of the copper price trends for the period
hes, in the previous practice, it has been 1960 ÷ 2015 [2].
Figure 2 Trends of copper price for the period 1960 ÷ 2015 [2]
A long term forecast of copper price presented in Figure 3 [2].

trends for the period 2013 ÷ 2025 is
Figure 3 A long term forecast of copper price trends for the period 2013 ÷ 2025 [2]
4 OPERATING COST MEASURES

Reduction of the unit operating costs is 1) The first way is to try to reduce the
one of the most important goals of the unit costs for input and reduce the
company. It leads to an increase in the net
consumption. This is the basic goal
cash flow and profitability, and helps to
ensure a sustainability of operations even at of productivity that should be imple-
the low metal prices. However, there are two mented in the exploitation process. In
ways of looking at it [3]. the process of planning the long-term

development of the mine, there are account in the analysis. Variations in
limited ways to reduce costs such as: the unit costs are then the result of
- Reduction of the unit input costs, interaction between the physical
which is applicable while the reduc- activities and costs incurred in
tion of costs is not followed by a different plans, and are not the result
decrease in quality and hence an of measures to reduce the costs.
increase in total costs.
- Reduction of the consumption rate, 5 ULTIMATE PIT AND PUSHBACK
as long as consumption is not already SELECTION
reduced to an effective rate of con-
Optimization of the open pit implies the
sumption that can not be improved.
obtaining of possible contour of the open pit,
Any further attempt to reduce, for
based on a block model of deposit that has
example, by limited supply, can only
an economic value, and which can be calcu-
result in reduction the related acti-
lated. The concept of a possible contour of
vities, which will be a counter pro-
the open pit means the open pit contour with
ductive.
the maximum slope of the general slope,
So, there are good and bad ways to formed after drawing the transport routes
reduce costs. and safety berm, and which meets the
2) Another way of looking at mini- stability criteria.
mizing the unit costs is based on the A well-known early contribution to this
results of the optimization strategy, field was made by Lerchs and Grossmann
what is the goal of the feasibility [4], who presented a graph-theoretic algo-
study. In the same way, the NPV can rithm for determining the final contour of
be found for several strategies and the open pit, known as the ultimate pit, such
choose the one that brings the maxi- that the total profit from the mine is maxi-
mum NPV; the unit costs can be also mized.
found for different strategies and Figure 4 shows the NPV - tonnage graph
choose the ones that generate the on the basis of which the Whittle process
minimum unit cost. As a result, the finds an optimal excavation limit and
basic productivity and cost-change pushbacks. The graph shows the achieved
factor are the same in each case, and NPV, as well as the quantities of ore and
certain differences are taken into tailings for each nesting pit.
Figure 4 A typical NPV tonnage graph by the Whittle method

A cash flow curve relative to the in each year. Techniques applied to solve
tonnage tends to be at the top. Behind the the mine production scheduling problem
point of maximum, it is not economical to include heuristics [7], parametric methods
excavate, but excavation of this part of the [8], dynamic programming [9], [10], [11]
deposit can be considered in case of impro- and integer linear programming [12], [13],
ving the economic conditions (increase of [14]. The major limitation with these ap-
metal prices, or reduction of costs) or proaches is that they encounter significant
improvement of technological conditions. computational difficulties when trying to
The choice of one of the open pit shells solve problems of realistic size.
as the open pit ultimate limit is made by the
planning engineers and management, and 7 CASE STUDY
the choice is made in accordance with the
company goals. An inexperienced choice The Copper Mine Majdanpek, in the
may be considered to be the best contour of production, technical and technological
the best case curve. The experienced engi-
sense, represents a complex mining system
neers usually choose the best open pit on the
basis of the average net value obtained on that has activities from geological explora-
the basis of a curve of the best and worst tions of mineral resources, ore exploitation
case. Some users modify this technique and and processing to a number of supporting
choose the open pits that by the value fall to activities as the necessary support to the
60 to 70 percent of difference between the core activities.
curves of the best and worst case [5], [6]. Production and processing of ore in the
Copper Mine Majdanpek is currently devel-
6 SCHEDULE OPTIMIZATION oped at the open pit South Mining District
and is of great importance for copper pro-
Scheduling is the process of determining duction in the system of company Mining
the timing of activities. With the widespread Smelter Basin Bor Group (RTB Bor Group)
use of a discounted cash flow as a value [15].
measure, the ability to optimize value The economic results of the mine ope-
through strategically focused scheduling is rations, and therefore the company itself,
very important. Cash received earlier in the depend primarily on the metal price on the
project is worth more, in present value stock exchange and costs arising in the
terms, than the same amount of cash reproduction process.
ceived later in the project. This encourages Based on the defined economic varia-
the mine planner to bring forward the posi- bles, the analysis was conducted for five
tive cash flows and defer negative cash scenarios:
flows. The common methodology is to ac- 1) Scenario 1 – an analysis of cash flow
cess ore as early as possible whilst mining as change for the forecasted copper
little waste is necessary. price on the market and projected
The removal of material is contingent operating costs.
upon the removal of a cone of material situ- 2) Scenario 2 - an analysis of cash flow
ated above it, the size and shape of which is change for the copper price increase
dictated by the requirement of safe wall by 5%, whereby the operating costs
slopes for the pit. This is modeled in the do not change.
precedence constraints for the mine. An 3) Scenario 3 - an analysis of cash flow
additional class of constraints are the pro- change for the copper price increase
duction constraints, imposed by the availa- by 5%, whereby the copper price
bility of extraction and processing capacity does not change.

4) Scenario 4 – an analysis of cash flow The Mineable reserve of the copper de-
change for the copper price and posit South Mining District Majdanpek are
operating costs increase by 5%. calculated on the basis of a block model of
5) Scenario 5 - an analysis of cash flow deposit, formed in the software Gems [15].
change for the copper price and View of a block model of the Cu deposit
operating costs reduction by 5%. South Mining District is shown in Figure 5.
Figure 5 View of 3D block model of the deposit South Mining District Majdanpek [15]
The optimization process was carried out Compared to Scenario 1, where the
in the software Whittle using a modified analysis was carried out for the pro-
Lerchs-Grossmann (LG) algorithm, based jected economic para-meters, signifi-
on which the ultimate pits and pushbacks cantly better Cash Flow is achieved,
were selected. The optimization of exca- which generates an increase of NPV
vation dynamics and DCF analysis were by 12.8%.
carried out in the same software, based on 2) In the case of Scenario 3, the lowest
which the cash flows for defined scenarios
profit is realized, that is, increase of
were generated.
The analysis does not include the capital the operating costs leads to a reduc-
costs and capital replacement costs. tion of NPV by 10.7%.
3) In the case of an increase in both
8 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION copper and operating costs, Scenario
4, the company operation is slightly
The obtained results of conducted analy- improved, expressed through an in-
sis are shown on graphs in Figures 6 and 7. crease of NPV by 2.1%.
Based on the obtained results, shown in 4) Reduction the price of copper and
the graphs, the following can be concluded: operating costs, Scenario 5, leads to a
1) The best economic results are achie-
fall in the company economic bene-
ved in the case of Scenarios 2, that is,
fits, i.e. a decrease of NPV by 2.1%.
increase of the copper market price.

80
Millions
70
60
50
Cash Flow, $
40
30
20
10
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Mine Life,Years
Scenario 1 Scenario 2 Scenario 3 Scenario 4 Scenario 5
Figure 6 Cash Flow Graph for different Scenarios
800
Millions
700
600
500
NPV, $
400
300
200
100
0
Scenario 1 Scenario 2 Scenario 3 Scenario 4 Scenario 5
Scenario
Figure 7 NPV Graph for different Scenarios
CONCLUSION
The conclusion is that the profit depends Therefore, the mining companies apply
upon the relative changes of the price and different strategies for sustainable business
costs. in the market in terms of changing the metal

prices on the stock market, thereby paying a Strategic Mine Planning Conference,
special attention to the management of ope- Colorado, pp. 1-13.
rating costs arising in the process of mining [7] M. E. Gershon, An Open-Pit Produc-
and processing of mineral raw materials. tion Scheduler: Algorithm and Imple-
The conducted analysis is important mentation, Mining Engineering 39
looking from the real aspect the impact of (1987) 793-796.
metal prices and operating costs, as econo- [8] Jeff Whittle, Four-X User Manual,
mic variables, not only to the economics of Whittle Programming Pty Ltd, Mel-
mine, but also the entire company RTB Bor bourne, 1998.
Group. On the example of the open pit [9] A. H. Onur and P. A. Dowd, Open-Pit
South Mining District Majdanpek, the con-
Optimization - Part 2: Production Sche-
ducted analysis showed how sensitive the
duling and Inclusion of Roadways,
NPV is to a change in copper prices on the
market, or projected mining operating costs. Transactions of the Institute of Mining
and Metallurgy, Section A 102 (1993)
A105-A113.
REFERENCES
[10] Qing Wang, Long-Term Open-Pit Pro-
duction Scheduling through Dynamic
[1] W. Hustrulid, M. Kuchta, R. Martin,
Phase-Bench Sequencing, Transactions
Open Pit Mine Planning & Design,
of the Institute of Mining and Meta-
Volume 1 – Fundamentals, CRC Press
llurgy, Section A 105 (1996) A99-
Taylor & Francis Group 6000 Broken
A104.
Sound Parkway NW, Suite 300 Boca
[11] B. Tolwinski and R. Underwood, A
Raton, FL 33487-2742, ISBN 978-1-
Scheduling Algorithm for Open Pit
4822-2117-6 (eBook - PDF)
Mines, IMA Journal of Mathematics
[2] World Bank Commodity Price data,
Applied in Business and Industry 7
available at:
(1996) 247-270.
[http://www.worldbank.org/content/da
[12] M.E. Gershon, Mine Scheduling Opti-
m/Worldbank/GEP/GEPcommodities/
mization with Mixed Integer Progra-
Price_Forecast_20150722.pdf].
mming, Mining Engineering 35 (1983)
[3] B. Hall, 2014, Cut-off Grades and
351-354.
Optimizing the Strategic Mine Plan,
[13] Martin L. Smith, Optimizing Inventory
ISBN 978 1 925100228, The Austra-
Stockpiles and Mine Production: An
lasian Institute of Mining and
Application of Separable and Goal
Metallurgy, Carlton Victoria, Australia
Programming to Phosphate Mining
[4] Lerchs, H., Grossmann, I.F., 1965,
Using AMPL/CPLEX, CIM Bulletin
Optimum Design of Open Pit Mines,
92:1030 (1999) 61-64.
Transactions, Canadian Institute of
[14] Louis Caccetta and Stephen P. Hill, An
Mining and Metallurgy, Vol. LXVIII,
Application of Branch And Cut To
pp. 17–24.
Open Pit Mine Scheduling, Journal of
[5] Whittle, J., 1999, A decade of Open Pit
Global Optimization 27 (2003) 349-
Mine Planning and Optimization - The
365.
Craft of Turning Algorithms into Pac-
[15] D. Kržanović, N. Vušović, M. Ljubo-
kages, Proceedings of 28th APCOM
jev, R. Rajković: Importance of Pla-
Symp., Golden, Colorado School of
nning the Open Pits in the Conditions of
Mines, pp. 15-24.
Contemporary Mining - A Case Stu-dy:
[6] Wharton C., 2000, Add Value to your
The Open Pit South Mining Dis-trict
Mine through Improved Long Term
Majdanpek, Mining and Meta-llu-rgy
Scheduling, Whittle North American
Engineering Bor, 1-2/2017, pp. 15-22.

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 622.73(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704059M
Nenad Magdalinović*, Bojan Drobnjaković*, Ivana Jovanović*, Sanja Petrović*
OPTIMAL NUMBER OF REVOLUTION

THE ECCENTRIC SHAFT OF A JAW CRUSHER
WITH A SIMPLE MOTION OF THE MOVING JAW
Abstract
The paper analyzes forces acting on a piece of raw material in a jaw crusher with a simple motion of
the moving jaw, and based on this defines the formula to define the optimal number of revolutions the
eccentric shaft. Under the optimum number of revolution the eccentric shaft, the number of revolutions
is assumed to ensure that the crusher achieves the maximum crushing capacity.
Keywords: jaw crusher, capacity, optimum speed, shaft
INTRODUCTION
The most important technological fea- stroke and that the half-time of the eccentric
ture of the jaw crushers is its capacity. The shaft rotation must be equal to the free fall
capacity depends on the number of revolu- time of the crushed pieces from the level
tions of the eccentric shaft with a simple BB1 to the level AA1 of discharge opening
motion of the moving jaw. The crusher (Fig.1). Starting from this assumption, the
achieves the maximum capacity at the opti- optimal number of rotations of the eccentric
mum speed of the eccentric shaft. The opti- shaft is defined by the formula [1]:
mum speed of the eccentric shaft is the
number of revolutions that ensures that the √ (Rpm ) (1)
time of a half-revolution of the eccentric
no - optimum speed of the eccentric
shaft t2 is equal to the time t1 required during
shaft, (Rpm)
the idling of the moving jaw, the crushed
g - acceleration due to gravity, (m/s2)
pieces fall the level BB1 through the wor-
α - crusher working angle, (°)
king space for height h to the level of dis-
e - movement of the moving jaw at the
charge AA1(Fig.1).
level of discharge opening, (m)
In the theoretical considerations and der-
ivation the formula for the optimal number In carrying out the formula (1), the re-
of revolutions of the eccentric shaft, two sistant force between the crusher jaws, when
different approaches are present in the litera- leaving the workspace of the crusher, were
ture. The first approach (Andreev, 1966) [1], not taken into account. Therefore, in prac-
based on the assumption that discharge of tice, the reduction in the number of turns,
the crushed product from the workspace of which is obtained according to the formula
the crusher, is carried out during an empty (1), is recommended for 5-10%.
*
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor, Zeleni bulevar 35, Bor,
e-mail: nenad.magdalinovic@irmbor.co.rs

Another approach (Magdalinović N, crushed products, since the pieces of crushed
1980/81)[2] is based on the assumption that raw material do not fall freely through the
the crushed products does not fall freely workspace of the crusher
from the level of BB1 to the level at the dis- The second assumption (Magdalinović
charge opening AA1, but during the dis- N, 1980/81) is closer to the reality, but ig-
charge, the crushed product slides along the nores the fact that when sliding the crushed
steep level B1A1 on the mobile jaw (Fig.1). products on the surface of the moving jaw,
According to this assumption, the optimal exist the friction force between the pieces
number of rotations of the eccentric shaft is and a fixed jaw T2 (Fig.2).
defined by the formula [2]: The aim of this paper is to include, in
addition to the force of friction along the
√ (Rpm) surface of the mobile jaw, the friction force
between the pieces and surface of the fixed
(2) jaw, in the analysis of discharge the crus-
The first assumption (Andreev, 1966) at hing product from the workspace of the
least reflects the reality of discharge the crusher.
B B1
A A1 A2
e
α
Fig. 1 Cross section of the workspace of the jaw crusher

Theoretical analysis
In discharging the crushing product, the (3)

catch angle α is slightly increased, and this
will be ignored in the analysis. f - coefficient of friction the pieces on the
Sliding the pieces on a surface of the surface of the movable and fixed jaw
moving jaw plate (Fig. 2) opposes the fric- plate
tion force T1:
T2
T1
N2
N1
Fig. 2 Force acting on a piece when discharge from the workspace of crusher
When the crushing product discharge From the conditions of equilibrium,

through the working area of the crusher, the the force follows:
friction force of the piece on the surface of
the fixed jaw T2 (Fig.2) also exists:
(4) (6)
For discharging the pieces from the
workspace of the crusher, the resultant R of
all the forces acting on the piece in a vertical (7)
direction is a valid one: Where, after solving the equations (6)
(5) and (7), the following values are obtained:

(8) respectively:
(9)
(16)
After replacing (8) and (9) in the equa- Integrating the equation (16), the ex-
tion (10), the expression is obtained: pression for the transmitted height h is
obtained by discharging the fragmentation
(10) product from the level BB1 to the level
AA1, which is read as follows:
Where a is the acceleration of pieces
when discharge through the working space
of the crusher
(17)
Acceleration a can be expressed by the
first derivative of the velocity v by time t, For the initial conditions t = to = 0,
and the equation (10) takes the form: h = ho = 0, and from the equation (17), it
follows that the integral constant C = 0, and
(11) the final expression for the transmitted
height of decay the crushing product through
respectively: the workspace of the crusher is read as fol-
lows:
(12) (18)
Integrating the equation (12) gives the From the equation (18), the necessary
expression for the velocity v of falling the discharge time t1 is followed, which ensures
crushing product through the workspace that the crushed product that is below the
of the crusher: level of BB1 comes out of the workspace
during the empty stroke.
(13)
√ (19)
For the initial conditions t=to=0,
v=vo=0, and from the equation (13), it
follows that the integration constant C=0, From the right triangle A1A2B1 (Fig. 1),
and the final expression for the velocity it follows that:
rate of the crushed product through the (20)
workspace of the jaw crusher is:
Changing the expression for h from the
, (m/s) equation (20) to the equation (19), it is
(14) obtained:
The velocity of the piece v can be ex-

√ (21)
pressed by the first derivative of the trav- [ ]
eled path (the height h - Fig.1) by the time
t, and the equation (14) gets the form: The time t2 of the empty stroke of the
crusher, that is, the discharge time of frag-
mentation product is equal to the half-time
(15) of revolution of the crusher eccentric shaft:

(22) For the conventional gripping angle of
where: n is the number of revolutions, the abrasive crushers, α = 220, and the fric-
(Rpm) tion coefficient, f = 0.3 (Fig. 3), a compara-
Optimal speed of the eccentric shaft tive graphic representation the change in the
follows from the equality of time: number of shaft rotations, in the function of
(23) the moving jaw at the level of the discharge
opening, is given, according to the equations
respectively:
(1), (2), (25), and the crusher manufacturer
Metso. Fig. 3 shows that the catalog values
√ (24) for the number of turns of the eccentric
shaft, depending on the movement of the
From where it follows that: moving jaw, are found between the curves
described by the equations (2) and (25).
It should be noticed that the values for
√
throwing the moving jaw are calculated by
(25) the equation (26)[3], and based on catalog
n0- optimum speed of eccentric shaft, data [4], related to the number of revolutions
(Rpm ) and the size of discharge with:
g - acceleration due to the gravity, (m/s2)
(mm) (26)
α - crusher working angle, (°)
e - movement of the moving jaw at the b1 - minimum width of a discharge
level of the discharge opening (m) opening of the jaw, (mm)
500
Andreev[1]
400 Magdalinovic[2]
Paper
300 Catalog[4]
200
100
0
11 13 14 16 19.5 22
Fig. 3 Graphic view the number of revolutions (Rpm) depending on t
hrowing the moving jaw (mm)
CONCLUSION
Having in mind the geometry of the hing product is discharged, the optimum
workspace of the jaw crushers with the speed of the crusher eccentric shaft can be
free movement of the moving jaw, and the determined according to the formula (25),
obviously resistance the frictional force to
the moving and fixed jaw when the crus- defined in this paper.

REFERENCES
[1] Andreev S. A., Zverevič V. V. i Perov with a Simple Motion of the Moving
V.A., Droblenie, izmeljčenie i groho- Jaw. Proceedings XXV, Technical
čenie poleznyh iskopaemyh, Nedra, Faculty and Copper Institute Bor,
Moskva, 1966 (in Russian) 1980/81, pp. 149-155 (in Serbian)
[3] M. Plavšić, Construction Machines,
[2] Magdalinović N., Theoretically Opti-
1990. pp. 337 (in Serbian)
mal Number of Revolutions of the
[4] Metso Minerals, Crushing and Scree-
Eccentric Axis of the Jaw Crushers
ning Handbook, 2007

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 622.012:658.5(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704065R
Gordana Rendulić*, Marija Mirić**
THE ROLE OF LEADERS IN MOTIVATION OF

EMPLOYEES IN THE MINING COMPANIES
Abstract
The new millennium brings a new paradigm of business that takes place in completely different con-
ditions and is based primarily on knowledge, creativity and post-modern leadership. Radical changes,
in which today's economy and its entities exist and develop, require the new ways of leadership. Hence,
the new paradigm articulates and gives a critical dimension of leadership, as an interaction between the
leaders and followers, with the intention to change it, based more on the emotional and ethical assump-
tions than on forced active influence, having in mind the nature of the business performed by the emp-
loyees in various activities, especially in the mining companies. The aim of this analysis is to determine
the correctness of relationship between the leaders and followers as a social category and projections of
further trend of this relationship, given that it is supposed that this relationship is A direct reflection on
motivation the followers in their work and the results of work in the mining companies.
Keywords: corporate culture, leadership, motivation, mining companies, leadership style, perfor-
mance, business success
1 INTRODUCTION
Today’s business is increasingly leaving values, the creator of business performance

the intensive model of economic growth and others. On the social scene the civiliza-
based on the comparative advantages of tion appeared whose base is on education
natural resources and unskilled labor. There and development system, which requires
is a new form of economic creativity which that every person works in a scientific ma-
increasingly inaugurates some new intangi- nner in order to actively participate in the
ble origin resources such as: knowledge, social and economic reality, creating a so-
creativity, innovation, information, quality, cially and personal wealth.
standards, time, design, speed, know-how Modern economy functions in a com-
and other. The level of business success pletely new environment and a new geo
depends on the quality of human resources culture that, in addition to the knowledge
and their competence available to the busi- and standards in economic terms, respects
ness systems; regardless of their place in the and develops a knowledge for the new ethi-
organizational structure. A new knowledge cal norms and forms of corporate culture
about business and people is a source for that significantly change and impact on the
completely new business philosophy, the leadership, business policy, employee be-
initiator of the new changes and bearer of havior, and most of all life and work of a
risk, the creator of innovation and resource modern businessman in the mining compa-
allocation, the designer of new quality and nies. The absence of leadership development
*
University of Kragujevac, Faculty of Technical Sciences Čačak, e-mail:gordana.rendulic@ftn.kg.ac.rs
**
Student of Entrepreneurial management at the Faculty of Technical Sciences Čačak

in the contemporary business, based on a means that the leadership is forced to live
strategic approach, would cause a huge with changes and to adapt and transform its
damage to all business systems and overall role in line with the nature of the environ-
economic and business creation, especially ment. Changes in the companies in our
in developing countries that are in the pro- country are a direct response to the transi-
cess of transition of ownership, as is the case tional changes in property, changes in the
in the Republic of Serbia. Poor leadership is market (desire of customers, changes in
a key factor in the failure of business and the competition), changes in state and legal re-
main obstacle to overcome economic reces- gulations, changes in the economic situation,
sion. Therefore, the role of the leadership in
changes in the political atmosphere, changes
mining companies due to the nature of busi-
in the international relations, and more.
ness and the risks to which the employees
Changes and knowledge are the main bearer
are exposed, becomes an essential activity of
the management of each company. of development, and the main cause of de-
cay, where development and change are
completely natural processes, the causal
2 LEADERSHIP AND
consequence of survival and universal rules
ENVIRONMENTAL CHANGES
of existence.
This general principle of change ma-
Changes and their permanent metamor-
nagement also applies to mining companies
phosis do not only condition the economic
which activity is based on the new know-
life of a society, but they have become a way
ledge, technologies, new methods, as well as
of life of economic entities in every deve-
new ways of management and processes and
loped economy. Business systems are in a
employees, no matter how specific they are.
state of stability when the strategy, organiza-
And the mining production is increasingly
tional structure and style of their leadership
based on the new knowledge and capabili-
are in accordance with the internal and ex-
ties of human resources. ”In the knowledge
ternal environment. But the state of stability
economy, knowledge takes on some speci-
of business systems is difficult to maintain
fics and becomes the focus of interest in the
because it is permanently disturbed by the
economic science and practice. It now be-
changes in the internal and external envi-
comes the organizational knowledge at the
ronment. Globalization as a planetary pro-
level of the business system and increasingly
cess of change has brought many demands
becomes the essence and carrier of business
to the companies to be successful in their
development and growth, and the structure
further work. One of the important require-
for the creation of new knowledge. “[2]
ments is that the enterprises should increase
Changes are the way of life of today's
their ability and readiness to learn, to deve-
companies and management in them and the
lop their human resources in order to over-
come successfully the complexity and in- means in hands of leaders. The leadership
creasing uncertainty in which they carry out itself is a consequence and cause of resulting
their mission. and incorporated changes in the business
“Globalization of knowledge can be un- systems. Some of the definitions of change
derstood as the growth, development and are: “Change within any element of an orga-
knowledge exchange between different eco- nizational system that promotes functiona-
nomic entities on a global basis.” [1] That is lity, that is at a higher level of consistency
why the changes in the structure and leader- for the environmental requirements,” “modi-
ship of the company are inevitable, which fication of task, structure, technology or

people in an organization”, “planned action “Therefore it is necessary to make a princi-
that represents an attempt to systematically ple distinction between the management and
redesign the organization in a way that will leadership: while the management is focused
allow it to adapt to the significant changes in on personal problems and problems of hu-
the external environment and to achieve the man resources, organizational setup and
new goals, ““ abandoning the old way of structure, preparation of certain funds and
doing things and accepting a new one that their executive recruitment, efficiency and
will contribute better results.” [3] utilitarianism, that is the internal organiza-
The management of the company should tional issues, management, technical objec-
recognize the environmental factors, deter- tives and control, the leadership is focused
mine the character and intensity of their ef- on the vision, construction of a “big picture”
fect and interact in order to create an eco- of change, innovation, strategic landmarks,
nomic horizon to the guide business, i.e. to purpose or purposes of the future.”[4] Lea-
determine the goals and strategy of the com- dership in its analysis has two points of
pany. The idea of a management change is view: conventional perspective based on the
to enable companies to retain and improve concept of efficiency, since it starts from the
their positions in the new circumstances. assumption that the leadership takes place in
Therefore, a management change is a sys- a rational created institutions, where the
tematic and structured approach in creating a fundamental function of the leadership is a
sustainable change in employee behavior mobilization of followers in a direction of
within a company. Today's intensity and organizational objectives and critical per-
pace of change has changed the way of spective involving various sociological con-
business management, putting leadership as cepts including the social structure, proce-
an integral part of management in a very sses, culture and norms oriented towards the
important place giving it a great role and discovery of ways in which power, control,
importance in the management system. and legitimacy conflicts affect the dynamics
of relations between the leaders and follo-
3 LEADER’S ABILITY AND wers”.[5]
BEHAVIOR Increasingly the question is what is a
leadership? And who are the leaders? Lead-
Leadership as an unstoppable metamor- ership is a process of influencing and direct-
phosis process continues its evolution in the ing the activities of members of organiza-
modern economy. Leadership evolution tions towards achieving the business objec-
starts from the connection of the leader and tivities. It is a wise way how a leadership
subordinate followers through a hierarchica- uses its influence and power. Leadership as
lly - composed chain of command and one- the process of forming the behavior of peo-
way communication process to position the ple in the business system is focused on a
leader through the possession of the right human interaction “influencing the others”
answers and reactions, which directly quali- and on an internal integration of business
fies him/her for leadership and as an unbi- system. [6] Leadership is demonstrated
ased attitude of influence between the lea- when the individuals mobilize institutional,
ders and followers. Leadership can be treat- political, psychological and other resources
ed as a collective process that includes the to arouse, engage and satisfy the motives of
leaders and followers and is formed in a followers. [7] From the above, it can be seen
specific social and historical context. that a leader is a chosen as a favorite person

with a central role and the highest social The manager is successful in doing busi-
status and the spirit in front of everyone in ness if has the leadership capabilities. A
the business system. This is a man with a leader is the one who is able to influence the
physical and personal qualities and charac- attitudes, opinions, decisions and actions of
teristics (age, appearance, communication each follower.
skills, knowledge, intelligence, creativity, Leadership is a specific type of relation-
integrity, flexibility, and an aspiration for ship in management and is based on a social
leadership, reliability, self-confidence, ex- activity or activity between the leaders and
traversion, emotional stability, and the like). followers. Leadership is focused on a human
According to the global leadership progno- interaction “impact on others” and on
sis, a leader is defined as someone who ma- achieving the business results. Leadership as
na-ges the performance and responsibilities a process in itself requires “real” and capable
of other individuals in the organization. [8] leader who creates a vision and responsible
Integrity and morality (ethical and spi- followers who accept the vision and follow
ritual leadership) of leaders increasingly take the ideas and values of leader. Fair and hu-
the key positions in the profiles of leaders, mane attitude of these parties in the process
so creating both the basis and guarantee for has a direct impact on performance the busi-
respect from followers, and all this leads to ness system which is the essence of leader-
the business success. [9] Altruism or con- ship to make all followers gather around one
cern for others and integrity are also the im- idea and so direct the creative energy,
portant similarities. As for the differences knowledge and ability towards achieving a
the authentic leaders emphasize authenticity defined objective. Followers as bearers of
and self-awareness and tend to be more working activities and supporters’ of co-
transactional than the other aspects of lea- mmon ideas for achieving organizational
ders do. Ethical leaders emphasize the moral goals are also individuals with their perso-
problems while spiritual leaders emphasize nality, with their own personal profile and
vision, hope and faith, as well as work as a their characteristics. Leaders should always
profession. have this fact in mind when it comes to per-
ceive the behavior of individuals at work,
4 SOCIAL DIMENSION OF decision making, communication, control
LEADERSHIP and others.
For modern leader and leader of the fu-
Leadership is not what management is, ture, it is not enough to have a high level of
even though it has a strong relationship with IQ, but the so-called emotional intelligence;
management and makes it an integral part. EQ is needed and it is ability to be more
In most business systems there are too much sympathetic to the others, to cooperate, to
of management and too little of leadership. properly assess, to create a good relation-
The manager, no matter how good is a pla- ship, to be attractive and ot-hers [10]. Emo-
nner, organizer, coordinator and process tional intelligence indicates the importance
controller, without the motivational abilities of ability of leaders to express their feelings
of the leader cannot lead to good business to employees, to live in harmony with them
results. The leader is successful if know how and to use them to achieve the important
to stimulate and rally the commitment of organizational goals. Personality is, in addi-
his/her followers to the business system and tion to traits, abilities and personality traits
all his/her activities, even without manage- as the holder of differences in behavior
rial skills. and work, conditioned by a number of

other dimensions and complex phenome- development, strictness of parents, profes-
non, which is an area of psychological re- sion of parents, financial status, family status
search. Kno-wing the personality of the in the environment, etc.), schools that an
individual should be the first item when individual attended, the jobs done, the quali-
entering the world of work, because the fication gained, marital status and others. All
personality of individuals creates the profile data on an individual would serve to leader
of business system. There are different peo- to fully understand their followers, their
ple and different behaviors of these people behavior, their attitude towards work, to-
in the business system. Some of them are wards colleagues and towards authority,
consistently friendly, calm, and quiet, others their responsibility and others and to build
are aggressive, rude, talkative, nervous, etc. attitude towards them and to consequently
While some are effective in decision- treat them. Harmonizing the relationship of
making and risk-taking, creative and open the leaders and followers is essential for the
to the new ideas, have high moral standards, life and development the business system to
others may be hesitant, timid, slow, passive, motivate the followers and good perfor-
without ideas, flexible in their moral atti- mance in work.
tudes, etc. It is obvious that a person makes
a unique system of proper behavior, which 5 LEADERSHIP AND MOTIVATION
an individual differs from others in the
business system. For business system man- Leadership implements its evolution de-
agement, it is very important to understand velopment and metamorphosis through a
the personality of individuals, because on prism of motivation system the followers.
the basis of that the future reactions of em- Leadership is directly related to the inspira-
ployee-followers can be predicted in a cer- tion of followers and management of their
tain situation and it could be reacted to them behavior in the performance of certain tasks.
adequately. Personality is a very layered, The attitude of leaders towards the followers
complex and developmental psychological expresses leadership style in a certain time
phenomenon; it is a conditioned category by and certain situation. The key criteria for
numerous factors: biological, sociological distinguishing between the leadership styles
and situational. “The psychology of parents are: the leaders attitude to the followers mo-
and educators is decisive in the process of tivation (coercion or incentives), the way in
growth and development the individual” which the leader makes decisions, source of
[11] power that is used to influence on followers,
To comply with the individual profile leader flexibility to adapt to different situa-
and nature of the work, the selection of psy- tions, characteristics of leaders (mental and
chologists should be detailed in the personal- physical, moral, professional, etc.), charac-
ity profiling of the candidates for the pur- teristics of followers and others. According
pose of their efficient performance. Profile to these criteria, there is a whole range of
of employee with details would be available leadership styles from classic to the modern
(in the form of psychological, physical, in- styles.
tellectual and professional files) only for In an effort to identify the factors that
responsible people in the sector of Human most affect the business success of the com-
Resources. That file would contain infor- pany, the contemporary authors are increa-
mation on an individual development from singly emphasizing the employee motivation
the childhood (family structure, growing up as one of the key determinants of perfor-
with or without their parents, their emotional mance. Today, motivation is in the focus of

the interest of a modern leader, who has an dimension, reducing the formal role of lea-
active and important role in encouraging ders in such environment. Leadership is a
his/her followers for greater engagement at central function of management and refers to
work and greater efficiency and effective- directing the work activities of employees in
ness in business “Efficiency is thus focused the organization, as the strategic most im-
on the choice of needs that the company will portant way to achieve the organizational
satisfy, i.e. the choice of goals and activities goals. Managing people, among other
to provide it, and the efficiency on the pro- things, means to know how to motivate
duction capacity and rationality of using the them, thus ensuring that they are doing their
resources that the company has at its dispo- job well and contributing to achieving the
sal.” [12] mission and achieving the goals of the busi-
The quality of the accomplished per- ness system.
formance of members of the organization An important aspect of leadership in the
is directly conditioned by a degree of their role of employee motivation is the ability of
motivation, among other things, by an the leader to identify the individual goals of
ability of the leader to encourage his/her each employee, and accordingly offer them
followers in the right way. Motivation is a an adequate reward for successfully accom-
set of processes that support, direct and plished tasks, thus ensuring compliance of
maintain the behavior of people, aimed at individual and projected goals of the organi-
achieving a particular goal. It is consid- zation. The ability to recognize the motive of
ered as a complex psychological category employees and the satisfaction of their needs
that dictates a significant part of behavior is what separates successful from unsuce-
of employees in the company, and is the ssful leaders. If motives of an employee
basic catalyst for business actions. Direct- are known, the leader is able to anticipate
ing the behavior of employees in the com- his/her future behavior and accordingly di-
pany, so that it is desirable and acceptable rect him/her to the right path to achieve a
for its operation and business policy, is the higher level of productivity and better finan-
responsibility of the leader. cial results of the business system. The
The notion of leadership is complex, effects of employee motivation by the
multidimensional and multidimensional, and leaders are different in a different compa-
its definitions differ depending on the aspect ny, which is again conditioned by the activi-
from which different authors view and de- ty in which the work process takes place
termine it. One of the most comprehensive both by the structure of the employees
definition of leadership was given by Peter themselves and the conditions in which the
Northouse, who under the leadership implies work activities are carried out. “The cur-
a process in which an individual exercises rent business can be organized successful-
influence on a group, in order to achieve a ly or less successfully, which will directly
common goal. Therefore, it is a complex, affect the final business result-income. Con-
dynamic process that is realized in the concrete producers, mining companies have
text of a group and basically implies an in- different natural and technical business
teractive relationship between the leaders conditions as well as different environmen-
and followers, whose interaction is more tal impacts in relation to the average pro-
pronounced in the modern business condi- ducer of this group, a group of workers. The
tions. Namely, the modern companies or- occurrence of these differences results in a
ganize their business based on a team work, profit deviation of a particular mining com-
where leadership takes on a completely new pany in relation to the profit of the average

producer. This impact cannot be changed decision-making, the way of management,
during the reproduction process, and not by the system of distribution of salaries, human
the organizational efforts of workers and resources management policy. The climate
managers. “[13] consists of relatively permanent, emotional,
How a leader will motivate the follow- social relations and interpersonal relations
ers in such companies depends first of all on of the organization members, as well as the
the style of leadership applied. At the same influence of these attitudes on the behavior
time, the leadership style is conditioned by a of employees. “[14] Followers in this busi-
set of factors, in which the organizational ness atmosphere are emotionally and un-
structure, organizational culture, as well as conditionally tied to the mission of a capa-
the personality and characteristics of the ble leader and are often identified with it.
leader are distinguished. There are nume- Today, it is mentioned more and more
rous criteria and ways of classifying the the visionary leadership, as the ability to
leadership styles. Historically, the leader- create systems, to make the vision a reality,
ship style goes from a commanding, auto- despite a turbulently changing environment.
cratic to participatory, team leadership. Visionary leadership is less concerned with
Thus, the leader of the autocrats as the basic the interaction between the leaders and fo-
means of shaping and directing the behavior llowers, which is in the focus of numerous
of employees will use coercion, punishment leadership models, and more by an intera-
and strong control, with a high degree of ction between the leaders and groups or
rigidity and directives, while the leader of leaders and systems.[15]
the democratic participatory style will moti- The idea that different people will have
vate his/her followers giving a greater au- different motives is of vital importance to
thority and responsibility, giving them the the leaders in deciding on the system of
opportunity to participate in making the rewarding and motivating employees. Each
important decisions. Experience and prac- individual represents a unique set of perso-
tice show that a greater degree of humaniza- nal characteristics, aspirations and motives.
tion the relationship between the leaders and Therefore, individualized approach of lea-
followers give better employee motivation ders to each employee is necessary, in order
results. Each style of leadership brought a to identify their needs and desires and to
certain style of incentive-motivation of its provide opportunities for their satisfaction.
followers. The attitude of leaders and fo- In order to achieve this, the leader must
llowers evolved increasingly in favor of the have a good knowledge of his followers,
followers. Leaders, thanks to their abilities and apply different methods and techniques
and superior qualities, developed the specif- of motivation. High cohesiveness of the
ic relationships with followers, and thus group or team is necessary because it is the
inspired them in the most difficult moments basis for discovering their motives. A leader
in the business system, and thus strongly who does not know his/her followers well
motivated them to often overcome their enough cannot expect their loyalty and trust.
own possibilities and expectations. Capable It is unjustified to believe that the basic
leaders are very creative with many ideas motives for the work of employees are
and easily create the climate of change and money and other material rewards. In the
climate of business as an important incen- modern business conditions, characterized
tive factor. “Climate is an emotional value by dynamism, turbulence and stochasticity,
reflection of the organization culture. It is the top-level needs, such as the needs for
conditioned by the most common way of achievement, development and self-

actualization, come to the place of material nal control locus. In addition, the leader
rewards as the basic motives for work. must be an excellent connoisseur of psycho-
Here, the key role and significance of the logy, sociology and organizational beha-
leaders are seen, whose task is to convey vior, in order to be able to create a favorable
their vision and optimism to the employees, organizational climate for the work of em-
and convince them that success is possible, ployees and to ensure healthy and human
all in a function of creating greater pros- interpersonal relationships in a long period.
perity for the business system itself. The basis for employee motivation is the
Modern leadership, and especially trans- correct and clear communication between
formational leadership, is linked to the the leaders and followers that must be based
changes, which are the main feature of mo- on mutual respect and trust. The success of
dern business. Under conditions of uncer- the leader is measured by his/her ability to
tainty, resistance to change is inevitable, motivate employees based on proper com-
and the leader is to manage it. In this sense, munication, and it is important that the
motivation and rewarding are the most leader listens to his/her environment and
powerful weapon in the hands of leaders, thus gets the valuable information about
which can be used to eliminate the re- his/her team members.
sistance and create an organizational cli- The growing tendency of the importance
mate that supports the implementation of of human resources to achieve the business,
changes in an organization. economic and overall social development in
The motivation system itself, in addition the knowledge economy points to moti-
to being stimulative, can sometimes be di- vation as the most effective means of achie-
sincentive to the followers. This case refers ving the goals. The role of leadership in
to rewarding the follower. Since the prize is motivating employees in the business sys-
a very sensitive category, it should be in the tem is of immense importance and today is
focus of management of the business sys- one of the main determinants of business
tem in order to achieve a real stimulus success.
effect. In order for a prize (in any form) to
be stimulated, it should be fair and awarded, CONCLUSION
in the same treatment, the same reward for
the same results. The reward as a stimula- Many external and internal factors are
ting part for a better and more efficient per- related to the success of company. The role
formance of jobs is important every-where of leaders in a strategic approach to the
where the organized work is carried out, management is inviolable and essential. The
and especially the place in mining opera- leadership role in a turbulent environment is
tions where the nature of the work is specif- to project an organizational and functional
ic, in view of the working conditions, the entity in the mining companies. In order for
difficulty in carrying out work opera-tions, success to be adequate, the leaders need to
the risk at which works are performed and optimally harmonize their own behavior
etc. with the requirements of the environment
Finally, in order to effectively and effi- from one and the inner environment, with
ciently motivate employees and thus fulfill the emphasis on the needs of the followers,
one of their most important tasks, the leader on the other side. Due to the long transition
must be adequately motivated. Self- period and the general crisis that has ruled
motivation is a feature inherent to the lea- our country for a long period of time, nu-
ders, as it is question of people of the inter merous problems have been noted in both

business and leadership. Leaders in the Ser- G., Psychologists for Managers, Stoner
bian mining companies use the democratic J., Freeman R., Management, 2006.
leadership style to the fully extent. They are [3] Kottler, J. P.: “What Do Leaders
dedicated to work and goals and are very Really Do.” Y Gabarro, J.J. Managing
motivated in their work. The special chara- People and Organization, Harvard
cteristics that the followers rate in the lead- Business School Publications, Boston,
ers are: knowledge, abilities, creativity, cha- 1992, p. 103; and Iles, P. and Prece, D.
risma, honesty and politeness. In the opin- “Developing Leaders, or Developing
ion of the followers, the leaders in this re- Leadership?” The Academy of Chief
gion do not possess a sufficient level of Executives Programs in the North East
emotional intelligence, tolerance and flexi- of England “Leadership, 2006, p. 319.
bility. The style of leadership applied in the [4] Rost, J C. Leadership for the Twenty-
Serbian companies varies depending on the First Century, op. cit. p.149; and Naha-
activity, the size of the business system, the vandi, A. The Art and Science of
emplo-yee structure but the demands of the Leadership Prentice Hall, Upper
followers are absolutely identical. The fo- Saddle River, 2008, p. 10.
llowers require from leader even greater
[5] Rots, J.C. Leadership for the Twenty-
responsibility, open communication, res-
First Century, op. cit, p.17.
pect, respect for employee suggestions and
a friendly attitude. In order to be accepted [6] Stogdill, R. “Personal Factors Asso-
by the followers and at the same time to be ciated with Leadership: A Survey of
their heroes, in addition to the vision, tech- Literature,” The Journal of Physiology,
nical and conceptual knowledge, the leaders 25, 1948, pp. 35-71.
need to give more attention to the followers. [7] Howard, Ann; Wellins, Richard S.
Leaders should be ready to listen to sugges- (2008-2009) Global Leadership Fore-
tions, proposals and followers' ideas, to cast, DDI Center for Applied Beha-
express openly their opinions, praise good vioral Research, USA, p. 7. Text
ideas, argumentatively rejecting a bad idea, available at: http:
interpreting the current state of the envi- //www.ddiworld.com.2011
ronment and explaining the goals of the [8] Burns, J. Transforming Leadership: A
work. Only an open and rightful rela- New Pursuit of Happiness. Grove
tionship with the followers, clear goals and Press, New York, 2003, p.16, 231 (D.
authority, based on knowledge and inte- Goleman 2012).
grity, can make the leaders successful. [9] Goleman Daniel. (2010) Leadership
That Gets Results. Text available at:
REFERENCES http://hbr.org/ 2000/03/leadership-that-
gets-results/ar/2012.
[1] Radovanović V., Savić Lj.: Knowledge
and Innovations - Key Factors of De- [10] Carl Gustav Jung: “The Development
velopment and Employment in Mining of Personality”, Academic Book,
Companies; Mining and Metallurgy Belgrade, 2008 (in Serbian)
Engineering, Bor, No. 1/2014, p. 162. [11] Savić, Lj., Radovanović, V.: Business
DOI: 10.5937 MMEB1401153R, Success Management, Mining and
ISSN 2334-8836. Metallurgy Engineering Journal, No.
[2] Carr D., Hard K., Trahant, W.: Mana- 2/2015, Bor, p. 162 DOI: 10.5937
ging the Change Process T. Zaltman MMEB1502161S, ISSN 2406-1395.

[12] Savić, Lj., Radovanović, V.: Influence gement, number 4/2011. Belgrade, p.
of Management Measures on Profit in 653 UDC: 174.4.026.2 (497.11), ISSN
the Mining Companies, Rudarski ra- 0040-2176
dovi, No. 1/2013. Bor, p. 176 (in [14] Nanus B.: “Visionary Leadership” and
Serbian) DOI: 10.5937/rudrad13011 “The Manager’s Bookshelf”, Fourth
75S, Udk: 330.1; 061.5 (045) = 861 Edition, by Pierce L.J. and J. and J.W.
[13] Radovanović, V.: Business Ethics and Newstron, Collins Cole Publishers,
Corporate Culture, Tehnika - Mana- New York, 1996.

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 622.271:681.325(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704075S
Nikola Stanić*, Saša Stepanović*, Dejan Govedarica**, Aleksandar Doderović*
APPLICATION THE SOFTWARE SOLUTION FOR CALCULATION

THE CAPACITY OF BUCKET WHEEL EXCAVATORS IN
THE COMPLEX CONDITIONS FROM THE ASPECT OF
RESISTANCE TO EXCAVATION
Abstract
This paper describes a software solution for calculation and analyzed the impact resistance to
excavation on technical capacity of a bucket wheel excavator was analyzed at the open pit Gacko.
The analysis was carried out for many characteristic cases with the values of resistance to excava-
tion of 750, 1000, 1250 and 1500 N/cm, and in accordance with the set values in the working envi-
ronment of the open pit Gacko - Central Field.
Keywords: capacity, bucket wheel excavator, resistance to excavation, open pit mining
INTRODUCTION
Excavation of overburden and inter- In addition to these two bucket wheel

seam waste at the open pit Gacko - Cen- excavators, which are currently involved in
tral Field was predicted using a continu- the exploitation process, there is another type
of a bucket wheel excavator ER 1250*16/1.5
ous and discontinuous equipment. Excava-
to be included in the production as an aggre-
tion and loading of overburden by a con- gate reserve within the I BTO system.
tinuous equipment is carried out by bucket Technological parameters of the bucket
wheel excavators type ER 1250*17/1.5 wheel excavator ER 1250*16/1.5 are pre-
and ER 1250*16/1.5. sented in Table 1.
Table 1 Technological parameters of the excavator ER 1250 * 16/1.5

Parameter Value
Excavation height (m) 15
Angle of excavator rotation according to massif ( o) 90
Angle of excavator rotation according to the excavated area (o) 22
Angle of inclination of lateral floor slope (o) 70
Angle of inclination of frontal block slope (o) 70
*
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor - Department Coal Engineering Belgrade,
e-mail: nikola.stanic@irmbor.co.rs, sasa.stepanovic@irmbor.co.rs, aleksandar.doderovic@irmbor.co.rs
**
Mine and Power plant Gacko, dejan.govedarica@ritegacko-rs.ba.

CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS -
CAPACITY THE BUCKET
WHEEL EXCAVATORS
Procedure of calculation the capacity e - horizontal distance the pivot point of

of bucket wheel excavator on overburden rotary boom from vertical axis of excavator
was carried out according to the method- rotation, m
ology presented in the following text. r - radius of operating wheel, m
Border angle of regulation: Time of cut change in a block:
qn s max
cos  rI  tr 
hI  s  k r  Vb max Vt
where: Smax - maximum thickness of cut, m
q - volume of bucket, (0.375 m3) Vt - transport speed of excavator, m/min
n - number of bucket discharging
Number of cuts in a sublevel is deter-
(76.5 min-1)
mined according to the relationship:
hi - sublevel height (3.75 m)
s - maximum thickness of slice, (0.6 m) Z min
nr 
Vbmax - maximum speed of boom s
rotation, (30 m/min) where:
The basic rotation speed of bucket wheel Zmin is the length of block excavation for
carrier: one technological cycle, which is obtained
qn on the basis of limitations until the boom
vboI  strikes on the other, the bottom sublevel:
hi  s  k r
 d  t 
The medium rotation speed of bucket Z min  r   r   ctg g  hI  ctg č
 cos  g 
wheel carrier:  
 uI   sI Changing time of zone:
VbsI 
57.3  sin  rI  sin  sI   uI   rI
 Z  s max 
hi
VboI Vb max tg č
te 
where: Vt
ui - turning angle of rotor boom in a
sublevel towards the inside lateral slope (900 Z - length of block excavation for one
for the I sublevel) technological cycle, m
si - turning angle of rotor boom in a Time of a block changing defined by
sublevel towards the outer lateral slope the formula:
ri - angle regulation in a sublevel H  hi  tg č
The medium time of rotation of wheel t pb  ,
Vt
carrier:
  L  e  r    uI   sI  Time of a block dredging:
t sI 
180  VbsI
o
 

where:
Tb  

 t si  t u  t r  nr  t ei   t pb

L – boom length, m

Volume of a block: overburden with increased parameters of
V  H BZ strength, or an increased resistance to exca-
vation. In the Gacko coal basin in the Cen-
Technical capacity of a bucket wheel
tral field, the terrain complexity is evidently
excavator for defined technological parame-
demonstrated in the engineering-geological
ters is:
terms. The engineering-geological explora-
V tions in 2011 and 2012 should have to es-
Qth   ko
Tb tablish the value of engineering-geological
parameters of isolated homogeneous or
Ko - correction coefficient that takes into quasi - homogeneous zones for the investi-
account the conditions of material excava- gated areas.
tion material; ko = 0.97.
Zoning of a terrain and rock mass
The average technical capacity - Qthpr is classification of the exploration area was
less than the technical capacity obtained on carried out using two categories.
the basis of technological scheme of block
mining for pure technological inability to The first classification was made in ac-
continuously work in a regular block, i.e. cordance with Ćirić S. (1986). According to
due to the loss of capacity in cutting of ex- this categorization, the entire complex of
cavator at the end of floor in a new block. neogene is classified into five categories (K1
Consequently the average technical capacity to K5), each of which is an engineering geo-
of the excavator is: logical unit with the specific physical and
mechanical properties, deformation and
Qthpr  Qth  k g  structural properties expressed to the certain
where: limits.
kg - mass loss in capacity due to the Category K1 includes the surface
amount of interference excavator in the new cover rocks as well as the lowest package
block reduced the capacity of the excavator of series with the values of uniaxial com-
in the regular block. pressive strength less than 1,000 kPa.
( L  l )  k kl Category K2 includes the rocks of the
kg= super positioning packages with the uniaxial
L
compressive strength ranging from 1,000 to
L - floor length, m 2,500 kPa. This category within the explora-
l - length of the zone in which the inter- tion area includes clayey marls and coaly
ference is done in the new block, m and tuffitic marls.
kkl - correction coefficient of technical
capacity Category K3 is composed of two varie-
ty of rocks. The first variety is represented
by gray marls of fine pelitic structure, while
CALCULATION THE CAPACITY OF
the other variety consists of yellow to yel-
BUCKET WHEEL EXCAVATOR
low-gray marls. Varieties are altered in lay-
On the basis of this methodology, a ers of 1.5-3.0 m thickness. Compressive
software solution was formed to calculate strength ranges from 2,500 to 4,500 kPa.
the capacities of the bucket wheel excava- Category K4 includes marly limestones,
tor on excavation the overburden for typi- limestone marls, clayey and coaly marls and
cal cases. multicolored marls. Thickness of the unit
As the most important influencing factor ranges from 20 m to 25 m. Thickness of the
on the capacity of bucket wheel excavator package is quite variable, especially in the
in the overburden excavation in the current parts of basin, where the first main and floor
period is a problem of excavation a part of coal seams have the super positioning ap

proaching. Testing the uniaxial compressive groundwater level and others. Increasing the
strength of these sediments show the value resistance to cutting due to the reduced
of compressive strength between 4,500 and moisture content w can lead to application
6,000 kPa. the bucket wheel excavator in excavation
Category K5 includes the rocks with and can be the cause of accidents and redu-
the uniaxial compressive strength greater cing effect.
than 6,000 psi. Categorization of rock masses within
lithogenetic unit 8NG was carried out ac-
Based on the test results of the cutting
cording to the parameters obtained by la-
force, the propagation speed of longitudinal
boratory tests on the basis of that categori-
waves (vp) and testing parameters of com-
zation. Seams with an increased resistance
pressive strength, the second categorization
to cutting are shown in the engineering geo-
of the rocks masses was done per cutting
logical profiles
and possibilities of application the rotor
Two media occurs in generalization by
excavation technology within the lithostrat-
interpretation a high roofing terrain of the
igraphic member 8NG member, as follows:
main coal seam.
For the rock masses with the cutting re-
sistance up to 500 N/cm, at speed of propa- MEDIUM I (Categories of rocks K1
gation of longitudinal elastic waves and K2), which is not a problem for opera-
Vp = 500 - 1,000 m/s, that is, compressive tion the bucket wheel excavator for over-
strength up to 25 daN/cm2, it is possible to burden excavation.
use a large bucket wheel excavator, the The following physico-mechanical pa-
category K1; rameters of the medium I were obtained by
laboratory tests:
For the rock masses with the cutting re-
sistance up to 500-1000 N/cm, at speed of - natural moisture immediately after
propagation of longitudinal elastic waves opening the sample  = 8.61 – 32.61 (%);
Vp = 1000 - 2000 m/s or compressive - bulk density γ = 16.97-22.96 (KN/m3);
strength of 25-50 daN/cm2, it is possible to - speed of longitudinal el. waves
use a large bucket wheel excavator, the Vp = 1193 -2017 (m/s).
category K2;
MEDIUM II (Category K3)
Of the rock mass from the cutting re-
sistance is 1000-1500 N/cm, at a speed of In lithological terms, the rock masses pf
propagation of longitudinal elastic waves Medium II correspond to marly limestone
Vp = 2000 - 3000 m/s or compressive with the percentage of CaCO3> 85%. These
strength of over 50 to N/cm2, on the border rock masses are followed by stratification
of the possible use of a large bucket wheel and build a larger part of the fieldcovered
excavator, the categor is K3; by explorations. It is represented by a plu-
For the rock masses with the cutting re- rality spaced seams with resistances to cut-
sistance of over 1500 N/cm and propagation ting >1000 N/cm in the conditions of the
speed of longitudinal elastic waves working environment.
Vp3000 m/s, the categories K4 that is These seams occur in the shallow parts
difficult to ripping; of the field with the small thicknesses of
Previous investigations and monitoring 0.30 – 1.45 m. Their inclination towards the
the resistance to cutting KL in a function of bottom of syncline results into increase of
moisturechange w indicated a possible vari- this system thickness, and even in the drill-
ation of resistance when cutting '' in situ '' in hole B-811gm it is 5.95 m, or in the bore-
a function of the seasons, lowering of the hole B-772 7.50 m.

Based on the existing data, calculation marls with increased resistance characteris-
the amount of material categories K3 was tics to the characteristic geological cross-
done. Figure 1 shows the propagation of sections.
950
47a Q
160
942,90
GM - 805
942,28
804 208 INŽENJERSKOGEOLOŠKI PROFIL 47a - 47a' 810 809 180° 47a'
950
941,72 940,60 940,09
Kategorija Litološki clan
po Ciric S. (Skokovic R.)
2,30 1 : 1.000 40,00
939,40
940 2,90 2,90 K1 Q 940

3,80
K3 L2 10
13,70 12,40 Ng
930 13,70 K3 L3 930
PREDISPONIRANA KLIZNA RAVAN K3 L1,2
18,90 9
920 K4 L4 Ng 920
30,70 29,00
31,20 K2 L1,2 g1
910 K5 U 910
K3 Lu 40,00 K2
900 44,45 40,60 900
K5 U
48,45 K2
890 55,80
890
56,60
K2
880 K3 Lu 880
K3
8
870
77,00
Ng 870
79,60
80,55 K5 U 77,90
860 82,20 K3 Lu
K5 U
81,30
860
84,40 83,50
K3 Lu 91,70
850 93,60 K5 U 850
94,50 92,50
840 840
PREDISPONIRANA KLIZNA RAVAN K3 L2,3
7
Ng
2
830 113,00 830
113,85
820 123,60 820

K5 U
126,40 K3 L u
U g2
128,60 K5 U 7
810 128,95 K5 Ng 810
134,50 K3
800 800
140,50
6
790 Ng 790
780 780
770 169,00 770

170,00 5
Ng
760 760
750 750
190,00
4
Ng
740 740
730 730
3
Ng
720 720
710 710
2
700
234,50 Ng 700
1
Ng
690 690
680 K2 256,50
2 680
Figure 1 Propagation of marl with increased resistance to excavation at cross sections 42-42'
Marl (Pu), Marl of categories K3 and K4 (Pk3)
Conducted studies have included the tics for resistance to exploration were tested
western part of the Central field (Figure 2). by the method of cross sections, given in
Marl amounts with increased characteris Table 2.
Figure 2 The position of exploratory wells to the tested parameters and contours digging
resistance in the area of box C (▬▬▬the borders of the Central Fields)

Table 2 Calculation the amount of marl with increased resistance to excavation
Surface area Central area
Volume (m3)
(m2) (m2)
Distance
Profile
(m) Marl with
Pu Pk3 Pu Pk3 Total marl increased resistance
to excavation
41a-41a' 40,208 5,529 43,709 5,810 100 4,370,900 581,000
42-42' 47,210 6,091 57,143 6,299 100 5,714,250 629,850
42a-42a' 67,075 6,506 70,072 6,687 100 7,007,150 668,700
43-43' 73,068 6,868 77,237 7,980 100 7,723,700 798,000
43a-43a' 81,406 9,092 92,313 7,752 100 9,231,250 775,200
44-44' 103,219 6,412 107,508 7,536 100 10,750,750 753,600
44a-44a' 111,796 8,660 93,277 7,858 100 9,327,700 785,750
45a-45a' 74,758 7,055 117,627 4,153 100 11,762,700 415,250
46-46' 160,496 1,250 117,890 3,577 100 11,788,950 357,700
46a-46a' 75,283 5,904 79,963 3,618 100 7,996,250 361,800
47a-47a' 84,642 1,332 90,763 2,897 100 9,076,250 289,700
48a-48a' 96,883 4,462 Sum 94,749,850 6,416,550
Pu - total surface area of marl, Pk3 - surface area of K3 and K4 category
Percentage share of marl with increased resistance to excavation, on the

creased resistance to excavation is about basis of calculation given in Table 3, the
7% of the total masses. In case of consid- share of the entire zone in total amount of
eration the amount of marl in the whole marl in the overburden is about 30%.
zone in which there are marls with in-
Table 3 Calculation the amount of marl in the zone in which marls are present
with increased resistance to excavation
Surface Central area Distance Volume
Profile
area (m2) (m) (m3)
41a-41a' 22,286 22,708 100 2,270,800
42-42' 23,130 22,748 100 2,274,800
42a-42a' 22,366 27,270 100 2,726,950
43-43' 32,173 37,479 100 3,747,900
43a-43a' 42,785 39,304 100 3,930,400
44-44' 35,823 32,064 100 3,206,400
44a-44a' 28,305 28,060 100 2,805,950
45a-45a' 27,814 16,819 100 1,681,900
46-46' 5,824 16,694 100 1,669,400
46a-46a' 27,564 21,116 100 2,111,600
47a-47a' 14,668 15,161 100 1,516,100
48a-48a' 15,654 The forest 27,942,200

Bearing in mind the above presented the form of software solutions and tabulated.
values of resistance the overburden excava- The first four typical cases are analyzed for
tion and the presence of materials with in- the value of resistance to excavation of 750,
creased resistance characteristics, calculation 1000, 1250 and 1500 N/cm', respectively,
the capacity of bucket wheel excavator was and two characteristic cases with operation
done in overburden excavation. The calcula- in the bewlts of material with resistance to
tion was made for more characteristic cases, excavation of 1000, 1250 and 1500 N/cm'
and the results of calculations are given in (Figure 3).
Case I Case II
Case III Case IV
Case V Case VI
Figure 3 Review the characteristic cases for analysis with different values of
resistance to excavation
CASE I
Calculation the capacity for resistance to wheel excavator for the level of 15 m. Figu-
excavation KL = 750 N/cm and height of cut re 5 shows the calculation results of capacity
h = 3 m is given in this case. Figure 4 shows the bucket wheel excavator for the case I;
the technological parameters of the bucket the same is also given in tabular a (Table 4).

Figure 4 Technological parameters
Figure 5 Calculation results
Table 4 Review the results of capacity calculation for the bucket wheel excavator

The same methodology was also per- Summary Table (Table 5), as well as in
formed for other cases, the results of the chart (Figure 6).
calculation the capacities are given in the
Table 5 Calculated values the capacity of bucket wheel excavator for individual cases
Resistance to Evaluation of par-
Technical
Case excavation ticipation in the
capacity (čm3/h)
(N/cm’) total mass (%)
1 885 750 10
2 560 1000 40
3 370 1250 40
4 234 1500 10
The weighted average
value for the first four 484 1125 100
cases
5 427 1000-1250
6 406 1000-1500
The average value
for the analyzed 439
characteristic cases
The annual capacity of continuous sys- With procurement of another one con-
tems with 3,500 effective working hours tinuous system with bucket wheel excava-
and utilization the hour of time of 70% in tor as the basic excavation equipment, the
the complex operating conditions with total amount of overburden that will be
variable resistance to excavation, is per excavated by continuous technology is:
system: Qexyear = 3∙1,500,000 =
Qex = 439 ∙ 3500 ≈ 1,500,000 čm3/year = 4,500,000 čm3/year
Figure 6 Overview the calculated value of the bucket wheel excavator capacity for
individual cases

CONCLUSION
Capacity of excavation equipment at overburden excavation. Also, it is possible

the open pits is in a function of many fac- for the given conditions of the working
tors, and the problem of determining the environment to carry out a series of ana-
excavated capacity has been always re- lyses the capacities with variable techno-
duced to less than or greater generalization logical parameters, and thus to realize the
and negligences, sometimes very important maximum capacities of the concrete condi-
technological parameters of the working tions of the working environment.
environment. Knowing the real capacity of
excavation equipment, implemented in the REFERENCES
complex heterogeneous conditions of
working environment, and the possibility of [1] Main Mining Design of the Open Pit
modeling and testing in terms of the varia- Gacko – Central Field for the Capacity
bles, is the basis in the selection procedure of 2.3∙106 t/a of Run-of-Mine Coal,
and dimensioning the basic excavation Defense Project of the Open Pit on
equipment, design, planning and monito- Water MMI Bor, Bor, 2016 (in
ring the mining dynamics. Serbian)
Overburden at the open pit Gacko - [2] Strategy of Mining - Technological
Central Field, which is designed to exca- Opening, Development, Optimization
vate using the existing bucket wheel exca- and Maintenance the Continuity of
vators is characterized by the complexity of Coal Production with Introduction the
material, and a crucial parameter that limits Coal Enrichment Method of Dry
the capacity of the bucket wheel excavators Separation at the OP GACKO, Book 1,
is resistance to excavation. MMI Bor, Bor, 2015 (in Serbian)
Displayed procedure to analyze the spa- [3] V. Pavlović, D. Ignjatovic, Selective
tial distribution of overburden with in- Open Pit Coal Mining by Continuous
creased resistance characteristics, together Systems, University of Belgrade,
with the software solution to calculate the Faculty of Mining and Geology (in
capacity of bucket wheel excavator, which Serbian)
takes into account the relevant technical [4] A. Lazić A, S. Boskovic, R. Klačar,
and technological parameters of the wor- Selective Coal removal Mining at the
king environment in calculation the tech- Open Pits, Monograph, University of
nical capacity of the bucket wheel, has ena- Belgrade, Faculty of Mining and
bled calculation the real capacities of Geology (2004) (in Serbian)

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 622.7:681.325(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704085J
Ivana Jovanović*, Srđana Magdalinović*, Miomir Mikić*, Igor Miljanović**
POSSIBILITIES OF INTRODUCING AN INTELLIGENT CONTROL

SYSTEM IN THE FLOTATION PLANT VELIKI KRIVELJ***
Abstract
In this paper, an analysis of the possibility of implementing the fuzzy logic and artificial neural net-
work controller in the intelligent control system in the flotation plant Veliki Krivelj was performed.
Functional positioning of controllers was considered through two approaches. According to one
approach, the control of flotation process would be carried out by only one controller, while in the se-
cond case two controllers would exist – one for a rough flotation and scavenging and the other for
cleaning.
Keywords: flotation, fuzzy logic controller, artificial neural network controller
INTRODUCTION
When discussing the process control puting the immense quantities of data [3]. In
from the plant operational performances other words, intelligent control imp-lies the
point of view, a quick, precise and adaptive application of artificial intelligence met-
reaction of the system is an essential de- hods (artificial neural networks, machine
mand. Moreover, the need for development learning, fuzzy logic, evolutionary compu-
and utilization the sophisticated control tation, etc.).
methods is even higher given the lack of Classic control methods require under-
information available, an existing non-linear standing of work with a complete set of data,
environment, as well as rather complex na- including sensor information and values
ture of the system. The requirement for fle- within all process parameters. Unless the all
xibility in production and maximizing the necessary data is completely known, the
recovery of energy and materials further appropriate estimations should always be
increase this need [1, 2]. Possible solution of taken into account. And, if the available
the problem is an intelligent control. information is at all fuzzy, qualitative, in-
Intelligent control is a discipline where complete or unclear, the classic regulators
the control methods are developed so that and control will not provide the satisfactory
they mimic important characteristics of hu- results. Furthermore, the classic control
man intelligence - adaptation and learning, techniques are largely based on the assump-
planning under high uncertainty, and com- tion that the plant operation is linear and
*
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor, Zeleni Bulevar 35, Bor
**
Faculty of Mining and Geology, Djušina 7, Beograd
***
This investigation was conducted under the Project TR 33007 "Implementation of the Modern Tech-
nical, Technological and Ecological Design Solutions in the Existing Production Systems of the
Copper Mine Bor and Copper Mine Majdanpek", funded by the Ministry of Education, Science and
Technological Development of the Republic of Serbia

time - invariable, which does not correspond and unclear information, utilization of simi-
to the majority of real processes [1, 2] lar inference mechanisms, etc. [4, 5].
Unlike the conventional control, the in- Taking the aforementioned into account,
telligent control techniques possess capa- as well as the nature of flotation process, it
bilities that effectively deal with incomplete can be said that the intelligent methods rep-
information concerning the plant and its resent a promising technique in the control
environment, and any unexpected or unfa- of flotation systems.
miliar conditions [2].
Accordingly, the intelligent methods find EXPERIMENTAL AND MODEL
increasing application in engineering prac- DEVELOPMENT
tice through different approaches – real time
process control, diagnostics, modeling and For the purposes of this research, the
process analysis, optimization, etc. Despite fuzzy logic and artificial neural networks,
the diversity in applications, the analogies based flotation models, have been devel-
can be noted at several levels, such as a ca- oped. Their brief systematization is shown in
pability for processing imprecise, uncertain Table 1.
Table 1 Basic data about models

Input variables Output variables
SC Method Cu Collector Collector Final Final

Frother Pulp Copper
content dosage dosage concentrate tailings
dosage pH recovery
in feed (roughing) (scavenging) grade grade
Fuzzy logic
(Mamdani + + + + + + + +
system)
Fuzzy logic
(Takagi-
+ + + + + + + +
Sugeno
system)
Artificial
neural + + + + + +
networks
Artificial
neural + + + + + +
networks
Artificial
neural + + + + + +
networks
Data for models were collected from the (2) rough flotation of copper minerals,
industrial flotation plant "Veliki Krivelj", (3) regrinding of the rougher and sca-
whose technological scheme is shown in Fi- venger concentrate,
gure 1. The ore processing in the plant in- (4) three-stage cleaning of the copper
cludes: concentrate,
(1) two-stage grinding and classification, (5) scavenging after the first cleaning.

The experimental research was per- dels was carried out in Microsoft Excel.
formed in virtual conditions, using the More details on the development and re-
MATLAB programming language. The sults of these models are given in the lite-
validation of the proposed flotation mo- rature [6].
FEED FEED FEED
1ST GRINDING SECTION 2ND GRINDING SECTION 3RD GRINDING SECTION
ROUGH FLOTATION
FINAL TAILINGS
SCAVENGING
1ST CLEANING
2ND CLEANING
REGRINDING
FINAL
3RD CLEANING CONCENTRATE
Figure 1 Technological scheme of the flotation process in “Veliki Krivelj”
INTELLIGENT CONTROL SYSTEM

– PROPOSALS AND DISCUSSION
The purpose of a process modeling is chical control levels, such as: air flow rate,
exactly the possibility of implementing the pulp pH value, pulp level in flotation cells,
developed model into an automatic system redox potential value (Eh), etc.
for that process control. Figures 2 and 3 con- Based on the developed fuzzy logic and
tain suggestions for the simplified control ANN models, it is possible to consider re-
schemes of the flotation plant "Veliki Kri- commendations for the positions of appro-
velj" that would include controllers based on priate control modules within the automatic
the soft computing methods as a form of control system in the “Veliki Krivelj” Flota-
decision support (fuzzy logic controller), or tion Plant.
as an independent control unit (ANN con- The results of the models development
troller). In this case, the classical PID con- allow the functional positioning of the fuzzy
trollers would be used for the lower hierar logic controller in two variants of the control

system architecture (Figure 2). According to lity of fuzzy logic model would be rea-
one variant, the flotation process control lized through the separate fuzzy logic con-
would take place through the control ac- trollers: (1) for rough flotation and sca-
tions of a single fuzzy logic controller, venging on one side, and (2) cleaning on
while in the another variant, the functiona- the other side.
Figure 2 Scheme of intelligent system for the flotation process control based on the fuzzy logic
controller(s)
Figure 3 Scheme of intelligent system for the flotation process control based on the artificial neu-
ral network controller(s)
Architecture of the automatic control practically entire flotation process. (Note:

system allows the elaboration of both vari- Although technologically closely related to
ants. By the first variant, the fuzzy models the flotation, grinding and classification
would perform the high level control of the would be omitted from this decision support

CONCLUSION
system, due to the specificity of fuzzy rules Intelligent control methods are develo-
construction and qualitatively different char- ped in a manner that they emulate characte-
acteristics. In that respect, it would be neces- ristics of the human intelligence such as
sary to employ a new soft computing-based adaptation and learning, planning under high
controller, or some other type of controller.) uncertainty and computing immense quan-
Model performances, in spite of the large tities of data. Therefore, these methods may
fuzzy rule base (753 rules in total), enable be suitable for the flotation system control.
control of the plant operation in described In this paper, the possibility of introducing
manner. However, if the number of moni- an intelligent controller into the industrial
tored parameters significantly increase, a
flotation plant “Veliki Krivelj” was consi-
large expansion of the fuzzy rule base would
dered. It was concluded that the fuzzy logic
be necessary, and in a such case, the model
or ANN - based controllers can be position-
performances would potentially decrease. In
this situation, the justification of the second ned in two ways. In the first case, control of
variant (i.e. employing of two connected, but the entire process would be performed
according to the rule bases and membership through the control actions of a single inte-
functions independent fuzzy controllers) lligent controller. In the second case, there
would be certain. would be two intelligent controllers: for
The rougher flotation and scavenging on rough flotation with scavenging, and clea-
one side, and cleaning on the other side are ning the copper concentrate.
technologically enough different, therefore
introducing the additional control stage REFERENCES
would be economically justified. The flexi-
bility of the fuzzy rule base is such that, with [1] Karray, F., De Silva, C., 2004. Soft
the adjustment of membership functions, Computing and Intelligent Systems
development of the new fuzzy controller Design. Publisher: Pearson Education,
would be facilitated. Accordingly, there 560 p.
would be no significant differences in the [2] Jovanović, I., Miljanović, I., 2015.
way in which both controllers operate. Contemporary advanced control
Similar conclusions are also justified techniques for flotation plants with
when it comes to the artificial neural net- mechanical flotation cells – A review.
work - based controller (Figure 3), but it is Minerals Engineering, Vol. 70, pp.
necessary to examine the performances of
228–249
the controller in a real dynamic system. It is
usual that the ANN - based algorithms and [3] Zhang, P., 2010. Advanced Industrial
models generally show better performances Control Technology. Publisher:
than fuzzy logic - based [6], but this is not Elsevier, 842 p.
the case in all industrial (and test) flotation [4] Leiviskä, K., 2001a. Basics of Soft
systems. The decision on which control var- Computing Methods. In: Industrial
iant is optimal for the given technological Applications of Soft Computing:
process needs to be made "on the spot", tak- Paper, Mineral and Metal Processing
ing into account the specificity of observed Industries (Edited by K. Leiviskä),
system. Publisher: Physica-Verlag, pp. 3–22

[5] Leiviskä, K., Soft Computing Applica- [6] Jovanović, I., Model inteligentnog
tions in Mineral and Metal Industries. sistema adaptivnog upravljanja proce-
In: Industrial Applications of Soft som prerade rude. PhD Thesis, Faculty
Computing: Paper, Mineral and Metal of Mining And Geology, 2016, 217 p.
Processing Industries (Edited by K. In Serbian
Leiviskä), Publisher: Physica-Verlag,
2001b pp. 23–34

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 669…1:“04/14“(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704091S
Dragana Spasić-Djurić*, Radiša Đurić**, Dejan Crnčević***
METALLURGY IN THE MEDIEVAL BRANICEVO****
Abstract
During the archeological researches of the medieval Branicevo at the site Mali Grad-Todica crkva
in the Kostolac village, a significant amount of iron slag was discovered. The archeological context is
indicative but so far, it does not provide the precise defining the spatial function with archeological and
metallurgy findings. For that purpose, the physical and chemical analyses of the archeometal samples
were carried out. The results of the investigation show the primary metallurgical activity in Branicevo in
the second half of the XI and XII century, while the presence of wüstite (FeO), fayalite and magnetite in
most of samples indicates the iron melting. Evidences of the primary iron metallurgy show the economic
significance of Braničevo in a new light and the structural analyzes of slag are important for defining
the casting process and degree of the iron metallurgy development during the Byzantine government in
Braničevo.
Keywords: Branicevo, iron, smelting, metallurgy, slag
INTRODUCTION
The medieval town of Braničevo was Mali Grad in the first half of the XX centu-
developed on the territory of the Roman ry was re-named into the ’Todića crkva’,
Viminacium, on the banks of the river and in the literature is reffered to as Mali
Mlava. The two fortified structures of the Grad – Todića crkva)
urban core of Braničevo were located on As a natural fortification system that
the Mali and Veliki Grad, the natural units protected and controlled the Danube pa-
at the end of the Sopot Greda above the ssage, Mali Grad-Todića crkva was of
village Kostolac, while the spacious su- great importance since the Eneolithic, up
burb spread to their base [1]. (Location to the modern age (Fig. 1).
*
National Museum of Pozarevac, Voje Dulica 10, Pozarevac, Republic of Serbia,
e-mail: antinoj@mts.rs
**
EPS, branch ’TE-KO Kostolac’ Nikole Tesle 5-7, 12208 Kostolac, e–mail: radisa.djuric@te-ko.rs
***
History Institute, Kneza Mihaila 36/II, Belgrade, Republic of Serbia,
e-mail: d.crnrcevic@yahoo.com
****
This paper represents the result of multidisciplinary research on the projects ‘Archeological Re-
search of the Medieval Town of Braničevo’, supported by the National Museum Pozarevac, and
backed up by the City of Pozarevac (lead by the museum advisor, archaeologist Dragana Spasić-
Đurić) and the project of the Ministry of Education and Science of the Republic of Serbia. Ethno-
genesis of the Serbs during the Middle Ages (until c.1250): a comparative analysis of the historic-
cultural heritage, genetic material and artefacts of material culture from the aspect of analytical
chemistry (Reg.No. III 47025)

Fig. 1 Site Mali Grad-Todića crkva, explored zone with the archeometallurgical findings
The new archeological researches at this archeological context consisting of furnaces,

locality, begun in 2007, show the new aspect fireplaces and waste burial pits. Generally,
of political and economic significance of all collected samples have light or dark
Braničevo during the Byzantine Gove- brown color; some are metallic and heavy,
rnment in the XI and XII century. On the while the other group has a glassy gloss,
systematically investigated area of about porous structure and light weight. Precise
480 m2, primarily on the western perip- functional definition of the explored area is
hery of the site, three cultural horizons were prevented by large devastations, since except
discovered: from the Hallstatt, Late La Tène for the two preserved furnaces and Burial
period – early Roman and medieval times. pits, other objects have not been discovered
The attention is focused on the earliest, me- in situ. The discovery of slag from the mold
dieval horizon and the period of strong eco- (the so-called ‘casting cake’) in the Burial
nomic and political bloom under the rule of pit XXVII is particularly significant, which
the Komnenos dynasty, at the end of the XI was preliminarily dated using money from
and during the XII century [2]. the last decades of the XI and the first dec-
ades of the XII century (Fig. 2).
ARCHEOLOGICAL CONTEXT A large concentration of archaeometal-
lurgical findings was recorded in the squares
The results of researches from 2014 to AD24 and AE24 in the zone of two fully
2017 are of a big importance. On the area of preserved furnaces and object-House 8,
approximately 20x20 m, in the squares whose devastated fireplace was discovered
AC23, AC24, AD23- AD25, AE23, AE24 in parts outside the original context. It is
and AF24, a significant amount of scrum significant that the fractions of the fireplace,
and slag (Fig.1) was discovered. Archeo- due to high temperatures, were merged with
metal samples were found in the indicative larger pieces of slag.

Fig. 2 Slag from a mold, the Burial pit XXVII
According to the dimensions and con- concentration of slag, as well as the char-
struction (air vents, so-called "blowers" and acter of the activities that took place at
larger rectangular chimney at the top), in a this site during the XI and XII century, the
functional aspect, the furnace 16 triggers physical and chemical analyses were car-
quite a confusion. Its construction elements ried out of individual samples from the
indicate that it was used to develop high Braničevo research in 2015 and 2016, and
temperature, which further indicates a spe- the results of these analyses represent the
cial purpose [3, 4]. Unfortunately, the fur- focus of this paper
nace was discovered completely cleaned, The selected archeometal samples were
and after having its bottom part renovated, it subjected to the chemical and scanning elec-
was not put into operation again due to the tron microscopy at the Faculty of Mechani-
unknown reasons. Therefore, at this stage of cal Engineering in Belgrade (Tables 1, 2,
research, there is no archaeological evidence Figures 3 (a-f), 4 (a-g), as well as the X-ray
to indicate its metallurgical function. The diffraction analysis in the Mining and Metal-
specific archaeological context and certain lurgy Institute in Bor (Figures5-10, Tables
typological similarities with some casting 3-8).
furnaces from the early Laten and the Late
La Tène period from Bavaria do not exclude
this assumption completely. TEST RESULTS
PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL Chemical analysis

ANALYSES
The results of samples subjected to the
For the purpose of determining and de- chemical analysis are shown in Tables 1
fining the function of space with higher and 2.

Table 1 Results of the chemical analysis of the archeometal samples from
the site Mali Grad-Todića crkva
Name Class Date Time Duration
TCI Alloy LE FP 30/11/2016 11:54:44 10.5 s
Fe (%) Si (%) P (%) Al (%) Zr (%) As (%) Ti (%) Pd (%)
Sample 1
54.90 31.29 7.62 5.95 0.19 0.05 / /
Deviation (+/-) 0.723 0.803 0.307 1.238 0.028 0.013 / /
Rating
TCI Alloy LE FP 30/11/2016 11:53:14 10.5 s
Sample 2
56.84 28.43 5.96 7.37 0.28 / 0.84 0.28
Deviation (+/-) 0.735 1.005 0.448 1.265 0.028 0.209 0.086
Rating
TCI Alloy LE FP 30/11/2016 11:53:51 10.5 s
Sample 3
54.60 30.13 7.33 7.71 0.23 / / /
Deviation (+/-) 0.739 0.822 0.317 1.303 0.029 / / /
Rating
Table 2 Results of the chemical analysis of the archeometal samples from
the site Mali Grad-Todića crkva
TCI Alloy LE FP 30/11/2016 11:54:09 2.5 s
Sample-4 element Fe (%) Mn (%) Sb (%) Sn (%) / / / /
value 96.27 2.43 0.81 0.49 / / / /
deviation
1.301 0.238 0.140 0.147 / / / /
(+/-)
1.0257 1.2842
Rating / / / / / /
(0.00) (0.53)
TCI Alloy LE FP 30/11/2016 11:54:45 10.5 s
element Fe (%) Si (%) Mn (%) Sb (%) Pb (%) / / /
Sample-5 value 92.07 6.34 0.95 0.50 0.14 / / /
deviation
0.886 0.527 0.137 0.137 0.036 / / /
(+/-)
1.2542 1.0473
Rating / / / / / /
(3.05) (3.45)
TCI Alloy LE FP 30/11/2016 11:55:39 10.5 s
element Fe (%) Si (%) Mn (%) P (%) S (%) Zn (%) Zr (%)
value 79.60 16.65 2.11 1.18 0.30 0.10 0.07
Sample-6
deviation
0.777 0.644 0.169 0.201 0.084 0.029 0.022
(+/-)
Rating 1.2542 (3.90)

Scanning electron microscopy
Scanning electron microscopy was ded state. A part of the sample, broken
done on two samples that were, after into fragments, was turned into dust for
preparation, photographed by the optical the purpose of X-ray analysis in order to
microscope in their non-eroded and ero- identify the phases (Figures 3, 4).
a b
c d
Non-eroded microstructure
e f
Eroded microstructure (nital)
Fig. 3 (a-f) Structure of the sample No.5 from the site Mali Grad – Todića crkva
The sample has a very heterogeneous consolidated with an iron metal base that
and highly porous microstructure consisting occurs mainly in a dendritic form. The high-
of a large amount of slag in which the metal content of SiO2 was identified by the X-ray
dendrites (wüstite) are separated. The slag is analysis.

a b
c
Non-eroded microstructure
d e
f g
Eroded microstructure (nital)
Fig. 4 (a-g) Structure of the sample No.6 from the site Mali Grad – Todića crkva

X-ray diffraction tests
The sample has a very heterogeneous The results of X-ray diffraction tests of
and highly porous microstructure. A high archaeometallurgical samples from the site
concentration of FeO was identified by the Mali Grad – Todića crkva are shown in the
X-ray analysis. The structure of samples X-ray diffractograms in Figures 5-10, and
indicates that it is a slag created in the identification of the mineral (phase) compo-
process of obtaining iron from the ore sition of the tested samples is shown below
iron. the diffractograms in Tables 3 to 8.
Fig. 5 Diffractogram of the sample No.1 from the slag AD25
Table 3 Results of the X-ray diffraction sof the sample No.1 from the slag AD25
Identified minerals Chemical formula

Quartz SiO2
Magnetite Fe3O4
Getite FeO(OH)
Biotite K(Mg,Fe)3AlSiO10(F,OH)2
Jarosite KFe(OH)6(SO4)2
Wüstite FeO

Table 4 Results of the X-ray diffraction analysis of the sample No. 2 from the slag AD 25
Leucite K(AlSi2O6)
Quartz SiO2
Accermanite Ca2MgSi2O7
Diopside MgCaSi2O6
Table 5 Results of the X-ray diffraction analysis of the sample No. 3 from the slag AD25
Quartz SiO2
Leucite K(AlSi2O6)
Fayalite Fe2SiO4
Diopside MgCaSi2O6
Magnetite Fe3O4

Fig. 8 Diffractogram of the sample No.1 from the slag AE24
Table 6 Results of the X-ray diffraction analyzis of the sample No.1 from the slag AE24
Fayalite Fe2SiO4
Wüstite FeO
Quartz SiO2
Diopside MgCaSi2O6
Leucite K(AlSi2O6)
Fig. 9 Diffractogram of the sample No.2 from the slag AE24

Table 7 Results of the X-ray diffraction analysis of the sample No. 2 from the slag AE24
Quartz SiO2
Diopside MgCaSi2O6
Fayalite Fe2SiO4
Leucite K(AlSi2O6)
Magnetite Fe3O4

Fig. 10 Diffractogram of the sample from the Burial pit XXIV
Table 8 Results of the X-ray diffraction analysis of the sample from the Burial pit XXIV
Fayalite Fe2SiO4
Quartz SiO2
Wüstite FeO
Magnetite Fe3O4
DISCUSSION OF THE RESULTS
The testing results of archaeometa- FeO and magnetite, Fe3O4 and they indicate
llurgical samples from the site Mali Grad- that the melting process, which incorporated
Todića crkva by the chemical analysis, X- these components into slag, did not allow
ray diffraction testing and scanning electron complete reduction of ore (Fe3O4) into metal
microscopy, indicate the presence of wüstite, (Fe). In other words, the iron obtained from
fayalite, magnetite and biotite in most of the the ore (i.e. the degree of metal utilization),
samples. Analyzed samples are character- in qualitative terms, was not at a high level.
rized by a greater presence of iron slag, The reason for this was probably the lower
which means the production of iron with reduction temperature, whereby all iron oxi-
limited capacities, probably in so-called des (Fe3O4, FeO) could not be reduced to the
ovens (so-called "Grne"). Based on the X- metal (Fe).
ray diffraction analysis of the sample from The presence of diphaside MgCaSi2O6
Table 3 (Fig. 5), it can be concluded that the indicates that, as a solvent for lowering the
sediment of magnetite ore was used as the SiO2 melting point, a smaller amount of
starting material for iron production, which solvent in the form of dolomite CaCO3 x
in itself, due to the influence of time and MgCO3 was most probably used.
conditions in the environment, contained the 2CaO x SiO2, whose production requires
iron transformations such as: goethite, bio- a relatively higher temperature of iron reduc-
tite, jarosite and wüstite. tion, is missed in a slag that according to the
The other samples relate to the slag, and obtained results, was the demerit of a smel-
the presence of fayalite Fe2SiO4, wüstite, ting process in Branicevo.

In the primary phase, iron was poured in- impurities, i.e. separating the iron from the
to the molds. After cooling, the content slag, proceeded mechanically [3,7,8].
(metal and slag) was removed from the
mold. The metal was further used, and a har- CONCLUSION
dened slag, which was above metal, would
retain the shape of the mold and was left The results of physical and chemical
aside. This is indicated by discovery of the analyses of archeometallurgical findings of
slag in the shape of a mold from the Burial research at the site Mali Grad-Todića crkva,
pit XXVII (Fig. 2). obtained by the chemical analysis methods,
Structures of archaeometallurgical samp- scanning electron microscopy and X-ray
les from the site Mali Grad-Todića crkva, diffraction tests, indicate that during the XI
unambiguously indicate the primary iron and XII century there was a smelting activity
metallurgy. related to the iron metallurgy in Branicevo.
According to the qualitative characte- This is evident from the structures of the
ristics of the analyzed samples, the casting samples with the presence of wüstite, faya-
process of obtaining iron from the ore in lite and magnetite. The sediment of magne-
Branicevo was not at a high technological tite ore was identified as the starting material
level, which is a general feature of the cast- for obtaining iron.
ing technologies at the other medieval sites. The analytical methods confirmed the
The main problem for the smelters in those archeological assumptions based on a specif-
times during the reduction process was the ic archaeological context with some archae-
inability to achieve high temperatures ometallurgical elements and installa-tions
[3,6,7]. due to devastation, were not enough to make
From the perspective of today's techno-
precise conclusions about the function of the
logical processing, in the primary metallur-
explored space.
gical processing, the iron needs to be heated
Findings of slag are frequent occurrences
to over 1535°C, in order to convert into a
liquid state of honey density, which as such in archaeological sites. They are usually the
lies at the bottom of the casting furnace, result of a secondary reduction, i.e. refining
which would then collapse, in order to reach process, or successive heating and coating of
the arched iron at the bottom. Archaeolo- crude iron. As mentioned, this is preceded
gical discoveries of casting furnaces and by the phase of casting by the primary met-
other metallurgical installations from the allurgy process, where the casting pro-cess
ancient and medieval period indicate that in of the ore took place outside the residential
the process of iron dissociation, it was not territory [5,9].
possible to achieve such a high temperature Whether the smelting process of limited
[5,6]. capacities in the medieval Branicevo was
The obtained iron, depending on the re- carried out within the fortification, i.e. area
duction process, was, to a greater or lesser marked in Fig. 1 or in its immediate vicinity,
extent, contaminated with slag (fuel resi- perhaps below the during the XI and XII
dues, solvent), which was impossible to century, on the bank of the Dunavac, re-
completely separate during the primary mains a dilemma that can be resolved only
melting. The iron thus obtained (the so- by the archaeological research and discovery
called porous iron) was then subjected to the of a melting furnace in situ.
secondary metallurgical processing. The On the other hand, the results show the
secondary reduction involves re-heating and significance of analysis of slag for defining
forging, whereby the process of removing the medieval smelting technologies and the

level of knowledge of the smelters in those [3] A. Lucas, ‘Furnace’, Encyclopedia of
times, since the structural analysis of slag Technology and Invention, Facts on
elements provide the important data on the File, New York (2011), 1-18.
final stage of smelting process [6,7,8]. [4] M. Karbowniczek, Metallurgical Pro-
The results received from a limited cess in Ancient Shaft Furnace-Theore-
number of samples indicate the ‘underdeve- tical Considerations, MJoM META-
loped’ technology and inability to achieve LURGIJA - Journal of Meta-llurgy,
the required temperature in the process of Vol. 12, No- 2-3 (2006), Association
thermal dissociation and iron extraction. of Metallurgical Engineers of Serbia,
However, the final conclusions about the 145-154.
character of the primary metallurgical pro- [5] R. Pleiner, Iron in Archaeology, the
cess in Branicevo during the XI and XII European Bloomery Smelters, Praha
century will be formed after analyzing a 2000, Archeologický Ústav Avčr, 36-
larger number of samples. 54; 57-82; 131-139; 141-194; 268-284.
At the present level of research the site [6] D. Živković, S. Janjić, V. Trujić, M.
Mali Grad-Todića crkva, the presented re- Gavrilovski, V. Rajković, R. Ćurčić,
sults present the unambiguous proof of the D. Krajinovič, Characterization of
primary iron metallurgy in Braničevo during Archaeometallurgical Findings from
the Byzantine Government and they repre- Late Antique and Early Medieval Sites
sent a significant contribution to the know- in Banat and Bačka, Gazzete of the
ledge of medieval mining in Serbia during Archaeologist of Serbia 15-16, Bel-
the XI and XII century. grade (1999-2000), 355-368 (in
Also, the analysis of archaeometallurical Serbian)
samples from the site Mali grad-Todića [7] K. Bielenin, I. Suliga, The Ancient
crkva affirms the necessity of interdisci- Slag-pit Furnace and the reduction
plinary research in order to solve numerous Process in the light of a New Archeo-
issues of ore origin, methods of supply, logical Concept and metallurgical
melting site location, metallurgical processes Research, Metallurgy and Foundry
and defining the degree of iron metallurgy Engineering MaFE, Vol. 34 (2008),
development in the medieval period. No.1, AGH University of Science and
Technology, Kraków,53-78.
REFERENCES
[8] Ľ. Mihok, Beginnings of Iron Smelting
[1] M. Popović, Ivanišević, The City of in the Central Carpathians Region,
Branicevo in the Middle Ages, Anti- MJoM Metalurgija, Journal of Meta-
quarian (n.s.), 39 (1988), Belgrade, llurgy, Vol. 12. No 2-3 (2006),
Institute of Archaeology, 125–179 (in Association of Metallurgical Engineers
Serbian) of Serbia, 173-184.
[2] D. Spasić-Djurić, A Note on New [9] A. Pravidur, Contribution to the
Archeological Explorations in Byzan- Knowledge of Metallurgical Centers of
tine Braničevo, in: Byzantine Heritage the Iron-Age Settlements of Central
and Serbian Art I, Processes of Byzan- Bosnia in the Light of a New Research
tinisation and Serbian Archaeology, - An Example of Autochthonous and
ed. V. Bikić, Belgrade: The Serbian Primary Metallurgy of Iron in the
National Committee of Byzan-tine Settlement, Histria Antiqua, 20 (2011),
Studies, P. E. Službeni Glasnik, Insti- Zagreb, Institute of Social Sciences Ivo
tute for Byzantine Studies and Serbian Pilar, Center for Archeological
Academy of Sciences and Arts (2016), Research: 155-167 (in Croatian)
109–117.

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 622.765.061(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704103S
Dragiša Stanujkić*, Dragan Milanović**, Srdjana Magdalinović**, Ivana Jovanović**
AN APPROACH TO THE EVALUATION OF

FROTH FLOTATION REAGENTS BASED ON
THE USE OF THE SWARA AND WS-PLP METHODS***
Abstract
The selection of the most suitable flotation reagents is very important in the froth flotation process
because the recovery of valuable minerals largely depends on the reagent regime. On the other hand,
the particular characteristics of the ore excavated from different mine sites have their own specificity
that should be taken into account in choosing the most appropriate reagents. Therefore, a proposal for
forming a framework for selecting the most suitable flotation reagents is discussed in this paper. The
usability and efficiency of the proposed approach are considered on the conducted empirical example.
Keywords: reagents; froth flotation; MCDM; SWARA; WS-PLP
1 INTRODUCTION
Froth flotation is an industrial process cantly affect the separation of useful mine-
widely used in the mineral processing for rals. Therefore, the selection of appropriate
selective separation the finely liberated hy- reagents is not easy to do.
drophobic minerals. There are many, mutually conflicting,
The froth flotation separation process is criteria that could have an impact on the
based on attaching the very fine particles of selection of the most adequate flotation rea-
valuable minerals to the surface of air bub- gent, which is indicative of the fact that se-
bles. The efficiency of separation and utili- lection of the most adequate floatation rea-
zation the valuable minerals largely depends gent could be considered as a multiple crite-
on the hydrophobic character of mineral ria decision - making (MCDM) problem.
surfaces. Therefore, the flotation reagents Therefore, this paper is organized as fo-
have a substantial impact on utilization the llows: In Section 2, the criteria relevant for
valuable minerals, as well as the efficiency selection the most appropriate flotation rea-
of flotation process. gents are considered. After that, in Sections
There are a number of characteristics of 3 and 4, the two characteristic MCDM met-
the floated ore particles that could signifi- hods intended for determining the weights of
i
*
Faculty of Management in Zajecar, John Naisbitt University Belgrade, Park Suma Kraljevica bb,
19000 Zajecar, Serbia
**
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor, Zeleni bulevar 35, 19210 Bor, Serbia
***
This paper is a partial result of the Project TR33023 financed by the Ministry of Education, Science
and Technological Development of theRepublic of Serbia. The constructive comments of the referees
are gratefully acknowledged

3 THE SWARA METHOD
evaluation criteria and selecting the most The SWARA method was proposed by
appropriate alternative, respectively, are Kersuliene et al. (2010). The SWARA
presented. Based on the previous considera- method could be used to determine the
tions, a multiple criteria group decision- weights of criteria and also to solve the
making approach is proposed in Section 5, complex multiple criteria decision-making
whereas the usability and efficiency of the problems. In addition to this, compared to
same are checked in Section 6. Finally, the the well-known AHP method, the SWARA
Conclusions are given at the end of the method requires a significantly lower num-
manuscript. ber of pairwise comparisons.
Based on Kersuliene et al. (2010) and
2 CRITERIA RELEVANT FOR Stanujkic et al. (2015), the computational
SELECTION THE MOST procedure of the ordinary SWARA method
RELEVANT FROTH FLOTATION can be precisely presented applying the fol-
REAGENTS lowing steps:
Step 1: Determination of a set of relevant
There are a number of technological pa-
evaluation criteria and sort them in descen-
rameters depending on the flotation pulp
ding order, based on their expected signifi-
conditions that indicate the successfulness of
cances.
the flotation process (Magdalinovic, 2017;
Langa et al., 2014; Lotter and Bradshaw, Step 2: Starting from the second crite-
2010; Bulatovic, 2007). In the cases of cop- rion, determination the relative importance sj
per sulfide ore flotation, the following pa- of the criterion j in relation to the previous
rameters could be stated as some of the most (j-1) criterion, and do so for each particular
significant: criterion.
- recovery of Cu in concentrate, Step 3: Determination the coefficient kj
- concentrate grade, as follows:
- tailings grade, and
 1 j 1
- economic efficiency. kj   . (1)
From the MCDM perspective, these cri- s j  1 j 1
teria could not be easily characterized as the
Step 4: Determination the recalculated
beneficial (revenue) and non-beneficial
weight qj as follows:
(cost) criteria. The main reason for this is the
fact that the above-mentioned evaluation  1 j 1
criteria are not mutually independent, which 
q j   q j 1
can especially be observed in a relationship j 1. (2)
 kj
between recovery and economic efficiency, 
i.e. changes in the recovery of valuable mi-
Step 5: Determination the relative
nerals, and throughput of flotation cells can
weights of evaluation criteria as follows:
significantly affect changes in the economic
effects of flotation through a very complex qj
relationship. wj  n
, (3)
However, this problem can successfully  qk
k 1
be overcome using the WS-PLP method,
which will be explained in the remaining where wj denotes the relative weight of the
part of this manuscript. criterion j.

4 THE WS-PLP METHOD
The WS-PLP method was proposed by where Si denotes the overall performance
Stanujkic and Zavadskas (2015) as an exten- rating of the alternative i.
sion of the well-known Weighted-Sum Step 5: Calculation the compensation
Method. Based on Vujic et al. (2016), the coefficient for the all alternatives with
computational procedure of the WS PLP
Si  0 , as follows:
method for an MCDM problem containing
m alternatives and n criteria could be preci   dimax  (1   ) Si* , (9)
cisely expressed as follows:
with:
Step 1: Evaluatation the alternatives in
relation to the selected set of criteria. d i max  max rij w j ; rij  0 , (10)
Step 2: Defining the preferred perfor- i
mance ratings for each criterion. At this step,

 S i
the decision - maker sets the preferred per- Si  , and (11)
formance ratings for the evaluation criteria, ni
thus forming the virtual alternative
A0  {x01, x02 ,...,x0n } . If the decision - * Si
Si  , (12)
maker does not have preferences for any ni*
criterion, it should be determined as follows:
where: d imax denotes the maximum weigh-
max xij | j  max ted normalized distance of the alternative i to
x0 j   i , (4)
min xij | j  min the preferred performance ratings of the all
i
criteria, so that rij  0 ; Si* denotes the ave-
where x0 j denotes the preferred perfor- rage performance ratings achieved on the
mance rating of the criterion j. basis of the criteria, so that rij  0 ; ni de-
Step 3: Construction a normalized deci- notes the number of criteria of the alternative
sion matrix. The normalized performance
i, so that rij  0 ;  is coefficient,   [0.1]
ratings should be calculated as follows:
and is usually set at 0.5.
xij  x0 j
rij  , (5) Step 6: Calculation the adjusted perfor-
x j  x j
mance rating for the all alternatives S ' with
where: Si  0 , as follows:
max xij j  max Si S i   ci , (13)

x j  i , and (6)
 min xij j  min where the decision-maker can reduce, or
i even eliminate, the impact of compensa-
tion coefficient varying the values of the
min xij j  max coefficient .

x j   i . (7)
max xij j  min Step 7: Ranking the alternatives and se-
i
lect the most efficient one. The considered
Step 4: Calculation the overall perfor- alternatives are ranked by ascending S i .
mance rating for each alternative, as follows: The usage of the compensation coeffi-
n cient is not mandatory in the WS PLP met-
Si   w j r ij , (8) hod and can be omitted setting the value of
j 1 coefficient  to zero.

5 A FRAMEWORK BASED ON THE
USE OF THE SWARA AND THE
WS-PLP METHODS
The framework based on the SWARA considered approach. The selection of the
and the WS-PLP methods can accurately most adequate froth flotation reagents is
be expressed through the following phases considered on the ore excavated from the
and the corresponding steps: Veliki Krivelj Open Pit.
A team of experts was formed with the
Phase I: Formation a team of experts aim of proposing the most appropriate
who will carry out the evaluation, deter- reagent from the following:
mine the set of available alternatives and - A1 - Potassium ethyl xanthate (PEX),
form the set of the evaluation criteria. - A2 - TC 1000,
Phase II: Determining the relevance - A3 - Aero MX 5126, and
and weights of evaluation criteria. In the - A4 - S 10887.
proposed approach, the SWARA method For the purpose of making an evaluation
is proposed for determining the weights of of the above-mentioned alternatives, the
evaluation criteria. team of experts has chosen the following
Phase III: Evaluation the alternatives. criteria:
The evaluation of alternatives is based on - C1 - recovery of Cu in rougher concen-
the use of the WS-PLP approach. The per- trate, %
formances of alternatives in relation to the - C2 - content of Cu in rougher concen-
chosen evaluation criteria should be between trate, %
1 and 5, where any real number, located at - C3 - economic efficiency
the specified interval, could be used in order - C4 - specific surface area of rougher
to make an evaluation more precisely. concentrate, cm2/g
Phase IV: Selection the most appro- It should be noted that the criteria were
priate alternative. As a result of conducting considered under the following conditions:
the previous phase, the K ranking orders of (1) grinding fineness 60% -75μm and (2)
alternatives are obtained. pulp pH 10.
Based on the theory of ordinal domi- After that, the team of three experts has
nance, the alternative appearing in the first determined the weights of evaluation criteria
position for the largest number of times is applying the proposed approach, i.e. using
potentially the most appropriate one. How- Eqs (1)-(3). The values of relative impor-
ever, in some cases, when the dominant al- tance sj for the selected criteria are shown in
ternative is not so easy to determine, the Table 1.
evaluation process should be sent back and In this evaluation, the values of sj were
the experts should reconsider its rating. determined on the basis of consensus of
three experts.
6 AN EMPIRICAL ILLUSTRATION In the next phase, the experts made an
evaluation of the preselected flotation rea-
In this section, an example of selection gents in relation to the set of evaluation cri-
the most adequate froth flotation reagents teria. The obtained ratings, as well as the
is considered so as to briefly demonstrate weights and preferred ratings obtained from
the efficiency and usability of the above- three experts are given in Tables 2, 3 and 4.

Table 1 The relative importance and weights of criteria
Criteria sj kj qj wj
C1 1 1 0.49
C2 0.90 1.90 0.53 0.26
C3 0.70 1.70 0.31 0.15
C4 0.50 1.50 0.21 0.10
2.04 1.00
Table 2 The ratings, weighting and preferred ratings obtained

from the first of three experts
Criteria C1 C2 C3 C4
wj 0.49 0.26 0.15 0.10
A* 4.70 4.00 4.50 5.00
A1 3.10 4.00 3.00 2.00
A2 3.90 3.00 3.20 5.00
A3 4.70 2.50 4.50 3.00
A4 4.20 3.50 3.30 4.00

from the second of three experts
wj 0.49 0.26 0.15 0.10
A* 5.00 3.50 4.50 4.80
A1 2.90 3.50 2.50 2.60
A2 3.70 2.50 3.50 4.80
A3 5.00 2.00 4.50 3.40
A4 4.30 3.30 4.00 4.30

from the third of three experts
wj 0.49 0.26 0.15 0.10
A* 4.80 3.70 4.50 4.80
A1 3.00 3.70 2.70 2.50
A2 3.90 2.70 3.10 4.80
A3 4.80 2.50 4.50 3.10
A4 4.20 3.50 3.30 4.20

The normalized decision matrix and from the first of three experts are account-
weighted normalized decision matrix for- ted in Tables 5 and 6.
med on the basis of responses obtained
Table 5 The normalized decision matrix based on responses obtained
from the first of three experts
A1 -0.20 -1.05 -1.27 0.00
A2 -0.40 -0.53 -0.91 -0.50
A3 -0.76 -1.53 -0.36 -1.00
A4 -1.20 -0.53 -1.36 -0.50
A5 -0.20 -1.05 -1.27 0.00
Table 6 The weighted normalized decision matrix based on responses
obtained from the first of three experts
A1 -0.10 -0.28 -0.20 0.00
A2 -0.19 -0.14 -0.14 -0.04
A3 -0.37 -0.41 -0.06 -0.08
A4 -0.58 -0.14 -0.22 -0.04
A5 -0.10 -0.28 -0.20 0.00
In the same manner, the normalized ratings and ranking orders obtained on the
decision matrix and weighted normalized basis of the responses obtained from the
decision matrix for the second and third three experts are shown in Tables 7, 8, 9
experts were calculated. The performance and 10.
Table 7 The ratings and ranking orders obtained on the basis
of responses of the first of three experts
Si Rank
A1 -0.74 4
A2 -0.55 3
A3 -0.33 1
A4 -0.39 2
of responses of the second of three experts
Si Rank
A1 -0.74 4
A2 -0.55 3
A3 -0.32 2
A4 -0.26 1

of responses of the third of three experts
Si Rank
A1 -0.74 4
A2 -0.58 3
A3 -0.33 1
A4 -0.34 2
Table 10 The ranks obtained from three experts
Expert 1 Expert 2 Expert 3

A1 4 4 4
A2 3 3 3
A3 1 2 1
A4 2 1 2
REFERENCES
As can be seen from Table 10, the alter- [1] Bulatovic, S. M. (2007). Handbook of
native labeled as A3 ranks the first twice and, Flotation Reagents: Chemistry, Theory
based on the theory of dominance, it is evi- and Practice: Volume 1: Flotation of
dent that the alternative A3 is the most ap- Sulfide Ores. Elsevier.
propriate alternative.
[2] Keršuliene, V., Zavadskas, E. K., &
In other words, the Aero MX 5126 rea-
Turskis, Z. (2010). Selection of Ratio-
gent was chosen as the most suitable for the
nal Dispute Resolution Method by
ore excavated from the Veliki Krivelj Open
Pit. Applying New Step‐ Wise Weight
Assessment Ratio Analysis (SWARA).
CONCLUSIONS Journal of Business Economics and
Management, 11(2), 243-258.
In this article, a framework for selecting [3] Langa, N. T. N., Adeleke, A. A.,
the most adequate froth flotation reagent is Mendonidis, P., & Thubakgale, C. K.
proposed. (2014). Evaluation of Sodium Isobutyl
The usability and efficiency of the pro- Xanthate as a Collector in the Froth
posed framework are considered in the real Flotation of a Carbonatic Copper Ore.
case and its usability is confirmed by the International Journal of Industrial Che-
obtained results. mistry, 5(3-4), 107-110.
The proposed criteria can be replaced by
[4] Lotter, N. O., & Bradshaw, D. J.
the other criteria, which is indicative of the
(2010). The Formulation and Use of
fact that the proposed framework is flexible
and convenient for solving similar problems. Mixed Collectors in Sulphide Flota-
Finally, the proposed framework is based on tion. Minerals Engineering, 23(11),
the use of two efficient and easy-to-use 945-951.
MCDM methods that should enable the eas- [5] Magdalinovic, S., Possibility to Inc-
ier acceptance and use of the framework for rease the Bulk Density of Floated
selecting the most acceptable reagents. Particles Using Thiocarbonate - Master

Thesis Theory. Technical Faculty in Selection of a Packaging Design Based
Bor, Bor, 2017 (in Serbian) on the SWARA Method. Inzinerine
[6] Stanujkic, D., & Zavadskas, E. K., A Ekonomika - Engineering Economics
Modified Weighted Sum Method 2015, 26(2), 181-187.
Based on the Decision -Maker’s Prefe- [8] Vujic, D., Stanujkic, D. Urosevic, S. &
rred Levels of Performances. Studies Karabasevic, D., An Approach to Lea-
in Informatics and Control, 2015, der Selection in the Mining Industry
24(4), 61-470. Based on the Use of Weighted Sum
[7] Stanujkic, D., Karabasevic, D., & Preferred Levels of the Performances
Zavadskas, E. K. A Framework for the Method, Mining & Metallurgy Engi-
neering Bor, 2016, 4, 53-62.

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 622.012:504.06(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704111R
Vladimir Radovanović*, Ljiljana Savic**
WITH THE KNOWLEDGE TO THE WORLD OF ECOLOGICAL

DEVELOPMENT - CASE OF THE “TREPCA” COMPANY,
KOSOVSKA MITROVICA
Abstract
The modern era, in which humanity has encountered, is characterized by the numerous events,
global economy, new world market, global ecological crisis, and permanent changes in all segments of
business: in science, technique, technology, organization, management, etc., where the central place
belongs to a key resource, that is the to human resources from which everything starts and everything
depends. Today, it is necessary to have the high quality human resources that can ensure the effective
realization of business and environmental policy objectives and are adequately related to the rapid
technological changes that are increasingly turbulent and the changes in ownership transformation in
which the Serbian society is still. Through the economic activity, the globalization of the world society
more and more finds its foothold in all other spheres of life and work of modern man. As one planetary
process it brings numerous criteria, standards and rules in all spheres of which the great emphasis is
on the protection of the working and living environment as an inalienable property of humans, related
to the life, health biological and spiritual integrity, survival and development. Today, there are many
efforts in the world in order to make ecological problems crucial in the international and national
legislation of every single country, and become the social responsibility of every enterprise, education-
al system and moral code of every individual. The Serbian society has encountered the ecological dis-
aster caused by the war events in this area, as well as the other ecological problems caused by numer-
ous industries. The region of Kosovo and Metohija with accent on the Kosovska Mitrovica area is
concerned with numerous industrial waste materials resulted from various processes in the "Trepca"
company. These materials, by their structure and method of disposal in the landfills, cause a great
ecological problems and threats to the life and health of people, which will also be discussed in this
paper.
Keywords: human resources, ecology, social responsibility, globalization, economics, quality
1 INTRODUCTION
Enterprises as the economic systems panies also have the significant non-
have the task of using available social re- economic functions and activities in deve-
sources to meet the needs of society. Enter- lopment of society and civilization, and are
prises, through their business, growth and important factor of sustainable development
development, carry out economic activity and ecological balance as one of the more
that makes a national or world economy. In important social dimensions.
addition to the significant and numerous The enterprises are the bearers of eco-
economic functions, the contemporary com- nomic activities, as well as the survival and
*
Faculty of Technical Sciences, Čačak, e-mail: mrvladimirradovanovic@yahoo.com
**
Faculti of Technical Sciences, Kosovska Mitrovica, e-mail:ljsavic@open.telekom.rs

progress of the entire socio-economic reali- goals of modern economy oriented towards
ty. In the national economy of each country, socially responsible business are becoming
the companies have a common role in the increasingly important and the concept of
rational use of social resources and creation socially responsible business is becoming
of a system of social needs. The achieve- more and more accepted.
ment of wider social needs depends on the
role taken in performing the certain tasks in 2 HUMAN RESOURCES IN
the process of social reproduction. If the CONTEMPORARY BUSINESS
enterprise is more effective and efficient, the
level of its economy condition, thanks to the Human is the key to success and the
quality human resources, is higher, which at most important resource of any company.
the same time means that the goals of its Human resource management is a key lever
business and development will be achieved for achieving competitive advantage. A mo-
at a higher level [1]. dern knowledge-based economy sets new
Natural systems comprise primarily the demands for today's business systems and all
external and internal environment of the other forms of business as well as for all
company. All enterprises either directly or employees when sustainable development is
indirectly through other enterprises are deva- concerned. It supports the abandonment of
stating the nature as a result of spending the narrowly skilled profiles of employees, emp-
available resources for the production of hasizing their competence and a greater role
social goods. In addition, through the tech- of general education. With the change of
nological processes and products thrown technologies, production procedures, organi-
away after the use, companies pollute the zational structures, environments, manage-
natural environment, disrupting in that way ment, it requires permanent vocational edu-
an ecological balance. By an excessive exp- cation and employee development both for
loittation of non-renewable natural resources productive work and for protection of wor-
and contamination of the natural environ- king and living environment.
ment, companies can negatively affect the The combination of work and educa-
natural system of a particular country. Hu- tion, as well as their compatibility, has beco-
man must approach the exploitation of natu- me the inevitable need of a modern and fu-
ral resources rationally and take care of the ture businessman. The demand for deve-
ecological treatment of natural systems in loped and skilled human resources is chan-
order to survive in the conditions of the ac- ging faster than the human resources it self,
tivities of many enterprises directed to meet so there is a necessity to build a new human
the wide and complex needs. Hence, one of resource development strategy everywhere
the goals that individuals and society are where needed. Human Resource Develop-
increasingly interested in is an ecological ment Strategy is based on "work and educa-
goal, as a sum of activities related to the tion", i.e. on education in the organization,
protection of nature, land, water and air, which is a process of improvement, which
with the aim of protecting the life and health leads to development and better quality of
of people. That is why society comes out human resources.
with requirements and laws for protection, Only high-skilled knowledge workers
primarily natural resources, as well as the are the backbone for acquiring and maintai-
laws that must be incorporated into the stra- ning competitive advantage, and only high-
tegic goals of the company, in order to have quality human resources can follow today's
no negative business effect, which would business characterized by the rapid, dyna-
affect the ecological system as one of the mic, complex and unpredictable changes
pillars of sustainable development. The that have a strong impact on both business

and overall management of business sys- Training is progressing from the inter-
tems. nal to dynamic; from a routine to a crea-
By content and structure, the employee tive environment; from the "industry" of
training programs should be of such quality hierarchy, control and limiting compulsion
to ensure an adequate offer of well-trained to the "industry" of knowledge, cooperation,
human resources, to ensure the achieved and intelligent choice of options. Such an
work standards, as well as to develop the approach to the professional and profession-
capabilities, skills and attitudes of employ- nal education and development of employ-
ees in order to better respond to the demands yees not only provides the high-quality hu-
of the present and future work. Training man resources, but also brings one message
programs should increase the flexibility of that every employee is extremely important
work, as well as to successfully overcome for organization.
rapid changes in any segment of the business Continuous adjustment and focus on
system, as well as to meet the legally pre- the external environment and a permanent
scribed requirements when protecting the approach to development the human re-
living and working environment. sources quality imply a new and higher-
The development and education of hu- quality philosophy of work and results in
man resources influenced on changing of business systems. The new philosophy of
behavior in the world of work, changing the development and business inevitably im-
working atmosphere, improving the motiva- poses an increasingly new attitude that is
tion for work, improving the organizational necessary to understand how the future
culture, as well as changing the awareness does not belong to the superior technolo-
and attitudes towards the obligations in a gies, but to the superior human resources.
business system based on ethical principles.
About development and quality of em- 3 INTERNATIONAL LAW IN
ployees, the American economist Tom SOLVING ECOLOGICAL
Peters states the following: [2] PROBLEMS
- Human capital should be invested as
much as equipment, Solving problems of the working and
- We train people from the first day living environment in the modern era re-
and provide them with the additional quires a systematic approach, cooperation
training whenever necessary, and very intensive exchange of information
of all interested at the level of the whole
- Comprehensive training includes tec-
community. Environmental problems are
hnical problem solving, so that people
taking an increasing part in the global prob-
can contribute to quality improvement,
lems of contemporary humanity. The level
- We organize training for people who of vulnerability of the environment and natu-
move on to the manager tasks and ral resources has reached a very high level.
continue to train them whenever they All this points to the necessity of aradical
are transferred to a higher office, change in the attitude of man to the envi-
- Training is used as an incentive and ronment.
strategic impulse, Today, almost every human activity
- We insist that a complete training is has such a strong effect on the environ-
directed to the people from the base, ment that the ability of the planet's ecosys-
all programs should be designed ba- tem to sustain the future generations, i.e.
sed on information from people from to ensure the sustainable development, is
the base. questionable. The trend of atmospheric

pollution, due to the increasing needs of A human is at the same time a product
people as well as technological progress, and creator of the environment that gives
has caused the global warming as the en- him means of living, allowing him/her inte-
ding point of the negative domain to the llectual, moral, social and spiritual advan-
lives of people on the planet earth. cement. In a long period of development of
The environmental protection milestone human resources and hence of human work,
was given by the Stockholm UN Environ- the level has reached the level of which, due
ment Conference, after which intensive acti- to accelerated technological development, a
vities in this area began worldwide. human has gained the power to change
Solving ecological environmental prob- his/her environment in numerous ways and
lems was particularly intensified at the end in unprecedented proportions. The human's
of the last century by the emergence of the working and natural environment is equally
major environmental disasters (the Bopala important for the well-being and use of the
case) that cannot be solved solely applying basic human rights, including the most ele-
the concept of ecology, but a new awareness mental human right, and that is the right to
is formed about the inevitability of develop- life.
ping a new, efficient approach to the envi- The protection and improvement of the
ronment and environmental sustainability. human environment is an actual and im-
Solving ecological issues has been inten- portant international issue on which people's
sified at all levels, which has resulted in le- well - being and economic develop-ment
gal regulation from global to local plan. The depend worldwide. This is a serious re-
methodology has been developed for solving quirement of the international community,
the ecological problems in local communi- the obligation and duty of all its organs and
ties through the drafting and implementation organizations.
of the Local Environmental Plans (LEAP). The existential interdependence of na-
The task of this plan is to propose solutions tions and countries in the field of ecology is
that would contribute to the protection of the greater than in any other field of human ac-
natural environment, resources and quality tivity and must be taken into account by both
of life and prevent their endangering in the the UN Organization and the relevant na-
process of economic development of a local tional authorities [2]
community. Thus the real frames of all countries in
Environmental protection is a global, the world are created. The countries are
planetary problem and the common interest obliged to take care that their actions do not
of all countries and nations in the world. cause damage to their own, but also that
Today's ecological problems have become their actions do not harm or endanger and
part of international relations, in which does not violate the right of other sovereign
frameworks, legal norms and principles states. It was crucial to create the basis for
jointly solve these difficult challenges of the international law in the field of environmen-
modern world. Such activity enters the fund tal protection.
of development and improvement of con- The international protection of working
temporary international law, whose rules and living environment is directly related to
and regulations are based on the protection
the human rights, human existence, because
and improvement of the environment. The
if human is threatened as the only rational
Stockholm Declaration has adopted a num-
ber of principles for the organization of in- being, it will be threatened the most im-
ternational actions in the field of environ- portant and most precious resource on which
mental protection, starting from the follo- everything begins and where all social
wing: wealth is based.

The international environmental protec- ment. The Serbian Constitutional concept
tion calls for the appropriate behaviours of starts from the principle that the right to a
all entities in international relations, which is healthy environment is the basic human and
determined by the rules of international law existential right of individual, part of the
that is increasingly developing and transfer culture, customs, morality, tradition, which
responsibilities to all countries. The coun- is guaranteed by the state. Thus, an ecologi-
tries are obliged, in accordance with the cal policy is defined that will direct the so-
adopted declaration, to adopt their own laws, cial action for improvement and protection
rules and measures for the protection of the of the environment. This policy is an integral
living and working environment, which does part of the economic policy of the society
not exempt them from international coopera- and cannot be separated or interpreted by
tion in this plan. Countries are inclined to anybody.
international cooperation on this issue be- Based on the constitutional provisions, a
cause it is a complex and multi-dimensional whole system of positive environmental
complex of rights and obligations of all legislation has been developed: laws, regula-
countries to conserve and protect the envi- tions, decisions, etc. Particular attention is
ronment as the common interests of people drawn to the ecological criminal legislation
all over the world. that defines the criminal offenses and penal-
ties against the environmental damage.
4 NATIONAL RIGHTS OF Legislation in the field of environmental
ECOLOGICAL PROTECTION protection should suppress the following:
- Illegal construction and work of fa-
The environmental problems have pre- cilities and installations that pollute
occupied Serbia and its legislation since the the environment.
seventies of the 20th century. Until then, the - Damage of facilities and devices for
natural resources were considered to be the the environmental protection.
non-limiting and can be used infinitely be- - Importing of hazardous materials in
cause they are inexhaustible. Strong devel- the Republic of Serbia and unauthor-
opment of the industry and the uncontrolled ized processing, disposal and storage
import of "dirty" technologies and disper- of dangerous materials.
sion of pollution from the near and further
- Unauthorized construction of nuclear
environment have resulted in development
plants.
of ecological awareness and increasing im-
- Violation of the right to information
pact on the country's environmental policy.
on the environment condition.
Ecological movements like the "Green Par-
ty" have been created. There are more and - Transmission of infectious diseases
more scientific works on the topic of health in animals and plants.
protection and environmental protection. - Pollution of food and water for feed-
Relevant legal regulations have been adopt- ing the animals.
ed. Human resource education has begun - Forest devastation, etc.
and development of higher education institu-
tions for studying this issue that became a 5 SOCIAL RESPONSIBLE
threat to the survival of humanity. The Con- BUSINESS
stitution of the Republic of Serbia proclaims
the right of a human to a healthy environ- Social responsibility of the business is a
ment, where everyone is legally obliged and concept by which the business systems
obliged to protect and improve the environ- should take care of human rights, environ

mental protection, and equality of opportuni- Business systems seeking affirmation as
ty for all, in the same way, with the same the socially responsible members of society
attention and with the same results as of act proactively. Problems are anticipated and
economic efficiency. [3] prevented and socially responsible actions
Socially responsible business represents are suggested. These are business systems
awareness of the new position and im- that believe that they need to take their own
portance of business systems in the modern positions on social issues and through public
global environment and the responsibilities relations to make them available to the mass
that arise from them. Businesses subjects media of mass communication. It is not just
direct this concept and primary goal of ac- enough to announce the commitment but it
quiring and distributing profits consciously is necessary to demonstrate and show the
and voluntarily, and have a positive impact results. Research on its impact on society
on their working, social and natural envi- demonstrates commitment to the principles
ronment. of openness and transparency.
Social responsibility and target profit are The goal of social responsibility is to
not competitive but complementary parts. create a business system that has the support
The goal of social responsibility can be seen and affection of society. Socially responsible
by focusing the business system on profita- business means creating the sustainable
ble activities that do not endanger the social goals for human life. It is a great responsibil-
interest. A socially responsible business sys- ity on the management structure of business
tem can count on the growth of profitability systems, that is, of conscious and competent
and profitability over a longer period of human resources in them.
time.
In a wider sense, social responsibility in- 6 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
cludes the economic, natural, ethical and
philanthropic (discretionary) responsibility. Today's economic development is un-
Different thinking in approaching social derstood and defined differently, whether it
responsibility alleviates the approach that the is a progressive process of the economy or it
business systems must fulfil the economic is a complex process including the universal-
and legal responsibility, and then moral and ity of changes experienced by the business
discretionary. If the business systems fail to system or economy during its existence or it
meet the ethical and discretionary responsi- is a process that goes from the current state
bility, society can respond by passing laws, of less efficiency to a new state of higher
and then it becomes the legal responsibility. efficiency. The process of improving the
There are great differences between economy, an indicator of upgrading the hu-
branches for potential harm to society and man standards, the process of democratiza-
the environment. The pressure that business tion of society, the evaluation of humaniza-
systems have in some branches of different tion in interpersonal relations, is often de-
groups, organizations and institutions is dif- fined as a process of exploitation the natural
ferent. It is not enough just to adopt a sus- resources. Whatever the growth is defined, it
tainable development strategy, but also the has the essential meaning of progressive
programs and implementation plans that advancement. This progress is for the benefit
must be followed by an appropriate system of mankind. Current achievements in sci-
structure. The globalization of the world ence, technology, organization and govern-
economy will affect the acceleration of the ance should be increasingly beneficial to the
process of standardizing the viewing of so- society and humanity as a whole, as this is
cial responsibility. [5] its primary purpose. All this is in the role of

progress only if there is always a limit that is that is permanently degraded (which is a
called sustainable development, which is direct damage), due to the precipitation of
reflected in time, component, humanistic heavy metals and toxic substances from the
and ecological approach. landfill are directly discharged into the Ibar
Ecological approach refers to the protec- River, which contaminates the plant and
tion of the environment and its natural re- animal world in the river itself, and wider
sources that comprise: soil, water, air. The use of water for irrigation of agricultural
quality of the environment is qualified by cultures.
the following indicators: physical, chemical, Landfills as collecting points of waste
biological, aesthetic and other, which are industrial material obtained from the indus-
unfortunately changed by numerous busi- trial process are called sanitary fields. Indus-
ness projects, such as: exploitation of natural trial waste is obtained differently and is of
assets, industrial production, waste disposal, different composition, depending on the raw
transport of products, materials used in a particular industry, so it
In this paper, the research refers to the is differently disposed of. The most common
environmental protection from the tailing materials to be deposited are ash, slag and
dumps as waste from the ore flotation in the dust. Common to all industrial landfills is
"Trepca" company in the region of Ko- the seizure and permanent degradation of
sovska Mitrovica. large areas of land (as we have already em-
The aim of this paper is to identify the phasized). Water is polluted by both direct
extent to which human resources are charac- washing of harmful substances from land-
terized by their quality and professionalism fills and a system of underwater waters. The
in the “Trepca” company, where there is the largest water pollutants are ore flotation
environmental protection from pollution, plants, where acids, bases and other danger-
such as the waste materials from various ous chemical substances are used in this
chemical-metallurgical processes and ore process.
flotation and their deposit. The landfills of the Trepca Company for
In this research, there are following as- the previous 60 years are: the Old Flotation
sumptions (hypotheses): and Metallurgical Refinery Gornje Polje
The hypothesis that human health in this (tailing dump of granulated slag of shaft
region is highly endangered by numerous furnaces from the smelter and refinery, the
pollution by the Trepca industrial park, and deposited material about 12,000,000 m3), the
that the protection itself is at a low level. flotation tailing dump Žarkov potok about
That there is no adequate representa- 8,200,000 m3 of tailings, EMKO deposits of
tion of quality experts in the field of envi- zinc metallurgy about 500,000 m3 of tail-
ronmental protection in the plant itself and ings, chemical industry catchment area of
beyond. phosphorus/gypsum about 400,000 m3 of
The latest environmental studies in the tailings with a surface of 17 hectares, the
region of Kosovska Mitrovica are discourag- flotation tailing dump Žitkovac has been
ing for the following reasons: the unresolved deposited with 8,500,000 m3 of tailings with
problem of dumps within the vicinity of the an area of 26 hectares.
company itself and in its immediate vicinity Qualitative and quantitative measure-
and other sites, unprotected from wind and ments of industrial waste at the landfills in
precipitation, the presence of lead and other Kosovska Mitrovica.
heavy metals dust in the atmosphere. Land- Qualitative measurement and analysis of
fill deposits occupy a large area of fertile soil industrial waste.

Тable 1 Composition of granulated slag
Chemical Rational
Component Component
composition (%) composition (%)
Fe 25.74 FeO 33.11
Ca 13.80 CaO 19.90
Si 9.97 SiO2 21.32
Zn 9.90 ZnO 12.30
Mg 3.21 McO 5.32
Al 3.40 Al2O3 6.51
Pb 1.40 Pb 1.40
Cu 0.18 Cu2S 0.23
Ag 0.001 Ag 0.001
S 0.10 - -
O 31.5 - -
There is lead in this slag that is a toxic harm the health of people in their sur-
metal in the form of fine metal particles, roundings.
as well as many other metals that indirecty
6.1 Quantitative Measurements of
Industrial Waste at the Landfills
Тable 2 The structure and quantity of materials at the landfills
Type of material at Landfill area, Mass of landfills Mass
No.
landfill ha Before 1995 2005
Granulated slag from coal
1. 6.0 2,500,000 2,450,000
pit furnace
Intermediates from the lead
2. refinery in Zvecan next to 1.0 40,000 5,000
the Ibar
Refinery intermediates in
3. 1.2 5,000 2,000
Znjrovnica
4. ЕМCO sludge 14.0 500,000 450,000
5. Jarosite sludge 3.0 120,000 110,000
AB-Ag sludge + Cu slime
6. 1.2 70,000 10,000
+Ni-Co slime
7. Pyrite roasting 14.0 600,000 400,000
8. Phosphorus-gypsum 17.0 400,000 110,000
9. slag+ ash in Rudare 10.0 100,000 3,837,000
Total 67.4 4,335,000 7,374,000

Тable 3 Samples from the "Gater" landfill
Sample 2 Sample 2а Sample 2б MDK
Humidity % 9.15 12.40 10.33
pH 10.39 11.29 11.35
Red. Potenc.mV 206.8 207.1 206.7
CI mg/l 4900 86 70
pn 408 600 352
Alkalinity
ma 664 1088 860
Pb (g/t) 15.3 52.3 22.0 <5.0
Zn (g/t) 0.2 7.7 1.4 <20%
Cd (g/t) <0.2 <0.2 <0.2
Cu (g/t) 0.6 0,7 0.3 <20.0%
Fe (g/t) <0.8 <0.8 <0.8
Ni (g/t) <0.7 <0.7 <0.7 <10.0
Mn (g/t) <3.3 <3.3 <3.3 <25%
Hg (g/t) <2.2 <2.2 <2.2 <30.0
As (g/t) / / / <30.0
Table 4 Samples from the G.Krnjin-Leposavic landfill

Landfills: SAMPLE MARKING
Gornji Krnjin and Landfill: Landfill:
Bostaniste METALS Gornji Krnjin Bostaniste
Pb % 0.37 0.20
Zn % 0.19 0.20
Cu % 0.007 0.007
Cd % 0.001 0.002
Fe % 14.50 14.46
Ca % 2.13 3.82
Mg % 0.20 1.25
Co % 0.014 0.016
Ni % 0.044 0.028
Sb % 0.02 0.02
Mn % 0.79 0.88
Bi % 0.003 0.002
Hg g/t 80.64 <40.32
Ag g/t 22.07 17.65

6.2 Chemical industry landfills
Тable 5 Chemical composition of Pyrite roasting
Chemical Chemical
Component Component
composition % composition%
Fe2O3 65-75 Cu2S 0.2-2.0
SiO2 5-10 Pb 0.1-1.0
S 1-3 As 0.02-0.03
ZnO 0.6-3.0 Sb 0.01-0.02
Ag 0.002 CaO 1-3
Official report on the concentration of the period I = KSII 2015. It is presented in the
lead in the atmosphere in urban environments following Figure.
from the "STAMPEKS" sintered pump for
Figure 1 Concentration of lead in the atmosphere in urban areas
7 PROBLEM CONSIDERATION
7.1 Measures of Economic Protection
So far, a number of activities have been dumps are divided into two groups: the
undertaken, but still insufficient, to eliminate dumps whose materials cannot be processed
these pollutions. One of the first attempts is due to the small content of metals and which
to recycle the landfills, which, in addition to will remain and wait for a solution, and
ecological, would have an economic benefit. those whose materials are rich in metals to
When this procedure is in question, the be processed. Those are in the metallurgy of

lead and zinc, various dust, slag, foam, medical and professional rehabilitation of
sludge and various deposits, obtained by the the patient is carried out, which implies
metallurgical processes. Those materials can temporary or permanent change of work
be utilized by re-rotation in the initial pro- place.
cess by recirculation. The waste from Tertiary protection refers to the health
chemical industry in the form of pyrite dust protection of citizens and environmental
and phosphorus-gypsum is placed in a protection in the immediate and in far sur-
special landfill and their use is limited, roundings of the company. This form of
which guarantees a long-lasting durability. protection is the common interest of all citi-
Until now, those materials were used very zens living and working in it, enterprises,
little in the re-technological process and institutions, universities, local governments
waited for the profession at work. and social community. The basis of the envi-
ronmental protection is the preservation and
7.2 Health Protection Measures improvement of natural resources, land,
water and air. Environmental protection is
Protection measures are divided into only possible in the environments where
two groups: protection measures of the there is a developed consciousness of people
employees and managerial staff in the on environmental protection.
company it self, and protection measures It is necessary to pay much attention to
of the wider environment and health of the the industrial park as it is in the Trepca
population in it. company, to work on its remediation and
When it comes to the protection mea- to make a strategy of what and how to do
sures of employees in the company, they can with so much industrial waste, not only in
be divided into: primary, secondary and the region of Kosovska Mitrovica, but
tertiary. Primary prevention measures inclu- much wider. This problem is one of the
de the prevention of general and profe- largest ecological hotspots in Europe. In
ssional illnesses as well as injuries on work. order to achieve this, it is necessary to
Changes and advances in technology require reform and restructure the mining sector
the educated employees in order to be prote- in line with the European approach, in
cted from possible injuries. The education order to enable the fast and sustainable
can be through lectures, educational mate- development, environmental protection in
rials, television, posters, schemes, flyers and accordance with the best practices of sus-
various other printed and written materials, tainable development, institutional devel-
as well as the implementation of immune- opment and professional development of
zation and vaccination of workers. The best employed in the mining and wider sector
protection of the health of workers is in order to face the challenge of sustaina-
achieved using the adequate nutrition in ble social and economic development,
relation to the workplace, respecting daily, placement and development of the mining
weekly and annual holidays. The workers sector in accordance with the European
should be examined daily by the profe- standards, the Code of Regulations in this
ssional services of health care, and these area and their harmonization with the di-
services are legally obliged to provide the rectives of the European Union. Perma-
periodic systematic examinations of emplo- nent education is needed at all levels so
yees, as well as the control checks of those that people can find out what are the po-
workers who perform their work activity in tential possibilities for pollution of the
the most polluted environments. Secondary working and living environment, and how
prevention includes measures and proce- to fight them. It is necessary to develop a
dures undertaken in the stationary hospitals. social and ethical culture when it comes to
In this mode of medical treatment, the ecological development. At the Faculty of

Technical Sciences in Kosovska Mitrovi- diation or bioremediation should be done
ca, Department for Occupational Safety in order to reduce the concentration of
and Environmental Protection was opened toxic substances to a level that does not
in order to educate young people and pose a threat to human health and the en-
solve these problems scientifically. vironment. It is necessary to cover the
landfills and other hot spots with soil, and
CONSLUSION land should be covered with vegetation of
plant species that can stand a high concen-
The right to a healthy environment is tration of pollutants mentioned. It is very
the natural, personal and inalienable right important to ask for financial assistance
of every human being. The environment is and professional support not only from the
the basis of the survival of humanity and Republic of Serbia, but also from larger
the responsibility for its preservation is on associations such as the European Union.
every individual, no matter how practical- Not all investments in ecological devel-
ly is able to contribute to the reduction of opment are interpreted as cost and loss,
pollution and its preservation. When it but rather as a long-term investment in
comes to the environmental protection, in healthier future.
addition to every individual, the responsi-
bility is on the state apparatus and on eve- REFERENCES
ry business subject-enterprise. The case of
the Trepca company, due to the industrial [1] Group of authors: Economics of Enter-
waste being deposited for 60 years, has prise, Faculty of Economics, Belgrade,
turned out to be alarming and almost dev- 2015 (in Serbian)
astating for the population of Kosovo in [2] Piters,T.: Successful in Chaos, Grmec,
Kosovska Mitrovica and wider and dan- Belgrade, 2006, p.415 (in Serbian)
gerous for the whole eco-system. For this [3] Radovanovic, V.: Human Resources
one of the European largest environmental Management, Faculty of Technical
hot spots, it is necessary to bring the sci- Science, Cacak, 2009, p. 291(in
ence and brains as soon as possible to help Serbian)
and to find the best expert and compre- [4] Group of authors, Peric, M.; Konsta-
hensive solutions for this burning prob- tinovic, А.: Social Ecology, Faculty of
lem. The deposits of industrial material Philosophy, Belgrade, 2003, p. 95 (in
are located next to the flows of two rivers, Serbian)
as well as in the near core of the residen- [5] Criminal Law of the Republic of Ser-
tial area, unprotected and left to the at- bia, “Official Gazette of the Republic
mospheric conditions that spread toxic of Serbia“ No. 88/05 (in Serbian)
substances in water and air. It is necessary
[6] Pokrajcic, D.: Economics of Enter-
to invest as soon as possible in moderni- prise, Faculty of Economics, Belgrade,
zing the technological processes and re- 2002 (in Serbian)
duction the emissions to both rivers and
[7] Milosavljevic, М.: Contemporary Stra-
the rest of the environment and to use the
tegic Management, Megatrend, Bel-
experience of other regions in the state.
grade, 2005 (in Serbian)
The landfill of such a toxic material
that blows the wind and spills the rain into [8] Ecological Department of “Trepca“
the river basins should be repaired as soon Company in Kosovska Mitrovica (in
as possible. Adequate management of Serbian)
industrial waste is needed. A land reme-

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 621.9.048(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704123S
Milesa Ž. Srećković*, Zoran M. Karastojković**, Milovan M. Janićijević***, Zoran Stević****
LASER BEAM DRILLING AND CUTTING OF PMMA

Abstract
Due to its excellent mechanical, chemical and optical properties, also on fatigue, polymethil-
metacrylate (PMMA) is widely used for many purposes. PMMA has a reputation as a material that
cannot be machined well, but, its elasticity and toughness enable its shaping by the deformation pro-
cesses. Laser drilling and cutting are also available techniques for PMMA sheets shaping, used when
both mechanical and optical PMMA properties must be preserved.
In this work, the influence of CO2 laser cutting/drilling on transparent and coloured PMMA surfaces
is investigated, as well as by the other laser systems. The cut surfaces were investigated by a light micro-
scopy and, on those surfaces, the average surface roughness Ra was measured. The material zone affect-
ted by the laser beam during the cutting process was monitored by a thermal imaging, and theoretical
simulations of temperature distribution in this area were performed using the various versions of COM-
SOL packages.
Keywords: PMMA, laser cutting/drilling, surface roughness, thermal imaging, temperature distribu-
tion calculations
1 INTRODUCTION
Thanks to its excellent corrosion resis- The plasma state was produced in
tance, relatively good mechanical properties PMMA using the UV laser, and interesting
and low friction PMMA is used as a constru- chemical processes were observed. It is also
ction material in many applications, like for worth to underline simulation of different
vehicle (automobile) and airplane windows, processes when various types of laser sys-
as a component of holographic and similar tems were used simultaneously, including
optical materials, matrix for contemporary some unconventional measuring methods
magnetic materials, in furniture, toys and [6-17].
commercial boards. Thermal imaging. Thermal imaging is
Concerning the broad area of its appli- a suitable method for in-situ monitoring of
cations, the vast of reference data can be the laser - material interaction, which in
found about the laser methods for PMMA addition enables a comparison of different
shaping [1-14]. The optimization of laser simulation models. Thermal imaging ca-
systems working regimes, including the meras enable a full image observation of a
investigated of large variety of laser pulses desired area, inspection of a system under
going down to femtosecond duration were load, identification and location the prob-
also performed, both theoretically and expe- lems accompanying the heat production
rimentally. (hot points) and prevention the related da-
*
Faculty of Electrical Engineering, University of Belgrade, Serbia
**
Technical College Novi Beograd, Serbia
***
Metalac A.D., Gornji Milanovac (milovjani@gmail.com)
****
Technical Faculty, University of Belgrade, Bor

mages, temperature measurements and data pecially for its applications as chamber or
storage, allowing a considerable econo- windows material.
mization of time and resources [15-16] dur-
ing the laser-material interaction. 2 EXPERIMENTAL
In this paper, the thermal imaging is ap-
plied for visualization and quantitative data Laser parameters, used during the CO2
acquisition during the laser drilling/ cutting (λ = 10.6 m) processing of PMMA, were:
of PMMA. laser power 80W, pulse duration 0.7 ms.
Roughness. Roughness is one of the The PMMA absorption coefficient was
universal surface characteristics and a good assumed to be 4%. Numerical simulations
using these parameters were performed
indicator of material mechanical perfor-
using the Comsol Multiphysics 3.5, 4.4 and
mance. No matter the method of processing 5.2. program packages 13,14.
(turning, milling, grinding, sand blasting,
cutting, ...) the surface irregularities of mac- 2.1 Samples
hined components may initiate the nuclea-
tion sites for cracks, corrosion and other The samples, used for the presented in-
damages, even after polishing, so one of the vestigations, were taken from large PMMA
goals of the laser processing is to minimize plates, and their images are presen-ted in
Fig. 1 (a-d). White samples C1÷C4 have
the surface roughness. Strictly speaking,
dimensions 48.1x96.6x3 mm, while black
dust particles and other conta-mination are samples are 21.4x64.8x9.3 mm.
not considered as the surface roughness,
because they can be relatively easy removed 2.2 Cutting
from the surface.
Mechanical and optical (including laser) Cutting of the PMMA samples was
profilers are in use for measuring the roug- performed by a CO2 laser with characte-
ristics stated above, under a cutting speed of
hness profiles. The surface roughness was
40 cm/min. During these experiments, the
measured by a roughness comparator with a oscillations in power supply were registered
diamond stylus in our experiments. The sur- with a slight influence on the cut surface
face roughness is usually characterized by roughness.
two main attributes: roughness ampli-tude,
as a measure of height, or depth, and rough- 3 RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
ness sampling length, as a measure of fre-
quency of roughness pattern appearing. 3.1 Roughness Measurements
Optical properties, including the well-
known numbers (Re, Nu, Pr) from fluids dy- Surface roughness can be numerically
namics have an important role for cha- characterized by maximal height (depth)
Rmax of the roughness pattern, and its
racterization the laser processing of PMMA
arithmetic average value Ra. In the presented
[17-23]. Some other advanced surface treat- investigations, Ra measurements were
ments, like high frequency (HF) induction, performed by a mechanical method using a
and electron-beam irradiation are in compe- diamond stylus. Sketch of black specimens
titions with laser processing of PMMA, es and its roughness values are shown in Fig. 2.

a)
b)
c)
d)
Fig. 1 PMMA samples obtained by CO2 laser cutting

Fig. 2 Sketch of black PMMA specimen with Ra values of appropriate surfaces
Some measured roughness values of samples presented in Fig.1 are given in Table 1.
Table 1 Roughness Ra of specimens cut by a CO2 laser under the speed of 40 cm/min
No Samples Ra m
1. C1 0.48
2 C2 0.3
White samples
3 C3 0.52
4 C4 0.43
5 A1 0.062
6 cutting I 0.098(0.02)
Cutting modification
7 cutting II 0.12
8 Black specimen 0,35(0.015)
3.2 Microscopic Evaluations of

Laser-Cut Surfaces
Damages and other surface changes in- ring the CO2 laser (80 W, λ=10.6 m, cut-
duced in PMMA by the laser cutting/dri- ting speed 40 cm/min) cutting of PMMA by
lling are analyzed using a light microscopy, an IR camera (IK 21 from Vohler, Germany
and results are presented in Fig. 3. Two with professional version of the IR Snap
characteristic areas with laser induced dam- View software package from Infrared Solu-
ages can be noticed in the presented micro- tions Inc.), and in that way obtained temper-
graphs: a) basic material far away from the ature distribution are shown in Figs. 4 and 5,
laser-affected zone (LAZ) area, Fig. 3a) and respectively. Before measurements were
laser-cut edges, Fig. 3b-g) and b). provided, the emissivity in an IR part of
electromagnetic spectra firstly is determi-
3.3 Thermal Imaging ned: ε = 0.95 for black and ε = 0.93 for
transparent PMMA specimens. The maxi-
The thermal images of black and semi- mum temperature registered on a black
transparent specimens (different fillers pro- PMMA specimen surface during the laser
vides different material colors) obtained du- cutting was 318.4oC.

a) Micrograph of sample by a light
microscope Sample surface - basic material, b) X100
x20 (Microscope Litz MZ6)
c) x100 d) x100
e) x100 f) x100
g) x100
Fig 3 (a-h) Light microscope micrographs of PMMA microstructures at:
a) intristic material and b-g) laser cutting zone

Fig. 4 Thermal image of CO2 laser cutting obtained on a cut black PMMA sample,
together with temperature distribution scale
The maximum temperature reached on sample during the CO2 laser cutting was
the surface of a semitransparent PMMA 243.5oC, Fig.5.
Fig. 5 Thermal image a CO2 laser cutting obtained during the cutting of
a semitransparent PMMA sample, together with a temperature distribution scale
4 SIMULATION OF TEMPERATURE
DISTRIBUTION DURING LASER
CUTTING OF PMMA
Modeling the interaction of laser beam 3.5, 4.4 and 5.2). Therefore, the temperature
with material is performed using the COM- distribution, as a consequence of absorbed
SOL Multiphysics packages (versions energy from laser beam into material and

other heat processes generated into the mate- where:
rial are analyzed. In this case, only the solid δts - time scalar coefficient,
state is considered, in applying the corre- ρ - specific density,
sponding mode for heat conduction. Cp - heat capacity at constant pressure,
k - (in general) tensor of heat conduc-
4.1 Thermodynamics Simulations of tivity, and
Heat Distribution Q - total heat source or sink.
The heat conduction is modeled by the If it is needed, the model can include
equation: the transverse heat convection, and sur-
face (2D) radiation, by incorporation of
( ) (1)
the two new terms in eq. (1):
( ) ( ) ( ) (2)
Those new terms describe the heat en- Using the program package COMSOL
ergy delivered from the affected area to Multiphysics 4.4, the temperature distribu-
the environment by transverse connective, tion in PMMA sample after CO2 laser beam
and out-of plane radiation cooling. action during cutting is simulated. The tem-
Described model is applicable if there is perature distribution in 2D space at momen-
no phase transition, and other substantial tum of 1s after starting the operation is given
surface changes, i.e. for temperatures pro- in Fig. 6. Absorption coefficient is assumed
files below the melting point. Such a simula- to be 100%. CW laser beam of 80 W mean
tion is useful for understanding the processes power, and diameter of spot of 2 cm were
further from the laser interaction area, and parameters for simulation. Next data about
(or) during the later stages of material coo- PMMA were incorporated in this calcula-
ling. Such approach is applicable in cases tion: thermal conductivity λ = 18 W/mK,
when blowing appears during laser pro- density ρ=1190 kg/m3 and specific heat
cessing. Cp=1450 J/kgK. The cw CO2 laser beam
with previously stated parameters and spot
4.2 Simulations using COMSOL Mul- diameter of 2cm were considered in simu-
tiphysics Program Packages lation under the assumption that the ener-
gy of laser beam is completely absorbed
Simulations of thermal distribution in along the first 1mm from the material sur-
PMMA during CO2 and Nd3+:YAG laser face. The 2D temperature distribution at
cutting/drilling/ engraving/thermal surface 1s after the start of the laser interaction is
treating were done using three program presented in Fig. 6. For such data the cal-
packages COMSOL Multiphysics, versions culated maximum temperature was 430 K
3.5, 4.4 and 5.2. For Nd3+:YAG is perfor- (159oC), slightly below melting point
med simulation for one case using Comsol (433K).
3.5. absorbed until to 1mm in depth in mate- Diameter of 2cm is pretty large for cut-
rial. For such data, the calculated maximum ting in the applied working conditions, but it
temperature was 430 K (159oC), slightly could be of interest for the local thermal
below the melting point (433K), softening treatments of particular surfaces using an
point 110+273=383 K, melting range adequate beam expander. The value of ab-
(82÷95)+273= 355÷368 K 21-24 . sorption coefficient deserves a special dis-
cussion.

Fig. 6 2D temperature profile obtained by simulation with COMSOL Multiphysics 4.4 program
package and parameters started in the text 1s after start of the cw CO2 laser beam – PMMA
This simulation might be in relation on be from the beginning of interaction, under

engraving process for specimens thicker the same other working parameters.
than 1 mm, when greater spot surface is Cutting speed, data about material pro-
available, so this approach could be applied perties, material thickness, etc., are however
for engraving by the wider lines. data which are necessary to know, but for
fast simulation as here the phase transitions
4.2.1 Temperature Simulations by COMSOL were not included. Appearance of phase
Multiphysics Package 4.4 Version. transitions in plastic materials need more
More Realistic Conditions for detailed approach, knowing for example
Simulations of Cutting Processes the Verdet constant, laser number etc.
The simulation under same thermo- 17,18.
dynamic conditions further is provided after Described model is applied in the case
1.5 s from the starting of operation, Fig. 7. without phase transition and without change
The 3D profile of temperature distribution of surface. In other words, it can be used for
after 1.5 s is shown in Fig. 7a), while the 2D temperatures profiles below the melting
profile in Fig. 7b). The time is considered to point.

a)
b)
Fig. 7 Temperature distribution 1.5s after the start of the cw CO2 laser beam - PMMA
interaction obtained by simulation using the COMSOL Multiphysics 4.4 Program Package:
a) 3D distribution, and b) 2D distribution. Simulation parameters are the same as in Fig. 6

4.2.2 Temperature Simulations of CO2 and The cw - CO2 laser - PMMA interac-
Nd3+: YAG Laser-PMMA Interaction tion.
by COMSOL Multiphysics 3.5
Program Package The penetration depth of the laser
beam of 0.2 mm was used during the si-
Simulation of the temperature distribu- mulation, with all other working para-
tion during the laser cutting of PMMA is meters being the same as in Fig.6. Under
performed by COMSOL Multiphysics 3.5 those conditions the maximum tempe-
Program Package and extended to two la- rature of 775.1 K (502oC), was obtained,
ser beams, cw-CO2 and pulse Nd3+: YAG. Fig. 8.
Fig. 8 Temperature distribution during the cw-CO2 laser-PMMA interaction 1.5 s

after its start for laser beam penetration depth of 0.2mm, simulated by
COMSOL Multiphysics 3.5 Program Package
The Nd3+:YAG laser - PMMA intera- model can give some answers about the
ction. conditions around the interaction thres-
The temperature distribution during hold.
t Nd3+:YAG (λ=1.06 µm, mean power
5 kW) laser - MMA interaction has been 4.2.3 Temperature Distribution Simulations
simulated, as well. In this case the PMMA of the CO2 laser - PMMA Interaction
absorption coefficient of 4%, and a uniform by COMSOL Multiphysics 5.2
energy distribution over the laser beam Program Package
cross section were assumed. Under these
conditions, the maximum obtained tem- The temperature distribution during the
perature is 879.7 K, as it could be seen in CO2 laser - PMMA interaction is analyzed in
Fig. 9, indicating that a model, which in- more details using the simulations perfor-
cludes the phase transition and the latent med by the COMSOL Multiphysics 5.2 Pro-
heat must be used. However, the presented gram Package.

Fig. 9 Temperature distribution in PMMA after 0.7 ms of the Nd3+:YAG laser pulse duration,
obtained by the COMSOL Multiphysics 3.5 Program Package simulations
The simulation parameters were the

same as previously stated, with a cutting ( ) (3)
speed of 40 cm/min (6.67 mm/s), and sam-
ple size of 1x1x1 cm. The laser beam profile where d is:
was treated as the Gaussian with the stand- ‖ ( )‖
‖ ‖
(4)
ard deviation of 2 mm. The laser beam en-
tering point was set at O = (0.005, 0.005, The temperature distribution 0.3 s after
0.02), and beam orientation is defined with the start of interaction is presented in Fig. 10
vector e = (0, 0, -1). a), and b). The simulations provided that
The Gaussian distribution is given by a under these conditions the maximum
function of: temperature reaches 3850 K.
Fig. 10 Temperature distribution 0.3 s after the start of the cw-CO2 laser - PMMA interaction
simulated by the COMSOL Multiphysics 5.2 Program Package under the same working
conditions as in Figs. 6-8, and the laser beam profile standard deviation of 2 mm:
a) 3D distribution, and b) 2D distribution

However, the simulations results appear as it can be seen in Fig. 11, which is much
to be very sensitive on the laser beam closer to the results obtained experimen-
standard deviation, and for its value of 5 tally by the thermal imaging (a sample
mm, also, the maximum temperature 0.3 s in this simulation was in dimensions
after the start of interaction reaches 883 K, 1x1x1 cm).
Fig. 11 Temperature distribution 0.3 s after the start of the cw-CO2 laser-PMMA interaction
simulated by the COMSOL Multiphysics 5.2 Program Package under the same working
conditions as in Fig. 10, and the laser beam profile standard deviation of 5 mm:
a) 3D distribution, and b) 2D distribution, (same working conditions as in Figs. 6-8, t=0.3 s)
If the dimensions of modeling sample vide the temperature distribution that is

change to 20x10x3 cm, with the laser beam pretty close to the one obtained by the
standard deviation of 5 mm, and other thermal imaging, with maximum tempe-
parameters unchanged, the simulation pro- rature of 552 K, Fig. 12a), and b).
Fig. 12 Temperature distribution 0.3 s after the start of the cw-CO2 laser-PMMA interaction simu-
lated by the COMSOL Multiphysics 5.2 Program Package under the same working
conditions as in Fig. 11, and the sample size of 20x10x3 cm: a) 3D distribution, and b) 2D distribution.

In case with the same geometry and di- change (which include a latent energy),
mension with standard deviation of the ther-mal distribution slightly changes
0.33 mm, and with respect to the phase as it can be seen in Fig.13.
Fig. 13 Profiles of temperature distribution with the standard deviation of 0.33 mm
It is possible to include a moving (trans- temperature (622 K) is obtained as a result

lation) of beam into simulation. If a speed and that is presents in Fig.14.
(0.007 m/s) is put into a model, the lower
Fig. 14 Profile of temperature distribution with the standard deviation

of 0.33 mm with a translational speed of 0.007 m/s
Here is underlained that the simulation be regarded to a real pulse, which dia-
could be provided with more realistic spot, meter is pretty smaller and concentrated
it means that the standard deviation should  0.3 mm.

DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSION
Laser methods of PMMA treatment are could provide the reliable predictions of
considered in numerous articles from va- absorbed energy, its conversion into heat,
rious points of view: simulations, experi- and subsequent heat redistribution.
ments with different types of laser devices, Under the investigated working condi-
industrial applications, material processing tions, the maximum temperature of 775.1 K
for optical components, cutting and shaping (502oC) was provided by simulation, Fig.8,
of panels, tropheys, fiber applications, etc. compared to 318.4oC experimentally recor-
[3-10, 19-27]. The part of the theory used in ded by the thermal imaging.
these descriptions is applicable also for the The maximum temperature values, ob-
other transparent materials, composites, tained in provided monitoring and simu-
glassy and plastic materials. lations, either using the thermal imaging or
During the experiments presented in this used program packages (COMSOL 3.5, 44.4
work, numerous specimens of different and 5.2), have shown some disagreements; it
PMMA materials were cut using the cw- could be explained from the inadequate va-
CO2, and Nd3+:YAG laser beams, under the lues of coefficient in thermodynamic equa-
same cutting conditions. tions for heat generation and its conduction.
The attempts to decrease the surface It means that the absorption/reflection co-
roughness of processed material usually efficients of laser beam interaction with sur-
increase the manufacturing costs, but impro- face, also at presence of filler/pigment com-
ves the performances of a component ob- ponents and complex thermodynamic condi-
tained by that way. From that reason, the tions, need more precise determinations.
surface roughness of PMMA samples after
the laser cutting was measured and expre- REFERENCES
ssed in terms of the average roughness Ra.
Under the used cutting conditions the largest [1] S. Ristić, M. Srećković, The Imple-
Ra of 0.52 µm is obtained for sample C1, mentation of Lasers in Rheological
and the smallest (0.3 µm) for sample C2 Investigation and Optimization of
(Table 1). Such a large deviation of Ra va- Holographic Interferogram, OPTO;
lues can be explained by presence of diffe- Proc., pp. 186-193(1), 14-16 avr. 1992.
rent fillers & pigments in various PMMA [2] Heat and Mass Transfer during
samples and some fluctuations of processing Solidifications, Eds. B. Spalding, N. H.
parameters observed during the cutting. Afgan, Heat and Mass Transfer in
A characteristic feature observed for the Metallurgical Systems, Washington,
PMMA laser cutting is the existence of a Hemisphere Publ. Corp. 1981.
narrow LAZ zone, similar to amorphous [3] Fundamentals of Fracture Mechanics
structure, which is similar to those observed and Structural Assessment Methods,
after the resistance, induction, or electron Belgrade, Eds.L.M., MS, SS, Modern
beam melting. In general, during the laser Approach to Control and Modes Struc-
beam treatment of materials, a huge energy ture Testing Methods, Faculty of Mec-
gradient of about 108 W/cm2 that is fun- hanical Eng., Belgrade, 2009, pp. 237-
damentally different from the conditions 261.
during the mechanical machining. [4] P. Krstić, Multiphoton Ionization Pro-
However, the temperature distribution cesses in Strong Laser Fields, Ph.D.
produced by the elion technics depends also Thesis, City University of New York,
on the material properties, and its simulation 1981.
must be supported by the adequate material [5] A. Kovačević, M. Srećković, R. Gos-
parameters and conducted using the appro- pavić, S. Ristić, P. Jovanić, Laser
priate thermodynamic and other theories that PMMA Interaction and Mechanical

Stresses, Acta Physica Polonica, A., of Femptosecond Laser Ablated
Vol.112, No.5, 2007, pp. 987-992, PMMA, Appl. Mater. Interfaces, 2 (8),
981-986. pp. 2377-2384, 2010.
[6] M. Srećković, J. Ilić, M. Davidović, [15] Z. Stević, M. Rajčić-Vujasinović, D.
B. Đokić, Ž. Tomić, Z. Latinović, Antić, Thermal Imaging Application,
D. Družijanić, Laser Inter Action with Technical Faculty Bor, Bor 2008, pp.
Material-Theory, Experiments and 55-127 (in Serbian)
Discrepancies, Acta Phys.Polonica A., [16] B. Simić, D. Knežević, M. Srećković,
Vol.116, No.4, pp. 618-621, 2009. D. Nikolovski, Modern Problems of
[7] M. Srećković, A. Kovačević, S. Thermovision, Tehnika, Elektro-
Bojanić, Lj. Vulićević, S. Ristić, V. tehnika, Vol. 62, No. 2, pp. 272-284,
Rajković, Damages Induced by Laser 2013 (in Serbian)
Beams in Organic Materials, Laser [17] M. Bass Ed., Laser Material Proce-
Phys., Vol.11, No.3, pp.336-342, 2001. ssing, North Holland Amsterdam,
[8] M. Srećković, A. Kovačević, M. Davi- 1983.
dović, M. Dinulović, M. Kutin, [18] M. Srećković, Lj. Vulićević, V. Rajko-
A. Milosavljević, B. Djokić: Heating vić, Ž. Tomić, Guide of Laser Dama-
Phenomena and Approaches for Active ges, Technical Faculty, Čačak, 2004.
and Passive Materials, Kopaonik - [19] M. Srećković, A. Bugarinović, Ž. To-
Serbia, SPIG 2006, Proccedings Book, mić, A. Kovačević, V. Rajković, Laser
pp.243-247. Interaction with Material: Theory,
[9] I. Black, Laser Cutting of Perspex, J Experiment and Reality, Regional
Mat. Science Letters Vol.17, 1998, Center for Talents, Belgrade II, Bel-
1531-1533. grade 2012, in Serbian, pp. 246-329.
[10] Mirkin, Physical Basis of Material [20] R. Gospavić, PhD Thesis, Faculty of
Processing by Laser Beams, Mosque – Electrical Engineering, Belgrade,
University, 1975 (in Russian) 2007.
[11] J. Krueger, S. Martin, H. Maedebach, [21] M. Speka, S. Mattei, M. Pilloz, M. Ilie,
L. Urech, T. Lippert, A. Wokaun,W., The Infrared Thermographys Control
Kautek, Femto and Nanosecond Laser of the Laser Welding of Amorphous
Treatment of Doped Laser Polyme- Polymer, NDT E International Vol. 41
thylmetcrilate, Apl Surf.Scien., Vol. (3), pp.178-183,2008.
247, 2005, pp.406-411. [22] R. Ndeda, P. N. Kioni, J. N. Keraita,
[12] M. Srećković, Lj. Vulićević, S. Boja- Effect of Laser Parameters on PMMA
nić, V. Rajković, S. Ristić, Contri- during Laser Micromachining, A
bution to Prognosys of Laser treatment FEMLAB Simulation, Proceedings of
Efficiency for Different Materials, the 2011 Mechanical Engineering
Journal of Optics, India, 27/1998/1, Conference on Sustainable Research
pp.19-31. and Innovation, Vol. 2, 5th-6th May
[13] A. Husein, Y. Nukman, A.M. Sifullah: 2011, pp. 49-53.
Effect of Process Parameter in Laser [23] M. Janićijević, M. Srećković, B. Kalu-
Cutting of PMMA Sheet and ANFIS đerović, S. Bojanić, M. Dinulović, A.
Modeling for Online Control, MA- Kovačević, D. Družijanić, Characte-
TEC Web of Conferences 77, 10003, rization of Laser Beams Interaction
2016. with Carbon Materials, Laser Physics,
[14] C. De Marco, S. M. Eaton, R. Suriano, IOP Publ. Vol. 23, 2013, 056002
S. Turri, M. Levi, R. Ramponi, G. Ce- (12pp) DOI:10.1088/1054-660X/23/5/
rullo, R. Osellame: Surface Pro-perties 056002

[24] M. Janićijević, M. Srećković, B. Kalu- Biological Tissue during Laser-
đerović, M. Dinulović, Z. Karastojko- Material Interaction, Physics Script,
vić, Z. Kovačević, P. Jovanić, Evalua- Vol. 2014, T162, DOI: 10.1088/0031-
tion of Laser Beam Interaction with 8949/2014/T162/ 014041
Carbon Based Material, Cicek Chem. [26] J. Weiner, P. T. Ho, Light-Matter
Industry and Chem. Engineering, Interaction, Vol.1, Fundamentals and
Quarterly, Chem. Ind. Chem. Eng. Q Applications, John Wiley and Sons,
Vol. 21, pp.63-69, 2015.
Hoboken, New Jersay, 2003
[25] Z. Latinovic, M. Sreckovic, M. Janici-
[27] R. M. Wood, Laser Damage in Optical
jevic, J. Ilic, J. Radovanovic, Nume-
Material, Adam Hilger, 1986, Bristol.
rical Modeling of Thermal Effects on

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 622.271/.627.3(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704139M
Mlađan Maksimović*, Miodrag Brzaković*, Miloš Grahovac**, Ivana Jovanović***
AN APPROACH FOR EVALUATION THE SAFETY AND

QUALITY OF TRANSPORT AT THE OPEN PIT MINES,
BASED ON THE EDAS METHOD****
Abstract
Transport of ore and overburden at the open pit mines represents the most important and the most
complex process in the open pit excavation technology. Transport organization significantly affects the
capacity of machinery for excavation and disposal, excavation productivity, as well as the ore produc-
tion costs.
This paper describes an attempt to select the most suitable transport system at the open pit mines
from the safety and quality point of view. For that purpose, the EDAS method was used. Four types of
transport systems were considered – truck transport, railway transport, belt conveyor and hydrotran-
sport. It was found that, from the above mentioned aspect, the truck transport generally has the most
favorable characteristics.
Keywords: transport, open pit mine, safety, quality, EDAS method
1 INTRODUCTION
Transport at the open pit mines takes (3) Combined (for example truck tran-
place according to a determined cycle, the sport with belt conveyor) [1].
duration of which depends on the time of: Selection the type of transport for the
loading, motion of the loaded and empty specific conditions of an open pit mine is
transport machine, unloading, maneuvering determined on the basis of different pa-
and stoppage in transport. All these opera- rameters, such as [1]:
tions can be performed with or without inter- - type as well as physicochemical and
ruptions, and therefore, transport at the open mechanical properties of material to
pit mines can be divided into: be transported (looseness, brittleness,
(1) Continuous (such as hydrotransport, particle size, temperature, etc.);
belt conveyor) - way of loading and unloading;
(2) Discontinuous (with intermittent ef- - working environment in which trans-
fect, such as trucks, trains, scrapers) port machinery will work (dustiness,
*
Faculty of Applied Management, Economics and Finance, Belgrade, University Business Academy
Novi Sad, Jevrejska 24, 11000 Belgrade, Serbia, mladjan.maksimovic@mef.edu.rs
**
Office of the War Crimes Prosecutor, Ustanicka 29, Belgrade, Serbia
***
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor, Zeleni bulevar 35, 19210 Bor, Serbia
****
This investigation was conducted under the Project TR 33007 "Implementation of the Modern
Technical, Technological and Ecological Design Solutions in the Existing Production Systems of
the Copper Mine Bor and Copper Mine Majdanpek", funded by the Ministry of Education, Science
and Technological Development of the Republic of Serbia

temperature changes, humidity, cli-   (1 , 2 ,...,n )T with  j  [0, 1] and
mate, etc.);

n
- dimensions of the facilities or ma-  j  1 , is defined as [2]:
j 1
chinery where the loading, passage
and unloading is performed; n
- capacity and operation mode of loa-
ding machinery, as well as technolo-
WA(a1 , a 2 , , a n )   a
j 1
j j (1)
gy of excavation and disposal;

- direction and transport distances, etc. where a j represents the argument varia-
The selected type of transport at the open ble.
pit mine should ensure the safe transport of The EDAS method, as a multi criteria
required quantities of materials, continuous decision making method, was introduced by
operation, minimum operational difficulties, Keshavarz Ghorabaee et al. (2015), and
security, safety of employees, smooth opera- therefore it can be stated as a newly-
tion of the basic and auxiliary machinery as proposed method. A fuzzy extension of this
well as the greatest possible cost - effecti- method was also developed by Keshavarz
veness. At the modern open pit mines, three Ghorabaee et al. (2016), while a grey exten-
types of transport are mainly applied: (1) sion was proposed by Stanujkic et al. (2017)
railway transport, (2) trucks and (3) belt con- [3–5].
The basic ideas of the EDAS method are
veyors. In addition to the mentioned ones,
the use of two distance measures, namely
less used are scrapers, cable cars, pipelines,
the Positive Distance from Average (PDA)
etc. [1]
and the Negative Distance from Average
In this paper, according to the method-
(NDA); and that the evaluation of the alter-
logy of multi criteria decision making, the
natives is done according to higher values of
selection of the most suitable means of
the PDA and lower values of the NDA.
transportation at theopen pit mines is dis-
Based on Stanujkic et al. (2017), the
cussed. Basically, quality and safety of
computational procedure of the EDAS met-
transport were accepted as the most impor-
tant criteria in this discussion, but it should hod, for a decision - making problem with m
be emphasized that the quality of transport is criteria and n alternatives, can be presented
considered through several parameters, that as follows:
is: the length of the transport distance, the Step 1. Select the available alternatives,
need for supply of power and water, the the most important criteria that describe the
influence of working conditions and the alternatives, and construct the decision-
impact of physical and mechanical proper- making matrix X, shown as follows:
ties of the transported material. The tests
were carried out using the EDAS method.  x11 x12  x1n 
x x 22  x 2 n 
2 THE EDAS METHOD X   12 , (2)
     
Before a short description of the EDAS  
 x1n x 2 n  x mn 
method, given in the text, it is necessary to
define a weighted average operator. where xij denotes the performance rating
A weighted average (WA) operator of of the alternative i on the criterion j.
dimension n is a mapping WA : R n  R Step 2. Determine the average solution
that has an associated weighting vector according to all criteria, shown as follows:

x *j  ( x1 , x 2 , , x n ) , (3) Qi
S i  , (9)
max Qi
where i
Qi

m
i 1
xij S i  1  , (10)
x *j  . (4) max Qi
m i
Step 3. Calculate the positive distance where S i and S i denote the normalized
from average d ij and the negative dis- weighted sum of the PDA and the NDA,
respectively.
tance from average d ij , according to the
Step 6. Calculate the appraisal score Si
type of criteria (benefit and cost), shown
for all alternatives, as follows:
as follows:
1 
 max(0, ( x ij  x *j )) Si  ( S i  S i ) . (11)
 ; j   max 2
  x *j
d ij   , Step 7. Rank the alternatives according
 max(0, ( x j  x ij ))
*
to the decreasing values of appraisal score.
 ; j   min The alternative with the highest Si is the best
 x *j
choice among the candidate alternatives.
(5)
a. Application of EDAS method in a
 max(0, ( x *j  x ij )) group of decision making
 ; j   max
  x *j One of the simplest approaches for ap-
d ij   ,
 max(0, ( x ij  x j ))
* plication of the EDAS method in a group
 ; j   min environment can be provided forming a
 x *j group matrix of decision-making based on
(6) the individual matrices obtained from the
participants of a group, using the WA opera-
where  max and  min denotes the set of tor, i.e. applying Eq. (1).
the benefit criteria and the cost criteria,
respectively. 3 NUMERICAL EXAMPLE OF THE
EDAS METHOD APPLICATION
Step 4. Determine the weighted sum of
PDA, Qi , and the weighted sum of NDS, a. Basic postulates of multi criteria
decision making for selection of
Qi , for all alternatives, as follows:
mode of transport
n
Qi  w d
j 1

j ij , (7) In this case, the evaluation of four po-
tential modes of transport is considered, as
n follows:
Qi  w d
j 1

j ij . (8) A1 – Truck transport
A2 – Railway transport
A3 – Belt conveyors
Step 5. Normalize the values of the A4 – Hydrotransport
weighted sum of the PDA and the weighted in relation to the following criteria:
sum of the NDA for all alternatives, shown C1 – Transport safety
as follows:

C2 – Transport distance In order to evaluate the alternatives, a
C3 – Supply of power and water team of three experts was formed. At the
C4 – Working environment conditions very beginning of the evaluation, the experts
(temperature changes, humidity,
assigned a significance to the selected crite-
terrain configuration)
ria using the estimates (E) in the interval
C5 – Physical and mechanical proper-
ties of materials [0,1), as it is shown in Table 1.
Table 1 Significance of criteria obtained from three experts

Criteria E1 E2 E3
C1 1 1 1
C2 1 0.9 1
C3 0.7 0.8 0.8
C4 0.5 0.6 0.6
C5 0.9 0.9 0.9
Weights of the criteria were subseque- ∑

∑ ∑
(12)
ntly determined using the following for-
mula: Group weights is shown in Table 2.
Table 2 Group weights

Criteria wi
C1 1
C2 1
C3 0.7
C4 0.5
C5 0.9
After that, the experts evaluated the al- ria. The results, obtained from three ex-
ternatives in relation to the selected crite- perts, are shown in Tables 3, 4 and 5.
Table 3 Results of the alternatives evaluation, obtained from the first of three experts
Criteria
Alternatives
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
A1 3 4 4 3 4
A2 1 1 3 1 3
A3 2 3 2 2 2
A4 4 2 1 4 1
Table 4 Results of the alternatives evaluation, obtained from the second of three experts
Criteria
Alternatives
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
A1 3 4 3 3 4
A2 1 2 3 3 3
A3 2 3 2 2 2
A4 4 2 1 4 2

Table 5 Results of the alternatives evaluation, obtained from the third of three experts
Criteria
Alternatives
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
A1 3 3 3 3 4
A2 1 2 3 1 3
A3 2 3 2 2 2
A4 4 2 1 3 1
b. The results of a group of multi

criteria decision making
Group performances of alternatives in WA operator. The first expert was assigned
relation to the selected criteria – i.e. the with significance of 0.4, while the second
transformation of individuals into the group and third expert were assigned with signi-
decision matrix, was carried out using the ficance of 0.3 (Table 6).
Table 6 Group performances of alternatives obtained from three experts
Criteria
Alternatives
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
A1 0.24 0.23 0.18 0.13 0.21
A2 3.00 3.70 3.40 3.00 4.00
A3 1.00 1.60 3.00 1.60 3.00
A4 2.00 3.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
After that, the average solution is (4). The obtained results are shown in
determined for each criterion using Eq. Table 7.
Table 7 Average solution according to all criteria
Criteria C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
x *j 2.50 2.58 2.35 2.58 2.58
In the next steep the positive distance using Eq. (5) and Eq. (6), respectively.
from average d ij and the negative dis- The obtained results are shown in Tables 8
tance from average d ij are determined and 9.
Table 8 The positive distance from average
Criteria
Alternatives
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
A1 0.50 1.13 1.05 0.43 1.43
A2 0.00 0.00 0.65 0.00 0.43
A3 0.00 0.43 0.00 0.00 0.00
A4 1.50 0.00 0.00 1.13 0.00
Table 9 The negative distance from average
Criteria
Alternatives
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
A1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
A2 1.50 0.98 0.00 0.98 0.00
A3 0.50 0.00 0.35 0.58 0.58
A4 0.00 0.58 1.35 0.00 1.28

The weighted sum of positive distance lized values, S i and S i , are determined
from average, Qi , and the weighted sum using Eq. (9) and Eq. (10). Finally, the
of negative distance from average, Qi , appraisal score Si of considered alternatives
is calculated using Eq. (11).The mentioned
are calculated using Eq. (7) and Eq. (8),
values are shown in Table 10.
respectively; after which the their norma-
Table 10 Appraisal score and ranking order of the considered alternatives
Alternatives Qi Qi S i S i Si Rank

A1 0.93 0.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1
A2 0.21 0.71 0.22 0.00 0.11 4
A3 0.10 0.38 0.10 0.46 0.28 3
A4 0.51 0.65 0.55 0.09 0.32 2
As it can be seen from Table 9, the best [2] Harsanyi, J.C. (1995). Cardinal Wel-
ranked alternative is the alternative denoted fare, Individualistic Ethics, and Inter-
as A1. In other words, the truck transport is personal Comparisons of Utility. Jour-
chosen as the most suitable type of transport nal of Political Economy, 63(4), 309-
at the open pit mines, taking into account 321.
several criteria.
[3] Keshavarz Ghorabaee, M., Zavadskas,
CONCLUSIONS E. K., Olfat, L., & Turskis, Z. (2015).
Multi-Criteria Inventory Classification
A group of multi criteria decision ma- Using a New Method of Evaluation
king procedure for selecting the most suita- Based on Distance from Average Solu-
ble type of transport at the open pit mines is tion (EDAS). Informatica, 26(3), 435-
proposed in this paper. This procedure is 451.
based on the use of the EDAS method. The [4] Ghorabaee, M. K., Zavadskas, E. K.,
usability and efficiency of the proposed pro- Amiri, M., & Turskis, Z. (2016).
cedure is confirmed by the obtained results. Extended EDAS Method for Fuzzy
According to these results, in terms of safety Multi-Criteria Decision-Making: An
and quality, the truck transport was proved Application to Supplier Selection.
to be the most adequate. International Journal of Computers
It should be noted that the proposed cri- Communications & Control, 11(3),
teria can be replaced by other criteria, which 358-371.
is indicative of the fact that the proposed
[5] Stanujkic, D., Zavadskas, E. K.,
procedure is flexible and conve-nient for
solving the similar problems. Ghorabaee, M. K., & Turskis, Z.
(2017). An Extension of the EDAS
REFERENCES Method Based on the Use of Interval
Grey Numbers. Studies in Informatics
[1] Ignjatović, D. (2010) Machines and and Control, 26(1), 5-12.
Devices for Transport at the Open Pits,
Faculty of Mining and Geology, Bel-
grade, pp. 120 p (in Serbian)

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 622.35(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704145T
Dušan Tašić*, Dragan Ignjatović*, Lidija Đurđevac Ignjatović*, Slađana Krstić*
POSSIBILITY OF STONE USE FROM

THE QUARRY "BRESJE" IN JAGODINA AS
A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION STONE**
Abstract
In the period May-June 2017, the Laboratory for Geomechanics of the Mining and Metallurgy Insti-
tute Bor, performed the laboratory tests of natural stone from the quarry "Bresje" near Jagodina, as a
technical construction stone. Tests were carried out to the extent prescribed by the domestic regulations
in order to obtain an exploitation permit. The results of physical-mechanical, petrographic and chemi-
cal characteristics that allow or limit its use as a technical building stone are presented in this paper.
Keywords: quarry, Bresje, technical construction stone
INTRODUCTION
Test samples for physical and mechani- monoliths (taken from the main level and
cal laboratory tests, i.e. partial and complete the core of boreholes - Fig. 1) in the Labora-
analysis of the stone, were carried out on tory for Geomechanics. Ten partial and one
selected samples from boreholes and stone complete analysis were performed.
Figure 1 The appearance of the main level and taken samples for tests
*
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor, Zeleni bulevar 35, 19210 Bor, Srbija
**
This paper is the result of the Project No. TR 33021 “Research and Monitoring the Changes of the
Stress Strain State in the Rock Mass "In-Situ" around the Underground Rooms with Development of
Models with Special Reference to the Tunnel of the Krivelj River and Pit Bor", funded by the Ministry
of Education, Science and Technological Development of the Republic of Serbia

RESULTS AND ANALYSIS OF
PHYSICAL - MECHANICAL,
MINERAL - PETROGRAPHIC AND
CHEMICAL TESTS
Laboratory test results of stone sam- complete analysis in Table 1.

ples were summarized for the partial and
Table 1
Technical properties of stone from the quarry Value (medium)/
No.
"Bresje" near Jagodina parameters
MINERAL-PETROGRAPHIC COMPOSITION
1. Gneiss
SRPS B.B8.003
- in dry condition 129.76 [MPa]
UNIAXIAL COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH - saturated with
2. 117.51 [MPa]
SRPS B.B8.012 water
- after frost effect 138.50 [MPa]
WATER ABSORPTION
3. 0.319 [%]
SRPS B.B8.010
FREEZING TEST FOR NATURAL STONE
4. SRPS B.B8.001 steady
(loss of mass [%])
DENSITY
5. 2.648 [g/cm3]
SRPS B.B8.032
BULK DENSITY
6. 2.701 [g/cm3]
SRPS B.B8.032
POROUS
7. 1.70 [%]
SRPS B.B8.032
BULK DENSITY COEFFICIENT
8. 0.983
SRPS B.B8.032
VELOCITY OF LONGITUDINAL WAVES
9. 4407 [m/s]
SRPS EN 14579 (en)
TESTING OF NATURAL ROCK BY THE MACHINE "LOS
10. ANGELES" 22.50 [%]
SRPS B.B8.045
GRINDING RESISTANCE – BEME 10.328
11.
SRPS B.B8.015 [cm3/50 cm2]
CONTENTS
12. Cl- <10 - 18 [ppm]
(SRPS B.B8.042):
ANALYSIS OF TEST RESULTS

Detailed laboratory tests of natural
stone have determined the following:
a) Mineralogical-petrographic analysis
According to the genesis, the natural the lepidoblastic structure. Quartz, feld-
stone from the "Bresje" quarry near Jago- spar and biotite are observed macroscopi-
dina is a metamorphic rock - gneiss, slate cally on a fresh fracture (intersection) that
texture and granoblastic with elements of is a light gray. As a sign of surface effects,

reddish (limonized parts of the sample - The secondary minerals are epidote, coi-
Figure 2) were observed. The wall is made site and magnetite, and secondary miner-
of quartz, feldspar, biotite and muscovite. als chlorite, sericite and lemonite.
Figure 2 Fresh cross section of sample (binocular magnification 20X)
b) Physical properties
These parameters are defined over bulk (complete analysis), which meets the qual-
density with and without pore and cavities, ity requirements of technical stone accord-
porosity and water absorption. Density ranging to SRPS B.B2.009: 1986 standard.
es from 2.622-2.686 g/cm3, bulk density During the partial stone analysis, a
ranges from 2.648-2.826 g/cm3. Porosity significant deviation of pressure strength
from the complete analysis is 1.70%, which values of two samples was observed,
puts it in a stone of low porosity. Water ab- which is the only characteristic that does
sorption is in the range of 0.180-0.586 %, not follow the other good properties of the
which meets the quality requirements of stone in full measure. Nevertheless, the
technical stone according to SRPS average uniaxial compressive strength is
B.B2.009: 1986 standard. over 120 MPa (in dry state) and can be
estimated to be medium high.
c) Mechanical properties The results of abrasion resistance testing
Parameters are defined by the uniaxial results range from 8.315-15.520 cm3/50cm2.
compressive strength in a dry and water- According to the abrasion resistance value
saturated state and after the effects of frost (35 cm3/50cm2), the samples meet the re-
(for complete analysis), as well as through quirements according to SRPS B.B2.009:
abrasion resistance. 1986 standard.
Pressure in a dry state ranges from From the complete stone analysis, it can
111.71-181.97 MPa; in a saturated state it be seen that the result of testing stone on
goes within the limits of 80.54-171.81 resistance by Los Angeles machine is 22.50
MPa, and after the action of frost, the %, which is within the allowed limits ac-
pressure value of 138.50 MPa is obtained cording to SRPS B.B2.009: 1986 standard.

Based on the obtained value of the tions from the applicable standards, the
Bond working index Wi = 11.28 kWh/t, natural stone from the quarry "Bresje"
the conclusion is that it is a medium-sized near Jagodina can be used as a technical
raw material, or a raw material in which construction stone, that is, as a hydraulic
no high grinding resistance is expressed. construction stone - broken, semi-finished
and processed, the watercourses and all
a) Chemical characteristics
types of hydrotechnical facilities.
Based on the chemical analysis of the In the course of further use of this
stone, it was found that the level of total quarry, it is necessary to carry out more
sulfur and chloride, which could negative- detailed laboratory tests, especially in
ly influence the concrete preparation, far deeper parts of the deposit, due to the ob-
below the maximum allowed value. served decrease in mechanical properties
of t stone, which can be a limiting factor
CONCLUSION for further use.
According to the established results of REFERENCES

the investigation, it can be concluded that
the natural stone from the "Bresje" quarry [1] Report on Laboratory Testing of Stone
near Jagodina has good physical and me- from the Quarry "Bresje" Near
chanical properties. Jagodina as a Technical Construction
From the standpoint of technical petrog- Stone, Mining and Metallurgy Institute
raphy, the tested natural stone is suitable for Bor, Bor 2017 (in Serbian)
use in construction as a technical stone that [2] M. Ljubojev, R. Popović, Funda-
can be used as a constructive material in the mentals of Geomechanics, Mining and
raw or processed state. The properties that Metallurgy Institute Bor, Bor 2006 (in
limit the use of this stone are the result of Serbian)
mineral composition, structure and texture of [3] N. Popović, Exploitation and Proce-
tested natural stone (hardness about 7 by ssing of Stone, Academy of Engi-
Moss), which is not suitable for the produc- neering Sciences of Serbia, Belgrade
tion of aggregates for making layers of 1998 (in Serbian)
pavement structures. [4] D. Djukić, Geotechnical Classification
On the basis of a comprehensive anal- for Surface Works in Mining and
ysis of the results of laboratory tests and Construction, Mining Institute Tuzla,
in accordance with the technical condi Tuzla 2004 (in Serbian)

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 622.271/.33(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704149I
Dragan Ignjatović*, Lidija Đurđevac Ignjatović*, Dušan Tašić*, Milenko Ljubojev*
LANDFILL STABILITY ANALYSIS AT THE OPEN PIT “GACKO“,

BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA - REPUBLIC OF SRPSKA**
Abstract
This paper gives the stability analysis of the Western and Eastern external landfill at the Open
Pit Gacko, together with the problems that occurred during the last field visit.
Keywords: Western and Eastern external landfill, stability
INTRODUCTION
Long-term geological explorations The annual average of about 1,700,000

pointed to the fact that the Gatac field repre- tons of coal and 3,500,000 m3 of solid mass
sents a large coal basin, with the high quality is detected in the mine. As a part of con-
coal reserves that are economically exploita- struction the first block of the Thermal
ble. In accordance with developed invest- Power Plant Gacko I, a part of infrastructure
ment - technical documentation, the con- facilities was built, which will serve for the
struction of the energy complex of Mine and second phase of construction the Gacko II
Thermo Power Plant Gacko has begun in Thermal Power Plant.
1997. In 1982, in the area of the Western Coal reserves in the Gacko coal basin are
exploitation field, the "Gračanica" mine of of great importance in energy balances of
coal was put into operation, with the annual the Republic of Srpska. With the confirmed
balance sheet, the reserves of 338 million
capacity of 1.800.000 t of coal and
tones and off-balance reserves of 66 mil.
3.200.000 m3 of overburden. The OP "Gra-
tons, it can be concluded that Gacko coal
čanica" is limited by the regulated riverbeds
basin represents a stable source of energy for
of the river Gračanica from the east, Mušni- many years, both in the production of elec-
ca from the south and Gojković stream from tricity and for the needs of other sectors of
the west. consumption. A precondition for such coal
Since the beginning of the work at the treatment is the efforts to improve the quali-
OP "Gračanica", the technology of work has ty by selective excavation, homogenization,
been applied, which has achieved the satis- preparation and refinement, and expand the
factory results on the production of defor- field of coal use. Figure 1 shows a view of
estation and coal. the open pit.
*
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor, Zeleni bulevar 35, 19210 Bor, Srbija
**
This paper is the result of the Project No. TR 33021 “Research and Monitoring the Changes of the
Models with Special Reference to the Tunnel of the Krivelj River and Pit Bor", funded by the Ministry

Figure 1 Open Pit Gračanica and Thermo Power Plant
DEVELOPMENT PLANS
Planned investments in the following pe- the river basin of the Trebisnjica River,
riod relate to the necessary modernization of monitoring and remediation of negative en-
the plant and equipment of the Mine and vironmental impacts is an ongoing process,
Thermal Power Plant. First of all, this inclu- which will certainly be taken carefully with
des: the acquisition of new mining machin- necessary activities.
ery, expansion of ash dumps and landfills.
On the basis of confirmed lignite re- THE MAIN MINING DESIGN
serves, further construction of thermal power
plants in Gacko is planned. This primarily With the Main Mining Design of the
refers to the R&D "Gacko II", which would Gacko open pit, the method of coal exploita-
enable the energy potential of the Gacko tion, as well as the definition of tailings dis-
basin to be rounded up to a power genera- posal were defined in the entire century of
tion plant of 2 x 300 MW. exploitation.
In connection with the planned construc- Complete disposal will be done on the
tion of the TPP "Gacko II", the extensive external and internal landfills, as follows:
survey works were carried out and a com-  Outdoor landfill of the exploration
prehensive study was conducted on selection Field B,
the location of the second phase of the  Large exterior landfill (existing exter-
Gacko mine as well as the technical project nal landfill in the southwest of the
of the TPP "Gacko II". open pit - East and West external land-
One of the biggest carrier of the econom- fill),
ic and economy development of the region,  External landfill Gelja Ljut (new ex-
the Mine and Thermo Power Plant Gacko, ternal landfill to the south of the sur-
also have a greatest impact on the environ- face mine), and
ment of this part of region. Since this ther-  Internal landfill (excavated area of the
moenergetic source is located at the top of Gacko open pit - Central Field).

Projected external and internal landfills are shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2 Designed external and internal landfills
The following constructive parameters enormous amount of overburden and barren

have been adopted on the Large Outdoor rocks foreseen by the Main Mining Design
Landfill that is located on the current West (113,843,680 [* 1000 m3]), it is necessary to
and East Outer Landfill: the height of land- carry out the certain activities that will im-
fill 83 m, and the inclination angle of 13º. prove the geomechanical characteristics in
Constructive parameters were obtained as a order to satisfy the landfill stability, as well
result of fulfilling the minimum safety factor as the possibility of increasing the inclina-
for the characteristic final slopes of the land- tion angle, and thus reducing the soil degra-
fill. The safety factor, according to the legal dation to whom the revelation and devasta-
regulations for landfills, is Fs≥1,3. tion are postponed.
According to the last recording, it was
WESTERN EXTERNAL LANDFILL observed that the Western external landfill
has a big problem of separation and bursting
The disposal of overburden and barren of deposited mass due to the increasing
rocks in the Western Outdoor Landfill is weight of deposited mass and poor compac-
done by a system excavator-conveyor- tion, or planning with a help of auxiliary
spreader (known as BTO system). Due to an mechanization

Figure 3 View of the cracks in the landfill
Measurements were taken with a ma- part of the Western external Landfill (Fi-
nual corn penetrometer on the problematic gure 4).
Figure 4 Manual corn penetrometer

Figure 5 Measuring zones
The following cohesion values were The measurements confirmed that the
obtained at several measuring points in compactness of material, especially in the
three measuring zones (Figure 5): second and third areas, was poor, which led
- First zone - C = 38 to 42 kPa to the bursting of deposited masses. The
auxiliary machines are very little used. Such
- Second zone - C = 28 to 32 kPa
anomalies must be avoided to the maximum
- Third zone - C = 15 to 19 kPa due to the future Great External Landfill.
Figure 6 View of the Western External Landfill

CONCLUSION
Since these landfills (Western and East- [2] Main Mining Design of the Open Pit
ern Landfills) are the basis for formation of a Gacko – Central Field for the Capacity
large external landfill with great dimensions, of 2.3x106 t/year of Run-of-Mine Coal,
the requirements of geotechnical data are MMI Bor, DOO Zvornik, 2017 (in
higher. It is necessary to compress and plan Serbian)
material with the auxiliary mechanization. In [3] R. Popović, M. Ljubojev, L. Djur-
addition to this basic method of increasing djevac Ignjatović, Deformability Para-
the stability of the landfill, consideration is meters for Forming the Stress-Strain
given to examining two ways of increasing State Models of Rock Massif, Mining
geomechanical data using ash and slag from and Metallurgy Engineering Bor,
the thermal power plant. The way and meth- 3/2013, pp. 1-6
od of mixing with deposited material will be
[4] R. Popović, M. Ljubojev, Fundamen-
tested in the MMI laboratories. The applica- tals of Rock Demolition by the App-
tion of geotechnical data improvement is
lied Mechanization in the Exploitation
possible for all existing landfills.
of Solid Mineral Raw Materials, MMI
Bor, 2011 (in Serbian)
REFERENCES
[5] R. Popović, M. Ljubojev, Principles of
Problem Solving in Geomechanics,
[1] Project Study on Periodic Analysis on Bor, Copper Institute Bor, 2007 (in
Stability of Working Levels and Final Serbian)
Slopes at the Open Pits Gacko, MMI
Bor, DOO Zvornik, November 2017
(in Serbian)

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 622.271/.33(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704155S
Saša Stepanović*, Nikola Stanić*, Dejan Bugarin*, Miljan Gomilanović*
SELECTION THE OPTIMAL DEVELOPMENT OPTIONS OF

MINING OPERATIONS IN THE GACKO COAL BASIN
Abstract
For a concrete example of development the "Strategy of Mining-Technological Opening,

Development, Optimization and Maintenance the Continuos Coal Production with Introduction the
Process of Coal Enrichment of Dry Separation at the OP - GACKO", it is necessary to carry out the
ranking and evaluation the variant solutions and on the basis of fiven estimation to choose the optimal
solution for further development of the Open Pit Gacko. This work describes the process of ranking
and evaluation the variant solutions.
Keywords: multicriteria decision making, ranking, OP Gacko
INTRODUCTION PRODUCTION STRATEGY OF

COAL AT THE OP GACKO
Operating conditions at the OP Gacko
are very complex and expressed through the The strategy is a detailed assessment the
mining-geological, mining-technical and possible directions of development of the
techno-economic indicators. Open Pit Gacko with the required capacity
For an insight into the current issues and of 2.3 million tons, and speciefied quality.
future directions of development the open pit There are three variant solutions. The
coal mining in the Gacko coal basin, the variant solutions are analyzed in detail from
"Strategy of Mining - Technological Ope- optimization to developemtn of the open pit
ning, Development, Optimization and Main- by the required time periods.
tenance the Continuos Coal Production with For the purposes of the Strategy of
Introduction the Process of Coal Enrichment Mining - Technological Opening, Develop-
of Dry Separation at the OP - GACKO" was ment, Optimization and Maintenance the
made. The strategy has defined a number of Continuos Coal Production with Introduc-
ways of using the coal resources in order to tion the Process of Coal Enrichment of Dry
maintain a continuity of coal production for Separation at the OP - GACKO, a 3D geolo-
the needs of the Thermal Power Plant gical model of the coal deposit Gacko was
Gacko with achieving the desired economic, made. Data from 680 drill holes were used
social, environmental and other effects. in designing the 3D geological model.
*
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor – Department Coal Engineering Belgrade,
e-mail: sasa.stepanovic@irmbor.co.rs, nikola.stanic@irmbor.co.rs,
dejan.bugarin@irmbor.co.rs, miljan.gomilanovic@irmbor.co.rs
No. 1, 2017 155 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

Processing of the deposit began forming location of each drill hole is defined by the
the database of exploration drill holes. Some X, Y, Z co-ordinates, the final depth of each
files contain for each drill hole: the name of drill hole, lithological members were
drill hole, data on elevation, coordinates, determined in the process of mapping the
data on lithological members in geological drill hole core, and data on quality were
pillars of drill holes (which are relevant to obtained by laboratory analyses).
the assessment of position the seams in The coal deposit Gacko is presented by
separated geological environments), as well seamsof irregular shape. The deposit is
as data on the results of chemical analyses of constructed of four coal seams with seams
individual and composite tests. and thin seams of barren rocks between and
The all required data were reached in the within it. Therefore, each of these seams and
process of exploration drilling, as well as the and thin seams, either coal or overburden
carried out laboratory analyses (spatial was modeled as a separate seam (Table 1).
Table 1 Vertical division of deposit on coal seams and

thin seams in the 3D model of deposit
Name of seam Program seam name
A B
Roof zone-upper level U11
Roof zone-intermediate level U12
Roof zone-lower level U13
The main coal seam GUS1
The first floor coal seam PPUS1
The second floor coal seam DPUS1
Data about the terrain topography are The complexity of conditions, in which
also entered. Digitization is performed by the objects of mining the deposit Gacko are
AutoCAD software package. formed, is expressed through the spatial
Optimization of the open pit was done arrangement and structure of coal seams of
using the software for long-term strategic the basin Gacko, the parameters of coal
planning of the mine - "Whittle Fx". In addi- quality per individual coal sedries and, the
tion to the structural and qualitative chara- administrative division of the deposit into
cteristics, contained in a block model of the two exploitation exploration fields, the
deposit, the techno - economic parameters, Central and East, proximity of the town and
adopted on the basis of detailed analysis of infrastructure buildings on the northern
mining and market conditions, were also edge of the deposit and urban planning
used in optimization. purpose of the deposit area and immediate

surroundings. The aforementioned limiting The analysis of these variant solutions
factors in terms of the future coal mining included a detailed design of objects and
required a detailed analysis of a large parameters of mining systems, defined as the
number of variant solutions. One of the main techno-economic indicators, social-societal
goals of the Strategy development was also impact of mining on the environment and
to be based on the results of comparative degree of influence the mining activities on
analysis and application the methods of the environment.
optimization and strategic planning, to chose The overall variant solutions can be
the most favorable open pit, both from the described as follows:
economic and technological aspects. The first variant involves the formation
During the detailed consideration of of the open pit within the administrative
operating conditions, optimal contours of space limitations-the regulation line, prospe-
structures and mining stsrem, three real cting geological profile 55 and the existing
variant solutions were distinguished that works on excavation and disposal, with the
were analyzed in detail. annual capacity of 2.3∙106 tons of run-of-
mine coal;
Figure 1 Contour of the open pit - Variant 1
The second variant is represented by tons of run-of-mine coal, in order to create a

the open pit for excavation only the roof coal significant accumulation of financial assets
seams, with the annual capacity of 3.0∙106 for further development of the mine

Figure 2 Contour of the open pit - Variant 2
The third variant is a continuation of geological profile 55, with the annual
the first, but not limited by the prospecting capacity of 2.3∙106 tons of run-of-mine coal.
Figure 3 Contoru of the open pit - Variant3

As a suitable tool for selection the defined alternatives, and multi targeted
optimal variant of works development, the methods of decision making are more
method of scoring model was used from the suitable for solving the problems of plan-
group of multi-criteria decision making. ning the systems and processes that are
characterized by a higher number of ob-
METHOD OF MULTIU-CRITERIA jects, when theoretically there are an infi-
DECISION MAKING nite number of continuous. In the multi
targeded decision making (also known as
Making a choice is a study of identify- multi targeted programming or vector op-
ing and selecting an alternative in order to timization / maximization / minimization
find the best solution based on various of problems), the alternatives are not pre-
factors and in accordance with the expec- determined, but instead of a set of target
tations of those who make the choice. functions optimize the variables in the set
Every decision is made in the appropriate of constraints. The requirement is the op-
environment, which is defined as a set of timal and most efficient solution. In a sin-
available information, alternatives, values gle solution, it is not possible to improve
and settings (preferences). A complex the performances of any target, and that at
decision-making point is the number of the same time the other targets are not
criteria for evaluation of alternatives. The reduced. In the multiple attribute decision
objectives are usually conflicting, and in making, an avaluation of a small number
the most cases different groups are present of alternatives is carried out on the basis
from those who should make a decision. of a set of parameters that is often difficult
To facilitate this type of analysis, a set to quantify.
of tools known as the multi-criteria deci- Using the multi-criteria decision mak-
sion making methods is formed by the ing method is suitable for:
need to formalize the methods to aid in - Assessment and integration of multi-
decision making in situations involving ple factors in the function of objec-
multiple criteria. tive and transformation the quantita-
Methods of multiple-criteria decision tive and qualitative information in
making are a part of the overall field of the criteria and weighting factors,
operational research, and the models are - View the complex and heterogeneous
suitable for solving the complex problems criteria in a simple and understanda-
with a high degree of uncertainty, conflict- ble way, and therefore the results are
ing objectives, different types of data and clear to multiple recipients, regard-
information and aspects, and calculation less of specialty.
in complex and development-level sys- The advantage of this method is re-
tems such as biophysical and socio- flected in these two important aspects:
economic. This large class of methods is 1. The used criteria are evaluated and
further divided into multi targeted deci- given values are constant and compa-
sion-making and multi attribute decision rable with the initial data (as a meas-
making. These methodologies share the ure of convenience)
common features such as conflicting crite- 2. The simple form of the output values
ria, incommensurability units and com- makes the method clear and usable
plexity in the formation-choice of alterna- for various interested participants.
tives. The main difference between the
two sets of methods is based on the num- These methods can provide the solu-
ber of alternatives that are evaluated. The tions to increase the complex management
multi attribute decision making methods problems. They provide a better under-
were established for selection the clearly standing the specific characteristics in

defining the problem, emphasize the role 6. Ranking alternatives.
of participants in the decision making pro- Basic phases višekritetijumskog meth-
cess, allow a compromise and collective od of decision-making are:
decision and provide a good platform to
understand the model and analyst in a realis- 1. Define the problem, the formation
tic scenario. The methods help improvement of alternative and setting the criteria.
the quality of decision making just making Problem-making should start by a clear
the decision clearer, more rational and effi- definition of the problem, specifying the
cient. alternatives, identification of participants,
It should be noted that the methods objectives and possible conflicts with the
and results are not necessarily compara- limitations, degree of uncertainty and risk,
ble. Each of the methods has certain limi- and key issues. After this, the problem can
tations which mainly arise from the initial be supplemented by defining the criteria for
assumptions. Inconsistency can occur be- assessment.
cause: 2. Criteria for determining the weighting
- Formulation the problem of choice factors.
does not imply the same structure of Other steps include determining the
priorities, weighting factors of criteria. These weigh-
- A way of information processing on ting factors represent the set of relative
priorities differ from method to meth- measure of their importance in the method
od, and of multi-criteria decision making.
- Methods take differently into account
the weight criteria. 3. Formation of the evaluation matrix
At this stage, only the problem of mul-
Multiple-criteria decision making can be
ti-criteria decision making is defined by a
considered as a complex and dynamic pro-
way that enables the assessment of alter-
cess, including the management and engi-
natives. The model can be represented in
neering level. Management level defines the
the matrix form as
objectives, selection of the final optimal
alternative while engineering level defines Criteria: C1, C2, C3, ..., Cn
the possible alternatives, points out the con- Weights: W1, W2, W3, ..., Wn
sequences of the selection anyone of the Alternatives
possible alternatives in terms of different
 A1   x11 x12  x1n 
criteria and performs the multiple-criteria  A2   x
ranking of alternatives. The optimization    21 x 22  x 2 n 
procedure is performed at the engineering       
level.   
 Am   x m1 x m 2  x mn 
At the management level, the managers,
decision makers can accept or reject the where:
suggested solutions. The decision making xij - assessment of given alternative(s)
process usually involves five main stages: by the determined criterion,
1. Defining the problem wj - weighting coefficients by the de-
2. Formation and establishment of alter- termined criterion,
native criteria, n - number of criteria,
3. Determination the weight factor crite- m - number of alternatives.
ria, 4. Selection of appropriate methods
4. Evaluations, Multi-criteria methods can be selected
5. Selection of appropriate multi-criteria and applied to the problem in accordance
method, with the order of alternatives. Data and de

gree of uncertainity is a key factor for the Sj = value for alternative decision j
decision makers when choosing between the
The equation for calculating the value
multi-criterion methods.
Sj as follows:
5. Ranking alternatives
Finally, the alternatives are ranked, Sj = ∑i wi ∙ rij
and the best ranked one represents a solu-
Phase V
tion to the problem.
The order of selected alternatives from
METHODS OF EVALUATION the highest to the lowest value is at the same
AND RANKING THE VARIANT time ranking by the scoring model for alter-
SOLUTIONS native decisions. The decision is made for
an alternative with the highest number of
As a recommendation for future work of scores, and it is recommended for imple-
development the open pit, a selection of mentation.
scoring method was done. This widely ac- According to this method, the choice of
cepted expert method allows relatively development variants was carried out in five
quick and easy way to identify the best al- steps, wherein the first defines a list of crite-
ternative decisions. ria, the second defines the weighting criteri-
It is assumed that it is necessary to de- on, the third defines the measure of satisfac-
cide on one or more variants, in the specific tion level, the fourth defines a calculation
case of the three present variants of devel- alternative value for decision-making, and
opment the mining activities. the fifth is ranking of variants.
There are the following phases that are
necessary to set up the scoring models: Phase I: List of criteria
Phase I - Degree of utilization the available re-

serves,
Set a list of criteria that should be con- - Service life,
sidered. The criteria are important factors - Quality of supplied coal,
for evaluation of every decision. - Investments,
- Net present value of the project.
Phase II
Phase II
Determine the weight of each criterion
that indicates its relative importance: A scale is used for determining the
wi = weighting criteria i weight, depending on the criterion validity,
and in the specific case, since the five-point
Phase III scale is used for selected list of criteria.
Determine each criterion measure that Importance Weight (wi)
shows how well each alternative meets Very important 5
each criterion:
rij = criteria and measures i for deci- Somewhat important 4
sion j Moderate important 3
Somewhat unimportant 2
Phase IV Very unimportant 1
Calculate the value for each alternative Thus, for the selection of variants de-
decision: fined in Table 2.

Table 2 Criterion of decision making, importance and weight of criteria
Order
Criterion Importance of Weight
No.
Degree of utilization the available
1 Somewhat unimportant 2
reserves
2 Service life Somewhat important 4
3 Quality of supplied coal Medium important 3
4 Investments Somewhat important 4
5 Net present value of the project Very important 5
Phase III:
Each alternative of decision is evaluated selection the possible variants, thefollowing
in terms of satisfaction of each criterion. For levels of satisfaction have been selected:
Level of satisfaction Measure (rij)

Extremely high 9
Very high 8
High 7
Almost a high 6
Medium 5
Almost low 4
Low 3
Very low 2
Extremely low 1
The calculation process must be com- tives for decision making (5 x 3 = 15), the
pleted for each combination of decisions measure 15 is obtained for alternative de-
for alternative for each criterion. Since cisions that are given in the following Ta-
there are five criteria and three alterna ble 3.
Table 3 Measures for making the alternative decisions
Criterion Variant 1 Variant 2 Variant 3

Degree of utilization the available reserves 4 5 7
Service life 4 3 6
Quality of supplied coal 8 5 6
Investments 2 4 2
Net present value of the project 5 8 8

Phase IV
It is necessary, according to the given Sj = ∑i wi ∙ rij = 2∙4+4∙4+3∙8+4∙2+5∙3 = 75
weight, to calculate the value of each alter- Based on the determined values, the val-
native for decision - making. Thus, for ex- ues of alternatives for decision-making are
ample, for alternative 1, its value is: obtained, which are given in Table 4.
Table 4 Values of alternatives for decision-making

Variant 1 Variant 2 Variant 3
Weight
Criterion Measure Value Measure Value Measure Value
(wi) (ri1) (wi*ri1) (ri2) (ri3) (wi*ri3) (wi*ri2)
Degree of
utilization of 3 4 12 5 15 7 21
available reserves
Service life 4 4 16 3 12 6 24
Quality of
3 8 24 5 15 6 18
supplied coal
Investments 4 2 8 4 16 2 8
Net present value
5 5 25 8 40 8 40
of the project
Total value o 85 98 111
Phase V: Ranking
1. Variant 3 = 111 field. This includes the provision of appro-
2. Variant 2 = 98 priate legal permits to perform the exploita-
3. Variant 1 = 85 tion of the entire area of the basin.
Based on the scoring method and ob- However, bearing in mind:
tained ranking of variants, it is necessary, - the current state of coal mining in the
as optimal, to adopt the Variant 3, that area of the Gacko coal basin,
satisfies the all production and economic - the necessary amounts and quality of
criteria according to all techno-economic coal supplies for thermal power plant,
parameters in the best way. - the available time necessary for the
When considering the variants, the provision of legal conditions for con-
statutory-legal conditions were not used as a tinuation of exploitation for the pur-
criterion which will be used for future mi- pose of stable supply of the thermal
ning. This was done in order that the con- power plant with fuel (period of va-
sidered variants could be compared on the lidity of the existing Supplementary
basis of objective technical-economic pa- and Simplified Mining Project), and
rameters, without taking into account the - readiness of the study, design and
formal-legal framework of mining on the other necessary technical documenta-
relevant area. tion,
From this aspect, it is important to note it is certain that in the future, and in a very
that mining by the preferred variants 2 and 3 short period of time, an appropriate legal
would be developed in the area both of the framework for coal exploitation can be
Central and Eastern exploration-exploitation provided exclusively for the area of the

Central exploration-exploitation field. In - a number of methods enable combin-
this way, the current development of mi- ing the preferences of many experts
ning activities in the area of the Gacko and the qualitative and quantitative
coal basin is limited to Variant 1. types of criteria are applicable.
Based on the possibility of providing The necessary condition for successful
the legal requirements for development of application of these methods is to provide
exploitation, it is clear that in the imme- the accurate and complete information
diately upcoming period, development of about the nature of project, and values of
mining activities must be carried out wit- parameters by individual alternatives and
hin the framework of the Central field, criteria.
and according to Variant 1. Considering
the techno - economical parameters, and REFERENCES
evaluation the rank of the considered vari-
ants, it is necessary to focus the following [1] Strategy – Mining - Technological
activities to provide the conditions for Opening, Development, Optimization
implementation Variant 3, which realizes and Maintenance the Continuity of
the most favorable economic, but also Coal Production with Introduction the
social and other effects. Process of Coal Enrichment of Dry
Separation OP - GACKO, Book 1,
CONCLUSION MMI Bor, Bor, 2015 (in Serbian)
[2] Introduction to Decision Making
Application the method of multi-criteria Methods. Working Paper 05-6, Fülöp
decision making in selection the optimal Janos, Laboratory of Operations
alternative, in the cases of complex techno- Research and Decision Systems, Com-
economic projects (or system), provides a puter and Automation Institute,
number of advantages which are reflected Hungarian Academy of Sciences,
primarily in the following: Budapest, November 2005.
- substantially avoids the subjectivity [3] Multi Criteria Analysis in the Rene-
when deciding on selection the best wable Energy Industry, San Cristobal
alternative, Mateo, Jose Ramon, University of
- the results of evaluation and ranking Cantabria, Springer, London, 2012.
the alternatives are clear decision- [4] Strategic Decision Making, Kathleen
maker regardless of whether they have M. Eisenhardt, Mark J. Ybaracki,
the specific knowledge related to the Strategic Management Journal, Vol.
technical, technological and other so- 13, Special Issue: Fundamental
lutions which are solved within the Themes in Strategy Process Research,
engineering part of considering the pg. 17-37, John Wiley & Sons, New
problems, York, 1992.
- ranking of alternatives presented by [5] Multi-Criteria Analysis: A Manual,
numerical value provides better un- Department for Communities and
derstanding the results, Local Government, London, 2009.

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 622.271:504.06(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704165M
Miomir Mikić*, Radmilo Rajković*, Milenko Jovanović*,

Miroslava Maksimović*
THE IMPACT OF BLASTING ON

THE ENVIRONMENT IN THE OPEN PIT MINING**
Abstract
In the open pit mining of mineral raw materials, blasting, whose role is to break the undisturbed
mass for easier loading, is the necessary technological phase. In the mass blasting at the open pits of
metal ore, there is a rise of cloud composed of gases and dust, blasting mining products, which have
negative effects on the surrounding environment. This work presents the calculations of a cloud size,
concentration of gases and dust in blasting.
Keywords:
INTRODUCTION
Development of a modern society is the effects or completely neutralize them, are

based on the need to fill the demand for applied in mining.
goods and services, so the industry has to
evolve and adapt, to be able to secure and 1 EXPLOITATION OF MINERAL
market these products (Kogel et al., 2006). RAW MATERIALS AND
The first step in this process is the supply POTENTIAL EFFECT ON
of raw materials for further processing and THE ENVIRONMENT
transformation. In fact, mining could be-
come one of the major forces in the global Exploitation of mineral raw materials
economy, which takes a vital position in consists of several technological phases,
the supply chain of raw materials (Jorge which for the ultimate goal have the extrac-
Castilla-Gómez, et al, 2015). In this scenar- tion of mineral raw materials from the
io, mining is facing one of the biggest chal- Earth's crust to be available for further pro-
lenges that can arise in any industrial activi- cessing.
ty. It is the exploitation of mineral raw mate- Technological phases in the exploi-
rials from the Earth's crust, and in doing so, tation of mineral resources are:
no negative effects on the environment are  Drilling
created. Since this is hardly feasible in prac-  Blasting
tice, certain protective measures that reduce  Loading
*
**
This work is the result of the Project No. TR33021 “Research and Monitoring the Changes of the
Models with Special Reference to the Tunnel of the Krivelj River and Pit Bor" funded by the Ministry

 Transport stable detonation oxides, which occur in all
 Disposal three aggregate states, mostly in the form of
 Crushing gases and dust. The type of detonation prod-
 Processing of mineral raw materials uct that will appear depends on:
 characteristics of explosives, that is,
Regarding the potential impact on the
the chemical composition of compone-
environment, the development of mining
nts from which the explosive is made
activities has certain characteristics compa-
red to other types of work/activities. Envi-  method of patronizing the explosive
and chemical composition of packa-
ronmental and social impacts are diverse and
ging materials
sometimes last long after the completion of
all mining activities. Therefore, the ecologi-  method of initiation and flow the
cal impact of mining must be carefully asse- chemical reaction of explosive decom-
ssed at an early stage of the mining project. position that depends on the initiation
The actions and resources needed to mitigate impulse, rock hardness, blasting tech-
niques, age of explosives, rock temper-
potential impacts have to be also evaluated
ature, humidity, etc.
after the completion of mining activities
(Christmann et al., 2007).  chemical composition of rocks that are
Unlike the other industries, mining does blasted and percentage content of mat-
not jeopardize the location of activities/ ter in them that can enter into the
chemical reaction with explosives dur-
works, as there is no possibility to choose
ing blasting, or appear as a product of
locations for formation the deposits of mine-
rock destruction.
ral raw materials. However, the mining com-
pany (Investor) can change the mining met- The quantity of gases produced during
hod by open pit mining with some method blasting at the open pits is about
of underground mining in order to better 1000 dm3/kg of explosives. In gaseous mi-
preserve the natural resources in a given ning products, the toxic gases are also en-
area, or even to minimize certain types of countered, such as: carbon monoxide, sulfur
impact to the environment (ELAW, 2010). dioxide, nitrogen oxides, sulfur dioxide, and
The potential impacts of a certain tech- others depending on the blasting conditions.
nological phase in mining to the environ- In the case of mass-blasting at the open
ment depend on a wide range of local factors pit, a cloud of gas and dust is formed, wind-
such as the nature of ore and rock mass, borne polluting the wider environment of the
geological and geotechnical parameters, open pit, or in inversion of the atmosphere
extraction methods, generated and natural of the open pit endangers work of workers
waste (solid, liquids or gases) and nature and on the site at the open pit. When detonating
vulnerability of local components of the explosives, a part of gases reaches the at-
environment. mosphere (about 50%), the second part
(about 20%) is absorbed by the blasting
2 BLASTING mass, and the third (about 30%) fills the
pores, cracks and empty spaces in the rock
In blasting, i.e. detonation of explosives
mass, from which it stands out during loa-
and explosive mixtures results in a rapid
ding and contaminates the working envi-
change of state the unstable chemical com-
ronment at the open pit.
ponents of explosives and transition to more

3 VOLUME OF A CLOUD OF GASES
AND DUST FORMED AFTER
BLASTING
Volume of a cloud of gases and dust where:

formed after blasting at the open pits can be  A - amount of explosives used for
determined on the basis of theoretical and blasting in the minefield of the open pit
empirical formulas (M. Miljković et al., (kg),
1998). The volume of a cloud composed of  b - amount of gases released in deto-
toxic and congested gases of blasting pro- nation one kilogram of explosive, Ta-
ducts is increased due to the temperature of ble 1 (dm3),
explosive detonation T, and amounts (M.  T - temperature of gaseous products af-
Miljković et al., 1998): ter blasting. It is initially very high
(about 1000°C) and then rapidly de-
t , dm (1) creases to the ambient air tempe-rature.
Table 1 Amounts of gases realized in detonation of 1kg of explosives
Amounts of Vig , dm3/kg and % and toxic gases

Type of explosive
CO NO2
Total
dm3/kg % dm3/kg %
Amonex-1 963 21.30 2.20 2.30 0.24
AN-FO mixture 890 11.00 1.20 1.80 0.20
Majdanit 10 980 20.00 2.00 3.10 0.31
Average 994 17.40 1.80 2.40 0.25
3.1 Blasting Parameters at

the Open Pit Veliki Krivelj in Bor
Dusty-gas cloud in blasting occurs in The mass blasting method is applied at

three phases as follows: the open pit Veliki Krivelj. The average con-
 outbreaking or ejection from the sumption of explosive amount per borehole
borehole, in a series for AN-FO explosive is 504 kg.*
 loosening, crushing, demolishing, ini- The cloud volume is composed of toxic
tiating and moving of massif, and fi- and congested gases of blasting products and
nally throwing and falling of blasted dusts increased for temperature of explosion
mass, and detonation T, and calculated for the follo-
 under the influence of air strikes and wing blasting series:
seismic earthquakes.
*
Supplementary Mining Design for Excavation
and Processing of Copper Ore in the deposit
”Veliki Krivelj” for a capacity of 10.6 x 106
tons of wet ore – Technical Design for Mining,
MMI Bor, 2011.

 Vt = 1 930 615.38 dm3 1 i
i ,m (3)
(for a series of blasting of 2100 kg of t
explosive) Cig = 78%

 Vt = 4 596 703.29 dm3 Table 1 gives data on formation the
(for a series of blasting of 5000 kg of certain toxic gases for explosives used for
explosive), blasting at the open pit.
 Vt= 45 967 032.96 dm3 The resulting cloud after blasting and
(for a series of blasting of 50000 kg of decomposition of explosives, besides the
explosive), gaseous products, also contains a large
amount of dust. The total amount of dust
The amount of toxic gases in the form of
that rises with the cloud of gaseous products
gaseous products of blasting depends upon
after detonation of explosives according to
the specific formation of toxic gases by de-
the forecast is (M.Miljković et al., 1998):
tonation the certain types of explosive
(dm3/kg), Table 1, and it is determined on .1 9 a
,k s (4)
the basis of formula (M. Miljković et al, t
1998): where:
i  I - total amount of dust that rises
i ,m (2) with the cloud of gaseous products af-
1
where: ter detonation of explosives is a dust

emission within a time interval of 10 to
 A - amount of explosives used for blas- 40 seconds,
ting in the minefield of the open pit  a - specific consumption of explosives
(kg), (kg/m3) of blasted rock mass a= A/Vb,
 Vig - amount of gases released in deto-  Vb - volume of a block on a level that
nation one kilogram of explosive, Ta- is blasted.
ble 1 (dm3),
I = 186.98 kg/s
The initial amount of a certain toxic
The direction, range and concentration of
gas in the form of gaseous blasting pro-
air pollution in the environment due to the
ducts is:
occurrence of dust cloud depend on the
 Qig = 1 869 m3 ground configuration and air flow. If it is
(for a series of blasting of 2100 kg of blasted when the southeast wind blows, the
explosive) blasting pollution has a direction of moving
 Qig = 4450 m3 towards the village Veliki Krivelj (very rare-
(for a series of blasting of 5000 kg of ly). If the wind is from the northwest direc-
explosive), tion, the blasting pollution is directed to-
wards the flotation tailing dump Veliki
 Qig = 44500 m3 Krivelj.
(for a series of blasting of 50000 kg of
explosive). 4 CONCLUSION
Concentration of i-th gas in volumetric
percentages in the cloud of gaseous blas- On the basis of presented amounts of
ting products amounts to (M. Miljković et gases and dust in blasting at the open pit
Veliki Krivelj, the gaseous blasting products
al., 1998):

and raised dust threaten the environment by International October Conference on
dangerous concentrations of gases and har- Mining and Metallurgy-Proceedings,
mful dust. On the basis of this, it can be es- Serbia, 2014, 545-549.
tablished that a direct impact on the envi- [7] M. Mikić, D. Kržanović, R. Rajković.
ronment due to the wind rose has on the Effect of Exploitation at Social
surrounding village of Veliki Krivelj. In Community, and Other Public Facili-
order to deal with it, it is necessary to take ties in Zone of Open Pit Južni Revir in
the appropriate protection measures as early Majdanpek, Mining 2012, Privredna
as possible in order to eliminate the sub- Komora Srbije, 397-402.
sequent negative effects. [8] M. Mikić, R. Rajković, D. Kržanović.
Recultivation of Degraded Area at the
REFERENCES Open Pit Južni Revir in Majdanpek,
Mining 2012, Privredna Komora
[1] Kogel J.E., Trivedi N.C., Barker J. M., Srbije, 491-499 (in Serbian)
Krukowski S. T., Industrial Minerals [9] R. Rajković, M. Bu arin, . Marin-
Rocks: Commodities, Markets, and ković: Sta ility nalysis of the ailin
Uses, Seventh Ed. SME-Society for Dump “Oštreljski planir” of the Open
Mining, Metallurgy and Exploration, Pit “Bor” in a Function of Draina e,
2006, ISBN 978-0-8733523-38. Mining and Metallurgy Engineering
[2] Jorge Castilla-Gómez, Juan Herrera- Bor, 3/2013, pp. 57-64 (in Serbian)
Herbert, Environmental Analysis of [10] M. I njatović, S. njatović, M. Ne o-
Mining Operations: Dynamic Tools for vanović, R. Rajković, L. Djurdjevac
Impact Assessment - Minerals Engi- njatović, D. njatović: Determi-
neering 76 (2015) 87–96, 2015 nation of the Final Slope Angle of the
[3] Christmann P., Arvanitidis N., Martins Open Pit Mine During Exploitation of
L., Recoché G., Solar S., Towards the Oil Shale from Aleksinac Deposit
Sustainable Use of Mineral Resources: During GeoStudio2007 - SLOPE/W
A European Geological Surveys Program; TTEM - Technics Technoo-
Perspective. Miner. Energy – Raw gies Education Management 2011/3;
Mater. Rep. 22 (3–4), 2007, 88–104. pp. 615 – 621.
[4] Environmental Law Alliance World- [11] M. njatović, R. Rajković, B. Rajko-
wide ELAW, 2010. Guidebook for vić, D. Milanović, M. Popović: Sta i-
Evaluating Mining Project EIAs, lity nalysis off Open Pit “Pro o-
Eugene, OR 97403 USA. ISBN: 978- relica“ y the Bishop Method and Pro-
0-9821214-36. gram Plan Failure Analysis; II Interna-
[5] M. Miljković, Z. Stojković, The tional Symposium “Minin 11“
Impactof the Open Pit Mining of Metal Mining Presents State and Future
Ore on the Ecological Factors of the Prospects and Sustainable Develop-
Environment, Monography, Bor 1998. ment; rnjačka anja 1 – 13 May
(in Serbian) 2011; pp. 599 – 603.
[6] . postolovski rujić, M. Mikić, . [12] R. Lekovski, M. Mikić, D. Kržanović;
asić, ir uality Control in the Area The Impact of the Flotation Tailing
of Environmental Influence, The 46th Dumps on the Environment of Bor and

Protective Measures; Mining and Open Mine South Mining District -
Metallurgy Engineering Bor, 2/2013, Majdanpek Impact on the Environment
pp. 107-116 and Protective Measures, Mining and
[13] M. Mikić, D. Kržanović, M. Jova- Metallurgy Engineering Bor 3/2015,
nović, M. Maksimović: Review of the pp. 1-16

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 622.343./.349:622.7:504.06(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704171S
Marko Savić*, Milan Milojević*, Nikola Pavlović*, Miloš Milanović*
SOURCES OF POLLUTION IN LEAD - ZINC CONCENTRATE

PRODUCTION IN THE FLOTATION PLANT
“KOPAONIK“ – LEPOSAVIĆ
Abstract
The aim of this paper is to monitor the operation of the Flotation Plant Kopaonik - Leposavić, where
the technological process of flotation of lead - zink ore is carried out, with special reference to the
sources of pollution created during in the given technological process. The pollution caused by the
technological process of lead-zinc ore flotation in the Flotation Plant "Kopaonik" Leposavić can be
divided into three groups: water pollution, soil pollution and air pollution. This work wants to
emphasize the importance of mining production sustainable development in near future, strengthening
of ecological awareness, development of ecological volunteer activities and implementation of more and
more stringent environmental standards. The constant increase in the cost of protection to date is a
consequence of continuous improvements of both legal regulations and general ecological awareness.
Keywords: concentrate, exploitation, pollution, regulation
1 INTRODUCTION
The Flotation Plant is located in Leposa- Not far from Leposavic, on the main
vić, which, together with the mines Crnac, road for Kosovska Mitrovica, there is a
Belo Brdo, Žuta Prlina and Koporić, com- settlement called Socanica, where the
poses the working organization Kopaonik remains of the ancient Roman city are loca-
within the Trepča combine. ted, as well as the remains of the smelter,
The mines Belo Brdo, Žuta Prlina and which talks on development of mining at
Koporić were opened in the places with the that time, as well as that this area is rich in
same names on the slopes of the Kopaonik ore resources. The Flotation Plant in Leposa-
mountain, on the right bank of the Ibar Riv- vic is located so that it can receive the entire
er. The Crnac mine was opened in the place production from all four processing mines.
carrying the same name on the Rogozna The Flotation Plant has a plant for the
mountain on the left bank of the Ibar River. primary ore crushing from the mine Crnac,
The traces of the mining carried out in the while the plants for the primary ore crushing
past are still visible in all these locations. A from other mines have been built in those
well-preserved branch of the old city water mines themselves. The Flotation Plant has
pipeline was found in the village of Crnac, two sections for selective flotation of lead
which talks for itself about the intensity of and zinc minerals. The processing capacity
mining. is 1300 tons per day, or 27 tons per hour.
*
High Economic School of Vocational Studies Peć-Leposavić, e-mail: savic22@yahoo.com;
e-mail: mikan89@live.com; e-mail: nikpayu@yahoo.com; e-mail: mmailanovic30@gmail.com

2 ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION
WITH LEAD AND ZINC AND
HARMFUL EFFECT OF LEAD ON
HUMAN BEINGS
Due to the biological effects and high production of cadmium is linked to the
levels of presence, lead is one of the most production of zinc. The total zinc content in
important heavy metals. In the lithosphere, it the soil ranges from 5 to 1000 mg/kg [2].
is present in a form of lead minerals, which The soil formed on the base rocks
are galenite, (RbS), and anglesite, (RbSO4). contains more zinc compared to the soil
The metallurgical process of lead production formed on the acid rocks. Low solubility in
belongs toa group of dirtiest technologies, water is characteristic of carbonates, oxides
since dangerous substances are released and sulfides, which contributes to the low
during the lead production in a form of concentration of zinc in natural water (0.01-
gases, dust (containing Rb, As, etc.), tailings 0.05 mg/l). The increased concentration of
and wastewater with high lead content, zinc in water is most often caused by the
resulting in contamination of the soil, industrial pollution, from mining water that
surface and underground water. are characteristic for zinc-rich mines, which
In surface and underground water, lead can lead to an increase in zinc concentration
is found in concentrations up to 0.04 mg/l, in water, up to 50 g/l. Due to the usage of
while the maximum permissible concen- galvanized pipes and containers in the water
tration in drinking water is 0.005 mg/l [1]. pipe systems, the zinc content in water is
Lead has the ability to accumulate in surface often increased. The maximum permi-
layers of soil, where it is predominantly ssible content of zinc in drinking water is
organically bound. It is transported through 3 mg/l, [1].
the soil most often in the form of soluble
chelate complexes. 3 WATER POLLUTION
In addition to the building sulfides, lead
can be adsorbed to sulfides of other metals, All mining plants and facilities, active or
and it has been shown that widespread iron not, pollute the environment, especially the
sulphides, pyrite (FeS2) and mackinawite surrounding water courses. This pollution
(FeS) serve as lead, mercury, cadmium and can be physical and chemical. The content
zinc substrates. Lead is a systemic poison, of hazardous and harmful substances in
which means that once it enters the body, it water depends on the primary source of
is transmitted through the whole body, pollution, that is, the volume and content
disrupting the health of a person. of hazardous and harmful substances in
In the Earth's crust, there is about a them.
hundred times more zinc than copper (about The primary sources of water course
0.001%). The main ores are sphalerite (ZnS) pollution can be: surface mines, under-
and smithsonite (ZnCO3), used for zinc pro- ground mines, flotation plants, separations,
duction. The less represented ores are: flotation and separation tailings, deposits of
zincite (ZnO), franklinite (Zn (Fe9Mn2O4)) coal, ash and ore, transport systems, etc.
and vilemite (Zn2SiO4). Sphalerite always Polluted water can be surface, underground
contains some cadmium (II) sulphide, so the and mine water, or processing water (waste

water). Polluted water then enters the nearby Water courses in the mining plant zone
water courses. are polluted long after the end of active
There are other pollutants in the Ibar exploitation, unless the appropriate reme-
River Basin, and it is often a problem to diation measures are taken.
define a share of mine pollution in the total
scope of pollution. Also, the water tests Pollution of watercourses at the
upstream and downstream of the pollution preparation stage of mineral resources
site should be done as a control tool. As a result of the preparation of mineral
resources, the organic substances (phenols,
Pollution of water courses at the etc.) appear as pollutants in the surface
exploitation stage of mineral resources watercourses. Furthermore, by drainage of
At the stage of mineral resources water from the processes related to the
exploitation, which involves excavation, preparation of mineral resources, there is a
loading, transport, unloading and disposal, greater or lesser emergence of toxic substan-
the water is polluted more or less, and then ces (phenols, cyanides, heavy metal salts,
is transferred to the surrounding water heavy metals, etc.).
courses and continues to spread further to Toxic reagents, pyrite pyridines (cyani-
larger water courses. The pollution of water des) are still used in some flotations, and
that is transferred from the mine to the despite the introduction of closed return
natural hydrographic forms can occur due to water systems, a part of the harmful sub-
the following reasons: separation of hazar- stances reach the nearby watercourses
dous substances from the deposit when anyway.
contacted with water; physical blurring of Tailings, associated with the preparation
water courses due to small particles released of mineral raw materials, are large water
into water; erosion of internal landfills; polluters. The flotation tailing dumps over-
release of waste solids into water; release load the soil and, in addition to violation of
of oil, lubricants and other oil derivatives legislation, contaminate the surface and
into water; mixing of water from the repo- underground water.
sitory of waste water with running water The flotation tailing dump Gornji Krnjin
and so on. - Leposavic is located near Leposavic
Pollution of water courses is characte- settlement, right on the Ibar river bank. The
ristic for the periods of increased precipi- tailings from the lead- zinc ore preparation
tation and snow melting when eroding acti- plant is hydraulically driven to the tailing
vities are increased. This problem is parti- dump, where the solid and liquid phase of
cularly present in the landfill area, where the tailings is separated by sedimentation.
significant amounts of waste and tailings in The tailing dump was active from 1970
the form of sand and silt go into the water, to 1985. The surface of tailing dump is about
later releasing numerous substances that 7 ha and about 2,600,000 tons of waste is
alter the natural mineral composition of deposited on it. The chemical composition
water. It is estimated that more than 40% of tailing dump is: Pb = 0.36%, Zn = 0.33%
of heavy metals have come into the water and Fe = 22%. In 1985, a new tailing dump
due to the erosion processes of such was built in the immediate vicinity of the old
landfills. one, and was named "Bostanište".

Figure 1 Photo of the 'Bostanište' tailing dump
The flotation tailing dump in Leposavic saturated with heavy metals, flow into the
has a dual effect on water pollution. Firstly, watercourses of the respective reception
the life and growth of flora and fauna in the areas. The harmfulness that can be caused
river, in river bed, but also on the river by devastation is acomplete destruction of
banks, are directly affected physically and the plant and animal world in the Ibar River
chemically by the uncontrolled deposition of basin, endangering objects and settlements
flotation waste or in case of accidents. downstream from the tailing dump and
Secondly, through groundwater, the aqueous permanent contamination of soil and wells
solutions from a flotation-tank lake, usually in the flooded area [2] with heavy metals.
Table 1 Physical-chemical parameters of the Ibar downstream of

Kosovska Mitrovica (mg/l) (2016). [3]
Tested Lowest values Highest values Most frequent

parameters values
rN value 6,8 7,7 7,2 – 7,6
Chlorides, Sl- 12 28 16 – 24
Ammonia <0,02 0,3 – 0,1
Nitrite 0,1 0,9 – 0,3
Nitrates 5 <80 15 – 30
Iron <0,01 0,9 0,1 – 0,5
Sulphates 0,02 12,6 2,8 – 5,9
Phosphates 0,0324 1,2 0,3 – 0,7
Calcium 52,6 79 55 – 69

Graph 1 Graphical illustration of the Ibar River water quality (2016) [3]
4 SOIL POLLUTION
Soil contamination is primarily expre- separation, deposition of tailings, mining

ssed by filling the tailings (the rest of the waters, etc.
mineral ore mixed with phase rocks) to the The subsidence of dust from the air is a
fertile soil, and then by penetration the consequence of large concentration of dust
remnants of reagents used in the process of in the air created by mining operations. Dust
ore refining. Thus, the fertile arable land created by blasting, moving vehicles, trans-
becomes completely and permanently degra- portation to other areas, etc., is spread
ded, i.e. uncultivable. Furthermore, the de- around by air movement in the vicinity of
posit of the flotation tailings creates the mines, and it sets down on the ground. The
industrial waste that changes the relief of surface of the land has been inevitably
soil, by its formation, whereas in the second changed in the vicinity of mines where the
phase, it is a source of small fractions of exploitation has been taking place for a long
infertile pollutants, which cover the surroun- period of time. Flotation tailings have their
ding fields, thus turning the fertile soil into - negative impact on the surrounding land
infertile, sterile over time. mainly through the water that washes away
Contamination of soil near mining the tiny waste and deposits as sludge or sand
facilities is most often done with the help of on the surfaces in the immediate vicinity.
fluids (water and air). Also, in this case it is possible to pollute
This means that the transport of conta- a wider environment by deposition of fine
minated materials is carried out with help of dry particles blown from the tailings by the
them, that is, they must first come into a wind. Pollution of the surrounding land can
contact with contaminated materials. [4] lead to reduction of yields on land in several
The primary soil contaminants are: ways, and the impact will last several years
mining plants for exploitation, flotation and after the exploitation of tailings has ceased.

There are many heavy metals in the long-term damage to the environment and
flotation tailings, which are not separated as the living world, including people.
a concentrate during the flotation process. During the exploitation process of
The average content of these metals is mineral raw material deposits, the under-
different in the mixture of tailings and water ground watercourses are crossed and there is
in a ratio of 1:10, but it has concentration of an increased inflow of water into the mines.
10 to 20 times higher than the allowed one. This water is collected into water collectors
The penetration of this tailings into the and taken by pumps or by gravitation out of
surrounding land can result in multiple and the mine.
Table 2 Report on the soil quality control from the Flotation

Plant in Leposavic [3]Measuring location: Tailing dump
Tailing dump
Pb (%) 0.38
Zn (%) 0.21
Cu (%) 0.001
Cd (%) 0.0002
Fe (%) 5.02
Ca (%) 3.83
Mg (%) 2.02
Passing through the layers of ore and Both groups of pollutants are very present in
rocks, the water reacts chemically and be- mining.
comes a solution. This is especially chara- Exploitation of mineral raw materials is
cteristic for mines of metal mineral raw carried out by destruction of massif, and
materials where aggressive water is formed fragmentation of particles to dimensions
containing a lot of harmful substances. This smaller than one millimeter, even microns,
water is sometimes taken to the water- occurs in this process. This dust goes into
courses, and thus they have a detrimental the air and spreads through the air in
effect on the surrounding land.. surroundings.
The drilling phase, crushing and further
5 AIR POLLUTION shredding of the material result in a for-
mation of potentially dangerous mineral
Air pollution during preparation phase of dust. Using water when drilling partially
mineral resources exploitation occurs in alleviates this problem, but there are addi-
almost all technological phases. Somewhere tional problems if there are clay primers in
this pollution is particularly visible, but drilled rocks.
frequently is difficult to notice pollution, Air pollution by gas is present in the
which does not mean that it is less harmful. operation of diesel-powered equipment and
The most frequent air pollution occur in: the oxidation tailings and coal depots. Diesel
drilling and mining of surface mines, opera- equipment is mostly used in mining for the
tion of crushing plants, transportation of truck transportation, in the operation of
mineral raw materials and tailings, raising auxiliary machinery and rarely, in the
dust from landfill and ash dumps, oxidation operation of various generators. The exhaust
on separation tailing dumps, etc. gases are discharged through the exhaust
The most important air pollutants can be pipes of engine and immediately sprayed
divided into two groups: dust and gases. and diluted in the ambient atmosphere. The

content of hazardous components in the the flotation tailings is most often presented
exhaust gases depends on the quality of in table as shown in the attached Table 3
diesel fuel, tfuel combustion, quality of drive with data of directed measurers of atmo-
engine, exhaust gas purification device, etc. spheric precipitation sludge, and Table 3
The air quality (mean values of preci- with data from a non-directed atmospheric
pitated results) in parts of the city or the sludge measurer.
surrounding area exposed to the impact of
Table 3 Values of directed atmospheric precipitation sludge measurers for October 2016 [3]
Total solid Insoluble Soluble Flammable
Ord. Sample Ash
substances solids solids substances
No. mark mg/m2/day
mg/m2/day mg/m2/day mg/m2/day mg/m2/day
1. E 119.92 58.39 56.53 15.01 43.38
2. W 227.54 132.52 95.02 88.10 44.42
1
3. N 146.03 87.57 58.46 45.05 42.52
4. S 244.00 178.47 65.53 109.54 68.93
5. E 142.73 78.47 64.26 48.75 29.72
6. W 175.21 139.89 35.32 86.63 53.26
2
7. N 193.87 149.54 44.35 118.23 31.31
8. S 185.16 131.38 53.78 88.80 42.58
9. E 110.72 61.78 48.94 23.36 38.42
10. W 89.98 45.15 44.83 16.77 28.38
3
11. N 133.17 79.50 54.17 30.58 48.92
12. S 231.07 160.43 69.64 111.07 49.36
Table 4 Values of non-directed atmospheric precipitation sludge measurers for

October 2016 g. [3]
Ord. Total solid Insoluble Soluble Ash Flammable Lead Sample

Sample
substances solids solids mg/m2/ substances concentrate quantit
No. mark
mg/m2/day mg/m2/day mg/m2/day day mg/m2/day µg/m2/day y ml
1. 1 233.56 138.46 95.10 87.24 51.22 216.08 420
3602. 2 193.65 129.55 64.10 81.91 47.64 195.65 550
3. 3 164.84 92.75 72.09 42.42 50.33 107.39 210
MDK po St. RS 300-450 100-250
Measuring points: 1. Flotation Plant - east of the tailing dump; 2. Gornji Krnjin - north-west of the
tailing dump; 3. Kutnje - southeast of the tailing dump
CONCLUSION
It is easy to conclude that the Flotation The problem is additionally increased by

Plant is a problem and an economic cha- the fact that the flotation equipment was
llenge for Leposavic, surrounding towns, the already outdated at the time of construction.
Ibar River, environment in general, whereas The lack of modern equipment and ele-
on the other hand, the Flotation Plant as a ments, both for the ore processing, as well as
whole with the mines represents the eco- for the environmental protection, is mani-
nomic security for a large number of peope fested in a form of environment pollution
living and working here. and contamination by the side products of

REFERENCES
flotation technology. The consequence of all [1] "Rules of Procedures on Drinking

of this is a difficult economic situation in the Water Hygienic Quality", Official
whole country, all the misfortunes that we Gazette of Federal Republic of Yugo-
have faced, and, to a great extent, the low slavia, No. 42, 8, (1998), (in Serbian)
level of awareness about environmental [2] Dražević, Lj. (2009); ''Pollution by
protection and the consequences that nature Heavy Metal in the Alluvion of the
can bring back to us as a boomerang. Ibar River in the Northern Part of
Whether our country joins or not the EU, Kosovo and Metohija", PhD thesis (in
the mining companies should comply with Serbian)
the environmental standards and appropriate [3] Center for Research and Development
environmental legislation. Thus, the popu- "CIR" in Zvecan (in Serbian)
lation in the mining sites would be protected [4] RMHK Trepča (2012); ''Industrial
from the existing sources of pollution and Sources of Pollution in the Territory of
import of dirty technologies. All this pre- Leposavic Municipality", Center for
sents an additional financial burden for the Research and Development, Depar-
company. Globally, the mining companies tment of Ecology, Zvečan. (in Serbian)
will themselves have to turn to cleaner
[5] Tušar, B. (2009); ''Wastewater Treat-
technologies to relieve the ever-increasing
ment'', Kigen, Zagreb (in Croatian)
cost of environmental protection.

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 622.271/.33(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704179S
Saša Stepanović*, Radmilo Rajković*, Nikola Stanić*, Dejan Bugarin*
SELECTION THE MOST FAVORABLE PUMP TYPE

AND CONFIGURATION OF PUMP SYSTEMS AT
THE OPEN PIT GRAČANICA - GACKO**
Abstract
Coal mining at the OP Gacko - Central Field takes place on two spatially separated locations: the
Central and Overlaying exploitation zone. The deposit Gacko has a high coefficient of watering due to
the large catchment areas, high values of maximum rainfall and presence of aqufers, as well as the
continuing flow from the existing water flows and channels. Due to these reasons, a correct selection
and sizing the structures of water protection system are very important from the techno-economic
aspects.
Keywords: Open Pit Gacko - Central Field, water protection, analysis of pump stations, operating
and capital costs of pumping
INTRODUCTION
After completion of the coal mining in coal seams are characterized by a distinct
the West Field of Gacko coal basin, which stratification or a large number of interseams
took place within the OP Gračanica, and its of waste which are separated by interseams
expansion in the far western part of the Cen- of coal. The mineable zones are chara-
tral Dield, further coal exploitation conti- cterized by different geological structure,
nues at the new OP Gacko - Central Field. applied technology and the depth at which
Coal mining at the open pit Gacko – coal mining is carried out. In addition, de-
Central Field will take place on two spatially velopment of the open pit in the next period
separated locations, worksites, in the Central can be divided into two specific sub-periods.
exploitation zone and Overlaying exploita- In the first sub-period, in which the mining
tion zone. In the Central exploitation zone, in the zone of overlying coal seams shall be
the mining operation of the main coal seam carried out by 2025, the development of
are realized, the first and second floor seam works is mainly planned with slower pro-
of the coal seam, and in Overlaying exploita- gression of works by a depth, and mainly in
tion zone, coal from overlying series are the Central exploitation zone. After the end
mined that consist of three coal seams. All of coal mining in the Overlaying exploita-
coal seams are complex, and the overlaying tion zone, the works shall be continued ex-
*
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor, e-mail: sasa.stepanovic@irmbor.co.rs
**
This work is derived from the project TR37001 “The Impact of Mining Waste from RTB Bor on the
Pollution of Surrounding Water Systems with the Proposal of Measures and Procedures for Reduc-
tion Harmful Effect on the Environment”, funded by the Ministry of Education, Science and Techno-
logical Development of the Republic of Serbia.

clusively in the Central exploitation zone.  Aquifers and inflow of water from
The second subperiod of exploitation is permanent natural waterways and
characterized by widening the open pit, or canals.
an intensive development of work by a Overall, it can be said that the protection
depth [2, 3]. of the open pit Gacko - Central field of wa-
ter takes place in a complex hydrological,
GENERAL TERMS hydrogeological and technological – techni-
cal conditions and as a technologically com-
Within the complex of coal mining, the
plex medium contains different types of
protection system of the open pit on water
drainage facilities (water-proof screen, ca-
must provide the safety development the
nals, water collectors, pumping stations,
activities at the open and favorable condi-
gravity pipelines and pressurized pipeline,
tions for the high-capacity and economical overfalls, piezometers, etc.). The designed
operation of the basic exacavation, transport conditions of works until the end of lifetime
and disposal equipment [1].
of the open pit mine Gacko - Central Field
Analyzing the available data on the
by the five-year exploitation periods are
quantity of water evacuated in the last dec-
shown in Figure 1.
ade from the open pit, it was found that the
In defining the system of protection of
coefficient of deposit watering Gacko K>3.5 the open pit Gacko - Central field of water,
as the deposit Gacko classified as deposits as the starting point, the existing system,
with high coefficient of watering.
technology and equipment were taken into
The most important natural factors that
account that are used for a longer time for
influence the selection and sizing the struc-
the evacuation of water from the open pit
tures of defense system at the open pit of zone. Since this is the equipment that is
water are [2, 3]: modern, fit the needs of exploitation and for
 Large catchment area, which which the staff for maintenance has been
amounts to 36 km2, out of which already trained, preference, it was concluded
20 km2 is the area of high mountains, to use the existing equipment and equipment
9 km2 is the plateau Gacko field and with similar characteristics for water drain-
the other space of 7 km2 of degraded age from the open pit zone.
by the mining activities (external and
internal dumps, ash landfill, etc.). In WATER DRAINAGE FROM THE
development the solutions to protect CENTRAL EXPLOITATION ZONE
the facilities at the open pit from in-
flow of water, the development of Protection of the open pit from surface
mining operations or change the na- water from the east, south and west side of
ture of the soil in terms of water in- the open pit was done by relocation and reg-
flow was taken into account. ulation of the river Gracanica and Mus-nica
 Precipitation leve, characterized by a and Gojkovića stream. With regulated riv-
very high maximum values for the erbeds, the defensive embankments were
legally prescribed return period and a built in order to prevent penetration of sur-
distinct uneven during the year. face water into the open pit at the time of
 The presence of two types of aqui- high water levels. Protection of the open pit
fers: of surface water on the north side of the
 Aquifers in the footwall Jurassic open pit was made by a peripheral channel.
limestones and calcareous - lmarly In addition to this, development of periphe-
flysch formation, and ral channels which would constitute a pro-
 Aquifers in the Neogene Carbo- tection of the surface water from the east and
naceous formation. south sides.

Initial Balance works, 2016. years Status of work at the end of 2020
Status of work at the end of 2025 Status of work at the end of 2030
Status of work at the end of 2035 Status of work at the end of 2037
Figure 1 Designed status of works to the end of exploitation the open pit Gacko - Central Field
In the central part of the excavated area now been in operation) is a water collector
of the Field B at the open pit Gracanica, VS1. Also in the Field C, a water collector
there are the water collector VS-B1 and VS exists near dispatcher. At the lowest
pumping station PS -2. From water collector floors in the Field C, there are two water
VS-B1, water is pumped into a circumferen- collector VS-VS-C1 and C2, and with de-
tial channel. In the south of the ash and slag velopment of works, the water collector
landfill, there is a water collector VS-A1 VS-C2 will be terminated. All water from
where water is pumped into the river the Central mineable zone is pumped into
Gracanica. In the north of the Field C (ex- the river Gracanica. Within the overlying
pansion of the open pit Gračanica in the coal series, or in the area overlying the ex-
central part of the field, which has until ploitation zone, there is a water collector

VS-PZ1, where water is pumped into the tral and Overlaying exploitation zones are
old riverbed Musnica. The existing struc- shown in Figure 2. The pumps at the open
tures for protection the open pit in the Cen pit are mainly shown in Table 1 [2, 3].
VS-C2
VS-C1
VS-PZ1
Figure 2 Drainage facility in 2016
Table 1 Available pump stations at the open pit Gacko – Central field
Pump Pump power Voltage
Rb Manufacturer Pcs. Note
designation (KW) (V)
1 BS 2250 MT Flygt 54 380 15 Submersible
2 BS 2250 HT Flygt 54 380 5 Submersible
3 BS 2400 MT Flygt 90 380 2 Submersible
4 BS 2400 HT Flygt 90 380 5 Submersible
5 CS 3240 Flygt 275 6 000 5 Submersible
6 DH 86-50 Jugoturbina 500 6 000 2 On a pontoon
Conceptually, it predicted for the future by the pumps and pipeline, initially in the
period that all water, surface and groundwa- river Gracanica, and later in the southern
ter, which are found in a contour of the Cen- circumferential channel.
tral exploitation zone shall be collected in As a separate issue within the definition
the central water collector, and then to drain and sizing the protection facilities of the

open pit of water, the problem of drainage water drainage outside a contour of
water from the Central exploitation zone the open pit.
was allocated. In designing this part of the
drainage system, it was started from the fol- ANALYSIS OF PUMP SYSTEM
lowing settings:
 Advantage in the selection the pump In the function of determining the most
types of pumps at the open pit. Con- advantageous system for water drainage [4,
sidering the characteristics of the eli- 5, 6, 7, 8] from the Central zone, different
gible pumps can pump engagement types of pumps were analyzed for various
type CS 3240 and BS 2400 HT. height differences between the floors (cas-
 Selected type of pumps will be en- cade) of repumping. The following types of
gaged in the exploitation area of the pumps were analyzed: Flygt CS 3240 and
Central zone to the end of exploita- Flygt 2400 in two variants of the vertical
tion in order to avoid the reconstruc- redistribution the floors of repumping (Vari-
tion of the pumping plants, pontoon, ants 1 and 2). As an illustration of the ana-
pipelines and electro supply system lyzed vertical redistributions, a distinctive
because the available pumps are sup- intersection is given with the positions and
plied with electricity at different heights of cascading water collectors and
voltages. pumping systems (Figure 3). Vertical redis-
 Having in mind the deepening of tribution of floors cannot be done at the dis-
the open pit during exploitation, it cretion, but the vertical arrangement of
is necessary to provide, at the ap- pumps was already determined in a large
propriate floors, the cascading wa- extent by diagram of efforts and diagram of
ter pumping and thus to ensure the hydraulic pump efficiency.
975
950 SOUTH PERIPHERAL CANAL
925
PUMP SYSTEM 3 67
900 WATER COLLECTOR 2
97
875 PUMP SYSTEM 2
WATER COLLECTOR 1
60
850 PUMP SYSTEM 2
WATER COLLECTOR 1
825
800 PUMP SYSTEM 1

WATER COLLECTOR VSC 60 90
775
750
725
700
675
Figure 3 Scheme of cascade pumping variants in 2035 (─ Variant 1,─ Variant 2)
Calculation the parameters of pump poration with manufacturing the Flygt

operation for water pumping from the pumps, which kept their brand. The calcu-
Central zone is carried out using on-line lation results are shown in Tables 2
application, Xylect 1.41.1 of Xylem cor- and 3.

Table 2 Parameters of operation the pumps type CS 3240 with a vertical
distribution according to the Variant 1 and Variant 2
Pump types CS 3240 Variant 1 Variant 2
Year 2020 2025 2030 2035 2037 2020 2025 2030 2035 2037
Repumping floor 1
Elevation VSC (m) 840
830 780 750 710 840 830 780 750 710
Length of pipeline route (m) 412448 267 426 554 248 215 267 349 515
No. of elbows (pcs.) 1820 18 18 12 9 10 18 12 12
Pumping height (m) 97
107 60 90 80 50 50 60 60 60
Pumping elevation (m) 937
937 840 840 790 890 880 840 810 770
Total pump efficient
72.9% 62.1% 80.1% 78.2% 79.3% 75.4% 79.9% 80.2% 80.1% 69.8%
coefficient (%)
Pump capacity (l/s) 151 104 198 195 199 154 202 198 197 115
Engaged pump power (kW) 211 184 169 252 226 120 162 169 195 105
Specific consumption of
0.415 0.555 0.387 0.379 0.348 0.232 0.237 0.285 0.293 0.274
el.energy (kWh/m3)
Repumping floor 2
Length of pipeline route (m) 222 296 292 164 233 122 167 220
No. of elbows (kom.) 12 18 16 9 10 9 12 12
Pumping height (m) 97 97 80 47 57 50 60 60
Pumping elevation (m) 937 937 870 937 937 890 870 830
Total pump efficient 76.6
77.5% 80.0% 77.1% 80.3% 79.2% 80.2% 72.2%
coefficient (%) %
Pump capacity (l/s) 188.8 181.1 203.6 177 200 200 198 128
Engaged pump power (kW) 249 245 199 128 178 192 177 110
0.252 0.397 0.326 0.216 0.263 0.222 0.264 0.257
el.energy (kWh/m3)
Repumping floor 3
Length of pipeline route (m) 290 100 206 180
No. of elbows (kom.) 14 9 12 10
Pumping height (m) 67 47 67 50
Pumping elevation (m) 937 937 937 880
80.4% 78.8% 80.3% 77.5%
coefficient (%)
Pump capacity (l/s) 199.8 203 201 185
Engaged pump power (kW) 187 144 202 131
0.276 0.21 0.297 0.211
el.energy (kWh/m3)
Repumping floor 4
Length of pipeline route (m) 221
No. of elbows (kom.) 12
74.3%
coefficient (%)
Pump capacity (l/s) 144
Engaged pump power (kW) 116
0.241
el.energy (kWh/m3)

Table 3 Parameters of operation the pumps type BS 2400 with a vertical distribution
according to the Variant 1 and Variant 2
Pump types BS 2400 Variant 1 Variant 2
Year 2020 2025 2030 2035 2037 2020 2025 2030 2035 2037
Repumping floor 1
Elevation VSC (m) 840 830 780 750 710 840 830 780 750 710
Length of pipeline route (m) 412 448 267 426 554 248 215 267 349 515
No. of elbows (kom.) 18 20 18 18 12 9 10 18 12 12
Pumping height (m) 97 107 60 90 80 50 50 60 60 60
Pumping elevation (m) 937 937 840 840 790 890 880 840 810 770
63.3% 57.6% 47.3% 55.5% 53.9% 42.7% 42.2% 45.9% 47.5% 47.8%
coefficient (%)
Pump capacity (l/s) 36 33 45 38 41 47 50 49 45 45
Engaged pump power (kW) 57.3 60.8 58 62.2 61.8 56.4 57.2 57.6 58 58.1
0.447 0.5135 0.3592 0.4512 0.4199 0.3333 0.3256 0.3592 0.3602 0.363
el.energy (kWh/m3)
Repumping floor 2
Length of pipeline route (m) 222 296 292 164 233 122 167 220
No. of elbows (kom.) 12 18 16 9 10 9 12 12
Pumping height (m) 97 97 80 47 57 50 60 60
Pumping elevation (m) 937 937 870 937 937 890 870 830
56.2% 56.8% 53.7% 40.8% 45.9% 43.4% 47.0% 47.9%
coefficient (%)
Pump capacity (l/s) 36.3 35.7 41 48 45.6 49.4 45 46.6
Engaged pump power (kW) 62.3 60.9 61.5 56 57.6 57.6 57.5 59.3
0.4767 0.4713 0.4156 0.3246 0.3505 0.3227 0.3571 0.353
el.energy (kWh/m3)
Repumping floor 3
Length of pipeline route (m) 290 100 206 180
No. of elbows (kom.) 14 9 12 10
Pumping height (m) 67 47 67 50
Pumping elevation (m) 937 937 937 880
50.3% 41.8% 48.4% 42.5%
coefficient (%)
Pump capacity (l/s) 44.6 50.2 38.5 47.3
Engaged pump power (kW) 60.3 57.1 53.3 56.4
0.377 0.3142 0.382 0.3322
el.energy (kWh/m3)
Repumping floor 4
Length of pipeline route (m) 221
No. of elbows (kom.) 12
45.9%
coefficient (%)
Pump capacity (l/s) 45.6
Engaged pump power (kW) 57.6
0.3504
el.energy (kWh/m3)

Comparison the alternative solutions  Specific electricity consumption in
was done on the basis of calculated and kWh/m3 (Figure 5)
presented technical indicators, as fo-  Specific consumption of electricity
llows: per meter pressure height in
 The total engaged pump power kWh/m3/m (Figure 6),
 Mean coefficient of the total pump
(Figure 4)
efficiency (Figure 7)
Figure 4 Total engaged pump power (kW)
Figure 5 Specific electricity consumption (kWh/m3)

Figure 6 Specific energy consumption per 1 m of pressure height (kWh/m3/m)
Figure 7 Total mean coefficient of pump efficiency (%)
Based on shown diagrams, it can be Also, by engagement the pump type CS

easily concluded that engagement the pump 3240, the better results are achieved than
type CS 3240 in the Variant 1 of vertical is the case for pump type BS 2400.
distribution of pumps, according to all ana- In order to realistically assess the ef-
lyzed parameters, has the best results. The fectiveness of design solutions for water
only exception is engagement of these drainage from the Central zone of exploi-
pumps in the period 2021 - 25. During this tation the open pit Gacko - Central field,
period more favorable is the Variant 2 of in addition to the technical indicators of
vertical distribution of pumps, or it is most the equipment operation, it is necessary to
favorable to construct another one casca- analyze the economic indicators by indi-
ding water collector and a pumpstation. vidual variants. Economic indicators by
This is due to the fact that the required variants mean the calculation of standar-
discharge height this case is 107 m above dized costs of water drainage, Tables
the optimum height realized by a pump. 4 - 7.

Table 4 Operative costs of pump type CS 3240 with position in the Variant 1
Period (years) 2017-2020 2021-2025 2026-2030 2030-2035 2035-2037
Expected inflow of water
6,800,000 7,400,000 8,100,000 8,300,000 8,550,000
(m3/year)
Specific consumption of electric
0.415 0.555 0.639 0.776 0.950
power (kWh/m3)
Costs of el. energy (€/year) 112,880 164,280 207,036 257,632 324,900
Other standardized costs (€/year) 33,864 49,284 62,111 77,290 97,470
Maintenance costs (€/year) 15,883 30,413 29,281 29,567 44,197
Total (€/year) 243,977 298,427 364,488 466,567
Table 5 Operative costs of pump type 3240 CS with position in the Variant 2
Period (years) 2017-2020 2021-2025 2026-2030 2030-2035 2035-2037
(m3/year) 6,800,000 7,400,000 8,100,000 8,300,000 8,550,000
0.448 0.500 0.717 0.854 0.983
power (kWh/m3)
Total (€/year) 184,059 221,587 345,681 412,415 521,464
Table 6 Operative costs of pump type BS 2400 with position in the variant 1
Period (years) 2017-2020 2021-2025 2026-2030 2030-2035 2035-2037
(m3/year) 6,800,000 7,400,000 8,100,000 8,300,000 8,550,000
0447 05135 08359 09225 12125
power (kWh/m3)
Total (€/year) 194,113 249,272 426,406 481,452 650,550
Table 7 Operative coste of pump type BS 2400 with position in the Variant 2
Period (years) 2017-2020 2021-2025 2026-2030 2030-2035 2035-2037
(m3/year) 6,800,000 7,400,000 8,100,000 8,300,000 8,550,000
06579 06761 09961 10993 13986
power (kWh/m3)
Total (€/year) 281,035 322,759 507,402 579,862 752,661

In addition to the operating costs, capital tions in development the water collector,
costs are also considered, containing a value installation and relocation the pump stations
of the existing and new pumps and pipe- and pipeline, maintenance costs and depre-
lines. The total cost of water drainage from ciation of involved equipment. Values of
the Central zone included the mining opera the above costs are given in Table 8.
The structure of total costs by type is show the ratio between the fixed and rela-
shown in Figures 8 to 11. Figures 12 to 15 tive costs.

Figure 8 Structure of the total operation costs Figure 9 Structure of the total operation
of pump type CS 3240 in the Variant 1 costs of pump type CS 3240 in
1CS 3240 in the Variant 1 the Variant 2
Figure 11 Structure of the total operation

Figure 10 Structure of the total operation costs per years in €, pump type BS 2400 in
costs per years in €, pump type BS 2400 in the Variant 2
the Variant 1
Based on the following presentation, a of 46 to 64%, while the lowest share is

dominant share of total costs in all four covered by the mining operations and in-
variants is covered by the operation costs stallation of 7 to 16%.
Figure 12 Fixed (█) and relative (█) operation costs per year in €,
pump type CS3240 in the Variant 1

Figure 13 Fixed (█) and relative (█) operation costs per year in €,
pump type CS 3240 in the Variant 2
Figure 14 Fixed (█) and relative (█) operation costs in €,

pump type BS 2400 in the Variant 1
Figure 15 Fixed (█) and relative (█) operation costs in €,

pump type BS 2400 in the Variant 2

Based on the presented graphics, it can average 0.0874 €/m3. The share of the rela-
be concluded that in all four variants the tive costs in a structure of the total costs
costs increase progressively per years. The amounts on average about 85%.
largest increase in variable costs was record- Figures 16 and 17 gives the diagrams of
ed in the last years of exploitation as a result the total operation costs of various pumps by
of a significant increase in depth of the open the analyzed vertical positions of pumping
pit. The unit costs per years amounts on floors.
Figure 16 Total costs of waterdrainage from the Central zone of exploitation
Figure 17 Cumulative costs of water drainage from the Central zone of exploitation

Based on the graphics in Figure 17, it conditions of supply of energy, the dynamics
can be concluded that most of the total costs of deepening the open pit, and the progress
are in the Variant2 with the pumps BS of mining operations in the plan, the dynam-
2400. In 2035, a record increase of the total ics of relocation the water collectors and
costs shall be recorded in the amountof pipelines, a distance of the final recipients
€ 2,000,000.00 (Figure 16) that is realized and others.
by the pump model CS 3240, what is a re- Economic parameters of the system
sult of need for procurement a large number drainage water must cover the capital costs
of pumps in increasing the depth of the of equipment purchase and operating costs
open pit. of their work, but also the scope and costs of
Based on the results of economic analy- mining operations and auxiliary operations
sis, it can be seen that the total costs of water such as construction the water collectors,
drainage from the Central zone of exploita- installation of facilities, their relocation, the
tion are the lowest for the case of engage- extension of the pipeline, and secondly, con-
ment pump type CS 3240 in the vertical sidering that these works represent a signifi-
distribution according to the Variant 1. This cant part of the total system costs.
case is from an economic point the most Based on the structure of the total costs,
favorable throughout the exploitation peri- it can be said that all analyzed systems of
ods without the most favorable technical water drainage are characterized by a low
parameters of operation. This typical case share of fixed costs, and that the scope for
just shows that the selection of variants can- improvement the cost-effectiveness should
not be performed only on the basis of tech- be sought in application the modern and
nical or only on the basis of minimizing the energy-efficient types of pumps with fea-
cost of procurement the pumps, but both tures that correspond to the specific opera-
factors must be taken into account. ting conditions and not in a savings in rpocu-
The presented methodology was used in rements, especially when it is case with the
designing the subsystem of water drainage open pits, characterized by high watering.
from the Central exploitation zone within
the framework of the Main Mining Design REFERENCES
for the open pit Gacko - Central Field, and
the results of analysis present a part of the [1] R. Simic, V. Kecojević: Facilities for
design solution. Removal of Water at the Open Pits;
Mining and Geology, University of
CONCLUSION Belgrade, 1996. (in Serbian)
[2] The main design of the open pit
Using the applied methodology of work mining Gacko - Central Field for the
analysis of pumps with pumps of different Capacity of 2.3 x 106 tons of Run-of-
characteristics and different system con- Mine Coal per Year, Defense Tech-
figurations, analyzing in detail the technical nical Project the Open Pit from Water,
and economic operating parameters of the MMI Bor doo, Zvornik, 2016 (in
system, it is possible to select the most fa- Serbian)
vorable ones from a technical and econo- [3] Simplified Mining Exploitation Project
mic point of view. Analysis the technical
with Expansion the Existing Front of
application conditions of the pump must be
Works in the South Part of the
carried out for a longer time period in
Overlaying Coal (Roof zone) at the OP
which the system will be applied to the spe-
cific operating conditions, pumping height, Gracanica - Gacko; MMI Bor doo
the fluid characteristics being pumped, the Zvornik, 2015 (in Serbian)

[4] R. Rajkovic, M. Ignjatović, B. Rajko- October Conference on Mining and
vic, Kržanović D: Water drainage Metallurgy IOCMM 2007; Sokobanja,
accumulated at the open Bor with Serbia, 07-10 October 2007; pp.75-79.
Gould pumps; II International Confe- [7] R. Rajkovic, S. Stepanovic, D. Kržano-
rence "Mining 2011" Mining presents vić, M. Mikić: The defense system of
state and future prospects and sustaina- the open pit water Gracanica - Gacko;
ble development; Vrnjačka banja 10 to Mining and Metallurgy Engineering
13 May 2011; pp. 378 – 384. Bor 3/2015; pp. 17-28 (in Serbian)
[5] R. Rajkovic, D. Kržanović, D. Mitić: [8] R. Rajkovic, Lj. Obradović, D. Krža-
Quantity of water and pump system for nović, M. Mikić: Analysis of the
drainage at the open pit of the mine possibility pumping water from the
coal "Potrlica" - Pljevlja; Mining Engi- open pit "Južni revir" the flotation
neering 1/2010; Pages 89 – 102. tailings "Valja Fundata" copper mine
[6] R. Rajkovic, B. Rajkovic, R. Lekovski; Majdanpek; VI International Sympo-
Operating Regime of Wilo Pumps for sium Mining 2015; 26 – 28 May 2015
Drainage Conditions of Veliki Krivelj Bor Lake; pp. 260 – 267.
Open Pit Copper; 39th International

UDK: 622 ISSN: 2406-1395 (Online)
UDK: 621.63:681.325(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704195R
Branislav Rajković*, Dragoljub Cvetković*, Radmilo Rajković*
SELECTION OF INDUSTRIAL PROCESS FAN WITH

APPLICATION OF SOFTWARE
Abstract
This paper presents the procedure of fan selection by the software ProSelecta2 on the example of
an industrial process fan with given technical characteristics. For the selected fan, the detailed tech-
nical characteristics are given, as well as a drawing of the fan with built-in dimensions. In brief, the
basic alternative options for selecting the fan using this software are explained.
Keywords: industrial process fan, software ProSelecta2
1 INTRODUCTION 2 EXPERIMENTAL AND RESULTS
Process air fans have a wide applica- The fan selection starts in the ‘Selection-
tion in the industry and they represent an input data’ window (Figure 1) where the
important component of equipment and criteria for selection are listed. In this case,
plants in many branches of the process the industrial process fan of P4M series was
engineering. These fans generate a forced selected. The fans of this series consist of a
circulation of air that can be used for cool- base frame, spiral housing in a robust steel
ing, drying, ventilation, extracting, com- construction with a single circular axial suc-
bustion in furnaces, etc. The fan manufac- tion connection, and a rectangular tangential
turer Nicotra Gebhardt, which is the au- discharge connection, as well as a welded
thor of the ProSelecta2 software, has the impeller with backward curved blades
classified industrial process fans in four mounted on the shaft of the electromotor-
series covering the application area for direct drive. In this window you enter the
capacity up to 100000 m3/h, and total values of the required capacity, the total
pressure rise up to 8000 Pa [1]. Maximum pressure rise, as well as the density and max-
medium temperature is 300ºC. There are imum temperature of medium. It contains
also the fan versions for explosive and the sub-options for the selection of drives,
dusty environment, as well as various vari- materials and degree of anti-explosion pro-
ants of drives, various types of materials and tection. In this case, a direct drive was selec-
accessories. This paper will be show a fan ted with an electromotor with a frequency
selection procedure on the example of indus- inverter for the net frequency of 50 Hz and
trial process fan for clean air with maximum arbitrary number of poles, non-alloy steel as
temperature of 35ºC, capacity of 71632 m3/h a material and a standard fan version without
and total pressure rise of 3706 Pa. anti-explosion protection. For the given pa-
*
Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor, e-mail: branislav.rajkovic@irmbor.co.rs

rameters, the program gives the listing of fan with the P4M-T3B62-RBC label was
fans from which the user selects one fan. A selected here.
Figure 1 Criteria for the fan selection-window “Selection-input data“
Figure 2 Options for the fan selection-window “Options“

The fan selection is continued selecting The angular position of fan discharge
the corresponding equipment of selected connection and rotation direction is defined
fan in the ‘Options’ window (Figure 2). In in the ‘Inquiry’ window.
this window, the user has the ability to de- Having completed the selection of fan
fine the characteristics of the housing, type and electromotor the software shows output
of anti-corrosion coating, methods of instal- data in the windows “Data“, “Fan curves“,
lation and options regarding suction and
“Dimensions“, “Sound data“ and “Descrip-
discharge connection. In this case, the op-
tions related to the selection of a flexible tion“. Technical characteristics of the fan are
connection, i.e. a compensator on suction given in the ‘Data’ window at the operating
connection and discharge connection, as point and at the best efficiency point. Ope-
well as a transition piece from rectangular to rating curves of the total pressure rise or sta-
circular on a discharge connection are che- tic pressure rise, efficiency and power con-
cked, while all other options are left as de- sumption on shaft in relation to volumetric
fault. The method of installing the fan here is flow rate are given in the ‘Fan curves’ win-
via rubber type anti-vibration pads. dow. Figure 3 shows a diagram of the total
In the "Motor selection" window, the us- pressure rise, efficiency and power con-
er has the option of selecting an electromo- sumption on a fan shaft in the function of
tor from the list of electro motors. An elec- volumetric flow rate for a fan speed of
tromotor marked ACM315 M-6/HE was 1185 rpm and air density of 1.2 kg/m3.
selected here.
Figure 3 Total pressure rise, efficiency and power consumption on a fan shaft in the function of
volumetric flow rate of the fan P4M-T3B62-RBC

A drawing with the built-in dimensions window, a technical description of the fan is
of the fan is given in the ‘Dimensions’ win- given. Using option ‘Print inquiry’ in the
dow. The fan sketch is shown in Figure 4. In ‘Inquiry’ window, the user has the ability to
the ‘Sound data’ window, the values of print all output data. The output data with
noise level in db for various frequencies are the technical characteristics of the fan and
given (see Table 1). In the ‘Description’ electromotor are shown in Table 2.
Table 1 Noise level for the fan P4M-T3B62-RBC

63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 LPA
LWA
[Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] (1m)
Casing brake
trough level 100 70 85 90 95 94 93 89 85 83 dB
L_2:
Level for
free intake 110 86 100 102 105 103 101 98 93 100 dB
L_5:
Level for
free outlet 112 87 101 104 107 106 103 99 94 102 dB
L_6:
Figure 4 Drawing with built-in dimensions of the fan P4M-T3B62-RBC

3 DISCUSSION
As the presented procedure for the fan tage of the selected fan relative to the other
selection shows, the fan selection using the series is the reduced size of machine, and
specified software is quite easy when the there is no power loss in bearings or belt
selection criteria are known. The fan P4M- transmission for the belt drive option. By
T3B62-RBC belongs to a series of direct- selection the frequency inverter, it is possi-
drive fans where the impeller is mounted on ble to achieve the set operating point of the
a shaft of electromotor. In the other process fan, i.e. precise regulation of its operation, as
fans series, the impeller may be mounted on well as more favorable starting conditions.
its own shaft with bearings where the power The selected fan works at the operating point
transmission from electromotor is carried in an optimal operating regime with high
out via a coupling or a pulley. The advan- efficiency
Table 2 Technical characteristics of the fan P4M-T3B62-RBC and

electromotor ACM 315M-6/HE
PROCESS AIR FAN P4M-T3B62-RBC
Efficiency status (single speed motors) fulfills the ErP requirements 2015
Fan data in operating point: (warranty according to DIN 24166)
Offered accessory which is in contact with the transport medium can alter the characteristic
curve and lead to a performance reduction.
Gas type: Atmospheric air
Air flow by inlet: qv 71632 m3/h
Total pressure increase pF 3706 3706 Pa
Static pressure increase psF 3341 3341 Pa
Pressure at inlet: pa 101300 101300 Pa
Density of media: inlet ρ 1.2 1.2 kg/m3
Temperature media: inlet t 35 20 °C
Max. allowable media tempera- inlet tmax 35 °C
ture:
Speed: n 1185 1/min
Max. allowable impeller speed: nmax 1831 1/min
Efficiency: at optimum ηopt 86 %
Efficiency: at operating η 86 %
point
Required power: at fan shaft Pa 86.22 86.22 kW
Required power: at motor shaft Pm 86.22 86.22 kW
Max. required power: at motor shaft Pmax 87.91 87.91 kW
Inertia: at fan shaft l 67.63 kg*m2
Start-up time by direct start,
tA 5.9 sec
calculated with Siemens-motor:
Sound pressure in 1 m distance, free suction: LPA5 100 100 dB
Sound pressure in 1 m distance, casing break out LPA2 83 83 dB
(without motor)
Sound data according to DIN45635 part 38 (without sound attenuation equipment)

MOTOR DATA
Motor type: Standard
Manufacturer: AC Type: ACM 315 M-6/HE
Degree of Mounting
IP55* B3
protection: type:
Insulation class: F Eff-/Temp.Cl.: IE2
Rated power: Pmot 90.00 kW
Weight
Rated speed: nmot 985 1/min G 1013 kg
approx.:
Frequency: f 50 Hz
Voltage: U 400/690 V Sound pressure: LPA 68 dB
Rated current
approx.: l by 400 V: 160.00 A Sound power: LWA 82 dB
ErP-data at optimum efficiency and density 1.20 kg/m3

Measurement- / Efficiency category B / total
Design status of VSD has to be installed
Overall efficiency (ηopt) 80.7 %
Achieved efficiency grade (Nist) 78.3
Required efficiency grade in 2013 / 2015 (N) 61 / 64
Air flow rate (Vopt) 66837 m3/h
Pressure rise (Δ popt) 3922 Pa
Fan speed (nvopt) 1185 1/min
Motor power input (P1opt) 90.22 kW
Specific ratio (ddpopt) 1.039
CONCLUSION REFERENCES
Application of ProSelecta2 software sig- [1] Catalog “Industrial Process Fans“;

nificantly facilitates the designer work on a Nicotra Gebhardt; Issue 1.1, June
fan selection as it enables faster fan selection 2012.
than selecting a fan by calculation [2], and it [2] B. Rajković, R. Mijović, J. Stanković:
provides a detailed information about the “Reconstruction of Ventilation Insta-
selected fan in a digital format as an output. llation for Dust Extraction of the
The example of fan selection in this paper Primary Crushing Plant ‘Veliki Kri-
does not include all the possibilities of this velj“; MMI Bor, Journal “Innovations
software that, besides the industrial process and Development”, No. 1; 2012 (in
fans, enables the selection of other types of Serbian)
fans from the production program of Nicotra
Gebhadt.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE AUTHORS
Journal MINING AND METALLURGY ENGINEERING BOR is published four times per a year and
publishes the scientific, technical and review paper works. Only original works, not previously published and not
simultaneously submitted for publication elsewhere, are accepted for publication in the journal. The papers should
be submitted in both, Serbian and English language. The papers are anonymously reviewed by the reviewers after
that the editors decided to publish. The submitted work for publication should be prepared according to the
instructions below as to be included in the procedure of reviewing. Inadequate prepared manuscripts will be
returned to the author for finishing.
Volume and Font size. The work needs to be written on A4 paper (210x297 mm), margins (left, right, upper
and bottom) with each 25 mm, in the Microsoft Word later version, font Times New Roman, size 12, with 1.5 line
spacing, justified to the left and right margins. It is recommended that the entire manuscript cannot be less than 5
pages and not exceed 10 pages.
Title of Work should be written in capital letters, bold, in Serbian and English. Under the title, the names of
authors and institutions where they work are written under the title. The author of work, responsible for
correspondence with the editorial staff, must provide his/her e-mail address for contact in a footnote.
Abstract is at the beginning of work and should be up to 200 words, include the aim of the work, the applied
methods, the main results and conclusions. The font size is 10, italic.
Key words are listed below abstract. They should be minimum 3 and maximum of 6. The font size is 10,
italic.
Basic text. The papers should be written concisely, in understandable style and logical order that, as a rule,
including the introductory section with a definition of the aim or problem, a description of the methodology,
presentation of the results as well as a discussion of the results with conclusions and implications.
Main titles should be done with the font size 12, bold, all capital letters and aligned with the left margin.
Subtitles are written with the font size 12, bold, aligned to the left margin, large and small letters.
Figure and Tables. Each figure and table must be understandable without reading the text, i.e., must have a
serial number, title and legend (explanation of marks, codes, abbreviations, etc.). The text is stated below the figure
and above the table. Serial numbers of figures and tables are given in Arabic numbers.
References in the text are referred to in angle brackets, exp. [1, 3]. References are enclosed at the end in the
following way:
[1] Willis B. A., Mineral Procesing Technology, Oxford, Pergamon Press, 1979, pg. 35. (for the chapter in a
book)
[2] Ernst H., Research Policy, 30 (2001) 143–157. (for the article in a journal)
[3] www: http://www.vanguard.edu/psychology/apa.pdf (for web document)
Specifying the unpublished works is not desirable and, if it is necessary, as much as possible data on the
source should be listed.
Acknowledgement is given where appropriate, at the end of the work and should include the name of
institution that funded the given results in the work, with the name and number of project, or if the work is derived
from the master theses or doctoral dissertation, it should give the name of thesis / dissertation, place, year and
faculty where it was defended. Font size is 10, italic.
The paper works are primarily sent by e-mail or in other electronic form.
Editorial address : Journal MINING AND METALLURGY ENGINEERING BOR
Mining and Metallurgy Institute
35 Zeleni bulevar, 19210 Bor
E-mail: nti@irmbor.co.rs; milenko.ljubojev@irmbor.co.rs
Telephone: +381 (0) 30/435-164; +381 (0) 30/454-110
We are thankful for all authors on cooperation

Rudarski Radovi 3-4 2017

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Rudarski Radovi 3-4 2017

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ISSN 2334-8836 (Štampano izdanje)

Mining and Metallurgy

Published by: Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor

MINING AND METALLURGY ENGINEERING Editorial Board

JOURNAL OF INTERNATIONAL IMPORTANCE, VERIFIED BY A SPECIAL DECISION

Zoran M. Milićević, Dragan D. Marinović, Nebojša Z. Djokić, Ljiljana J. Arsić

Aleksandar Doderović, Nikola Stanić, Miljan Gomilanović, Saša Stepanović

Dejan Todorović, Zoran Bartulović, Vladimir Jovanović, Branislav Ivošević

Dušan Polomčić, Dragoljub Bajić, Jelena Ratković, Bojan Hajdin

Vladimir M. Petrović, Mirko Borisov, Dragan Zlatanović, Lidija Djurdjevac Ignjatović

Daniel Kržanović, Milenko Ljubojev, Ivana Jovanović, Nenad Vušović

Nenad Magdalinović, Bojan Drobnjaković, Ivana Jovanović, Sanja Petrović

Gordana Rendulić, Marija Mirić

Nikola Stanić, Saša Stepanović, Dejan Govedarica, Aleksandar Doderović

Ivana Jovanović, Srđana Magdalinović, Miomir Mikić, Igor Miljanović

Dragiša Stanujkić, Dragan Milanović, Srdjana Magdalinović, Ivana Jovanović

Vladimir Radovanović, Ljiljana Savic

Milesa Ž. Srećković, Zoran M. Karastojković, Milovan M. Janićijević, Zoran Stević

Mlađan Maksimović, Miodrag Brzaković, Miloš Grahovac, Ivana Jovanović

Dušan Tašić, Dragan Ignjatović, Lidija Đurđevac Ignjatović, Slađana Krstić

Dragan Ignjatović, Lidija Đurđevac Ignjatović, Dušan Tašić, Milenko Ljubojev

Saša Stepanović, Nikola Stanić, Dejan Bugarin, Miljan Gomilanović

Miomir Mikić, Radmilo Rajković, Milenko Jovanović, Miroslava Maksimović

Marko Savić, Milan Milojević, Nikola Pavlović, Miloš Milanović

Saša Stepanović, Radmilo Rajković, Nikola Stanić, Dejan Bugarin

Branislav Rajković, Dragoljub Cvetković, Radmilo Rajković

UDK: 628.539:504.06(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704001M

Zoran M. Milićević*, Dragan D. Marinović**,

IMPACT THE CONCENTRATION OF SUSPENDED PARTICLES

No. 3-4, 2017 1 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

No. 3-4, 2017 2 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

No. 3-4, 2017 3 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

Considering the permitted values of concentration (3042.51 g/m3), the highest

No. 3-4, 2017 4 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

No. 3-4, 2017 5 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

No. 3-4, 2017 6 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

Figure 1 Average monthly concentrations of suspended particles PM10

No. 3-4, 2017 7 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

No. 3-4, 2017 8 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

Analysis of impact of concentration of [1] Grzetic, I., (2016) Suspended and

No. 3-4, 2017 9 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

No. 3-4, 2017 10 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

UDK: 622.271(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704011D

Aleksandar Doderović*, Nikola Stanić*, Miljan Gomilanović*, Saša Stepanović*

REDISTRIBUTION OF EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT FOR

No. 3-4, 2017 11 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

DESCRIPTION OF THE CONDITION

Vertical arrangement of equipment on  I BTO system

No. 3-4, 2017 12 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

No. 3-4, 2017 13 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

Discontinuous excavation equipment Exterior Landfill. This excavator primarily

No. 3-4, 2017 14 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

No. 3-4, 2017 15 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

No. 3-4, 2017 16 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

Figure 5 Proposal of equipment redistribution

No. 3-4, 2017 17 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

Figure 6 Work of the Combined system equipment at the plateau 925-926

No. 3-4, 2017 18 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

No. 3-4, 2017 19 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

No. 3-4, 2017 20 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

UDK: 622.7/.355(045)=111 doi:10.5937/mmeb1704021T

Dejan Todorović*, Zoran Bartulović*, Vladimir Jovanović*, Branislav Ivošević*

THE BOND WORK INDEX OF LIMESTONE AND

No. 3-4, 2017 21 Mining & Metallurgy Engineering Bor

Aleksandar Doderović, Nikola Stanić, Miljan Gomilanović, Saša Stepanović

Dejan Todorović, Zoran Bartulović, Vladimir Jovanović, Branislav Ivošević

Dušan Polomčić, Dragoljub Bajić, Jelena Ratković, Bojan Hajdin

Vladimir M. Petrović, Mirko Borisov, Dragan Zlatanović,

Daniel Kržanović, Milenko Ljubojev, Ivana Jovanović*, Nenad Vušović**

Nenad Magdalinović, Bojan Drobnjaković, Ivana Jovanović, Sanja Petrović